JP2017217528A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing interruptions of progress of a game machine.SOLUTION: A displacement member 664 is disposed at a foremost surface of a second variable winning device 66 so that a rotation body 663 arranged at a closing position and an opening position cannot be seen in a front view. Accordingly, when a special game state is formed in which a second specific winning port 66a is opened a prescribed number of times for a prescribed time length, the opening or closing operation of the rotation body 663 can be covered so as not to be seen by a game player. As the result, this can make it difficult to know a timing of stop shooting balls in order to suppress a temporarily interruption of the game caused by stop shooting balls.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known which includes a winning opening, an open position that allows winning to the winning opening, and an opening / closing member that is displaced between closed positions that restrict winning to the winning opening. (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-131375 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the progress of the game is hindered by stopping (stopping) the ball launch.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the progress of the game from being hindered.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side, a winning opening provided in the gaming board, and an open position that allows winning to the winning opening. And an opening / closing member that is displaced between closed positions that restrict winning to the winning opening, and is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing member and in front view with at least a part of the opening / closing member Overlapping front members are provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the front member is formed to be displaceable, and a displacement position of the front member is performed when the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed. The displacement position differs depending on whether or not there is any.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the front member overlaps the entire displacement locus of the opening / closing member in a front view at least in a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to ensure the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the second aspect, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being hindered.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective exploded view of the 2nd variable winning device. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of the 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where a rotating body is arranged in a closed position, and (b) is the 2nd variable prize-winning device in a state where a rotating body is arranged in an open position. FIG. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the second variable winning device in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the reference position, and (b) is a second variable winning device in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the shielding position. FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus in the VI-VI line of FIG.5 (b). It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is the exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked at the exploded up-and-down slide unit from the front. It is the exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked back at the exploded up-and-down slide unit. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a rear view of a displacement member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG.15 (b), (b) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XVIb-XVIb line of FIG.15 (b). is there. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the displacement member which looked at the disassembled displacement member in front. It is the disassembled back perspective view of the displacement member which looked at the disassembled displacement member from the back. It is the exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked at the exploded up-and-down slide unit from the front. It is the exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked back at the exploded up-and-down slide unit. It is a front perspective view of a back base, an intermediate base, and a front base. It is a back perspective view of a back base, an intermediate base, and a front base. (A) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in the disassembled state, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in the disassembled state. (A) is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit in the state where a displacement member is arranged in an up position, and (b) is an up-and-down slide unit in a state in which a displacement member is arranged between an up position and a down position. It is a front view, (c) is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit in the state where a displacement member is arranged in a lowered position. FIG. 20 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. 19. FIG. 21 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVII in FIG. 20. FIG. 27 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base in a state where the transmission mechanism has changed from FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base in a state where the transmission mechanism has changed from FIG. 27. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of a second rack and a second pinion. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical slide unit. It is the decomposition | disassembly back perspective view of the other side member which looked back at the other side member decomposed | disassembled. It is a front view of a ring formation unit. It is a rear view of a ring formation unit. It is a front view of an other side annular unit. It is a rear view of an other side annular unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the other side annular unit which looked at the exploded other side annular unit from the front. It is the decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of the other side annular unit which looked back at the other side annular unit disassembled. It is a front perspective view of a back base. (A) is a front view of the drive mechanism in a state in which the posture for arranging the annular divided body at the retracted position is formed, and (b) is formed by the posture for arranging the annular divided body at the annular forming position. It is a front view of the drive mechanism in the done state. It is a front perspective view of a posture regulation member. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIIa in FIG. 33, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the direction of arrow XLIIb in FIG. (C) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular divided body taken along line XLIIc-XLIIc in FIG. 42 (a), and (d) is a portion of the annular divided body taken along line XLIId-XLIId in FIG. 42 (b). It is an expanded sectional view. (A) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the annular ring forming unit in a state where the annular divided body is disposed at the retracted position, and (a) and (b) are retracted the annular divided body. It is the front view and back view of a ring formation unit in the state arrange | positioned between a position and a ring formation position, (a) And (b) is the state by which the ring division body was arrange | positioned in the ring formation position It is the front view and rear view of an annular ring formation unit. (A) And (b) is the front view and back view of a ring formation unit in the state where the ring segment was arranged between the retreat position and the ring formation position. (A) And (b) is the front view and back view of a ring formation unit in the state where the ring division was arranged in the ring formation position. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a displacement member in a 2nd embodiment, (c) And (d) is a partial expansion of a displacement member in the state where relative displacement by a ball joint mechanism was formed. It is sectional drawing. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a displacement member in a 3rd embodiment, (c) And (d) is a partial expanded section of a displacement member in the state where a rubbery elastic body was elastically deformed. FIG. (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb line of (a). (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XLIXb-XLIXb line | wire of Fig.49 (a), (c) is a figure. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the displacement member in the XLIXc-XLIXc line | wire of 49 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of the displacement member in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and back base in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the other side member in a 10th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of the other side member. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in a 12th embodiment. It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. (A) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member in 13th Embodiment, (b) And (c) is a back surface schematic diagram of the other side member which illustrates typically the aspect | mode of the attitude | position change of an urging | biasing spring. FIG. (A) is a rear view of the vertical slide unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and back base in 15th Embodiment. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and back base in 16th Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a diagram. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the annular ring body in the LXVIIc-LXVIIc line of 67 (a), (d) is the partially expanded sectional view of the annular ring body in the LXVIId-LXVIId line of FIG. 67 (b). It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit and the ring formation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional rear view of an up-and-down slide unit and a ring formation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit and a ring formation unit in a 19th embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 45, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when a projecting operation unit 400 or a composite operation unit 500, which will be described later, is operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the protruding operation unit 400 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 18A), the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 can be visually recognized through the opening of the center frame 86. When arranged in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 19B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 8). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 8), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 8), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  A second variable winning device 66 is disposed above the variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 66 is provided with a second specific winning port 66a. In the present embodiment, when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is released for a predetermined time, and the ball becomes the specific winning opening while the specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the prize is entered into 65a, the rotating body 663 provided in the second variable winning device 66 rotates (opening / closing operation), and the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 causes the second specific winning opening 66a to be predetermined for a predetermined time. A special game state that is released a number of times is formed. Here, the detailed configuration of the second variable winning device 66 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 6.

  FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second variable winning device 66. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 66. FIG. 4A shows a state in which the rotating body 663 is disposed at the closed position, and FIG. 4B shows that the rotating body 663 is in the open position. The arranged state is illustrated respectively. FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged front view of the second variable winning device 66. In FIG. 5A, the displacement member 664 is disposed at the reference position, and in FIG. 5B, the displacement member 664 is shielded. The state of being arranged at the positions is respectively illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the second variable winning device 66 includes a board member 860 that is connected to the right outer edge of the center frame 86, and a winning path cover 661 that is disposed on the front side of the board member 860. And a front cover 662, a rotating body 663 rotatably disposed between the front cover 662 and the substrate member 860, a displacement member 664 rotatably disposed on the front side of the front cover 662, and a rotation And a solenoid unit 665 for applying a driving force to the body 663 and the displacement member 664.

  Each of the winning path cover 661 and the front cover 662 is a plate-like member disposed at a predetermined interval from the front surface of the substrate member 860, and the back surface of both the covers 661 and 662 and the front surface of the substrate member 860. A sphere can flow down between the two. The winning path cover 661 is disposed in the left region in front of the substrate member 860, and the front cover 662 is disposed in the right region in front of the substrate member 860. Further, the front cover 662 is formed of a light transmissive resin material so that a player can visually recognize a ball flowing down the back surface.

  In the winning path cover 661, a passage forming wall 661a is erected from the back surface. The passage forming wall 661a is a wall portion for forming a spherical passage between the back surface of the winning path cover 661 and the front surface of the board member 860, and the side of the upper end of the passage forming wall 661a (the upper side in FIG. 4). On the right side, an opening 661b having a size through which a sphere can pass is formed. Further, the passage forming wall 661a is extended to a position where the lower end (the lower side in FIG. 4) exceeds the second specific winning port 66a (included in the passage).

  Accordingly, the ball that has entered from the opening 661b is guided along the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a and is awarded to the second specific winning opening 66a. Note that a winning at the second specific winning opening 66a is detected by a sensor device 861 disposed in the middle of the passage.

  A partition wall 662a is erected on the front cover 662 from the back surface. The partition wall 662a is a wall portion for partitioning the flow area of the sphere between the back surface of the front cover 662 and the front surface of the substrate member 860, and is formed on the right side of the passage forming wall 661a of the winning path cover 661 and the rotating body 663. The flow area of the sphere is defined. An opening 662b having a size through which a sphere can pass is formed below the partition wall 662a (the lower side in FIG. 4).

  Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the second variable winning device 66 and did not enter the above-described opening 661b (the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a) flows down the flow-down region partitioned by the partition wall 662a, and the opening It passes through 662b and flows out to the second variable winning device 66.

  The rotating body 663 is a member for opening and closing the opening 661b of the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a, and is formed as a tapered long body whose width becomes narrower from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the other end. A shaft hole is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the rotating body 663, and the first shaft 665a of the solenoid unit 665 is fitted into the shaft hole. In the solenoid unit 665, a main controller 110 controls a solenoid (not shown) that drives the first shaft 665a.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the rotating body 663 is in a vertical posture along the opening 662b as shown in FIG. 4A, thereby closing the opening 662b and restricting the entry of the ball (blocking position). On the other hand, the first shaft 665a is rotated by driving the solenoid unit 665, and as shown in FIG. 4B, the opening 662b is opened by being inclined in a direction away from the opening 662b. Thus, the ball is placed at a position (open position) where the ball is allowed to enter.

  The displacement member 664 is a plate-like member disposed to face the front surface of the front cover 662 substantially in parallel. The second shaft 665b of the solenoid unit 665 is fitted into a shaft hole formed in the lower outer edge portion. Note that the front surface of the displacement member 664 is decorated with paint, plating, or the like, and the player can visually recognize (see through) the rotating body 663 located on the back side of the displacement member 664 via the displacement member 664. Impossible. In addition, the solenoid unit 665 is controlled by another control device in which a solenoid (not shown) that drives the second shaft 665 b is controlled by the main control device 110.

  In the initial state, the displacement member 664 is disposed in a posture (reference position) tilted toward the front cover 662 and covers the rotating body 663 disposed in the closed position as shown in FIG. Overlapping is invisible.) On the other hand, when the second specific winning opening 66a is in a special game state that is released a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, the second shaft 665b is rotated by driving the solenoid unit 665, so that the displacement member 664 is As shown in FIG. 5 (b), it is arranged in a posture (shielding position) tilted in a direction away from the winning path cover 661.

  The displacement member 664 arranged at the shielding position covers both the rotating body 663 arranged at the closed position and the rotating body 663 arranged at the open position (however, in FIG. 5B, the rotation member arranged at the open position). Only the body 663 is shown). That is, when the displacement member 664 is disposed at the shielding position, the displacement member 664 overlaps the entire movement locus of the rotating body 663 from the closed position to the open position in front view, and the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed by the player. It can be shielded invisible.

  Here, the opening / closing operation (for example, the present embodiment) of the bonus game is performed in a state where a ball can be won and a state where a prize cannot be won into a specific winning port (for example, the second specific winning port 66a in the present embodiment). Then, a gaming machine that is switched by the displacement of the rotating body 663 with respect to the opening 661b) has been conventionally known. However, in such a gaming machine, the player visually observes the opening / closing state of the accessory and matches the timing when it is closed. It was possible to stop the launch of the ball. As a result, the game temporarily stopped and hindered the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 664 is disposed on the forefront of the second variable prize-winning device 66, and the displacement member 664 is disposed at the shielding position. The rotating body 663 disposed in the open position can be covered with the displacement member 664 (overlapping in front view so as not to be visible). That is, when a special game state is formed in which the second specific winning opening 66a is released for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 can be shielded from being visible to the player. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the timing of the stop of the launch, and it is possible to prevent the game from being temporarily stopped by stopping the launch of the ball.

  In this case, the displacement member 664 changes its displacement position to the reference position or the shielding position depending on whether or not the rotating body 663 is opened and closed (that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state). Even when it is shielded by the displacement member 664 and it is impossible to visually recognize whether the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed, the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed based on the displacement position of the displacement member 664 (that is, It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game is in a special gaming state. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663, and it is possible to suppress the hitting while recognizing whether the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed (special game state). If possible, it is possible to secure an interest in gaming.

  In addition, when the displacement member 664 is not disposed, the rotating body 663 having a small outer shape is visually recognized, and the player has an impression that it is difficult for the ball to enter the opening 661b (it is difficult to win the second specific winning port 66a). As described above, as described above, in the special gaming state, the displacement member 664 having a larger outer shape than the rotating body 663 is disposed at the shielding position, and the ball flows into the back side of the displacement member 664, whereby the second specific prize is awarded. Since the winning to the mouth 66a is formed, compared with the case where the displacement member 664 is not provided, the player feels that many balls are winning and the expectation that the balls are likely to win. You can have it and improve your interest.

  That is, the rotating body 663 controlled by the main control device 110 is small in order to reduce the weight and improve the operation accuracy, so that in the conventional product, a special game state is formed, and the rotating body 663 is disposed in the open position. However, when the player is given an impression that it is difficult to enter the ball, the ball is inserted into the displacement member 664 having a large outer shape, so that it is possible to give the player an impression that the ball is easy to enter.

  In the present embodiment, the displacement member 664 is placed at the shielding position when the second specific winning opening 66a is in a special game state that is released a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, but in addition to this, the special game When not in a state (that is, when the rotating body 663 is disposed at the closed position and maintained at the closed position), the displacement member 664 may be disposed at the shielding position. Even when the rotating body 663 is in the closed position (that is, in a state where no winning is made to the second specific winning opening 66a), the displacement member 664 is disposed in the shielding position, so that the second variable winning device 66 is arranged. The player can have an interest in accordance with the prize for the inflow of the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the rotator 663 is a light transmissive resin material, and is formed from the same resin material as the front cover 662. Therefore, the visibility of the rotating body 663 can be reduced by melting the rotating body 663 into the front cover 662 for a player who sees through the rotating body 663 through the front cover 662.

  Therefore, for example, even when there is a deviation in the timing of displacement between the rotating body 663 and the displacement member 664, or when the back side (rotating body 663) of the displacement member 664 is looked into the player from an angle, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the rotating body 663. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the timing of stopping the launch, and it is possible to prevent the game from being temporarily stopped due to the stop of the launch of the ball.

  In this case, the rotating body 663 may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material that is colorless (transparent), while the front cover 662 may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material that is colored (translucent). This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the ball flowing down the back surface of the front cover 661, while allowing the rotating body 663 to be easily melted into the front cover 661, thereby further reducing the visibility of the rotating body 663. . As a result, it is difficult to grasp the timing of stopping the launch, and the game can be prevented from being temporarily stopped due to the stop of the launch of the ball.

  Here, the arrangement space of the displacement member 664 will be described. In this description, FIG. 6 is appropriately referred to in addition to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 66 taken along line VI-VI in FIG. FIG. 6 illustrates a state where the solenoid unit 665 is not viewed in cross section.

  The front cover 662 is formed with a recessed portion 662d that is recessed in a concave shape from the outer edge portion 662c (portions forming the upper and right outer edge portions of the front cover 662 in the front view) toward the back surface side. The winning path cover 661 is disposed so as to recede to the rear side until the front surface thereof is flush with the front surface of the recessed portion 662d of the front cover 662. Thereby, an arrangement space can be secured between the recessed portion 662d of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 and the glass unit 16, and the displacement member 664 is arranged to be displaceable (rotatable) using the arrangement space. can do.

  On the other hand, when the space for disposing the displacement member 664 is secured in front of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 in this way, the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 are retracted to the back side accordingly, and both covers 661 are removed. , 662 and the substrate member 860 become narrower, the space for the sphere to flow down cannot be secured.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the board member 860 has a concave shape from the outer edge portion 860c (parts forming the upper, lower, and right outer edge portions of the board member 860 in the front view) toward the back side. A recessed portion 860d is formed, and the recessed portion 860d is formed by the recessed portion 662d of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 (specifically, the flow area divided by the partition wall 662a of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661). The region corresponding to the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a. Thereby, a space can be secured between the recessed portion 662d and the winning path cover 661 of the front cover 662 and the recessed portion 86c of the substrate member 860, and the sphere can flow down using the space.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the entire front cover 662 and the substrate member 860 are not retracted to the back side, but only a part thereof (recessed portions 662d, 860d) is partially retracted, as shown in FIG. In addition, a step formed by the outer edge portions 662c and 860c and the recessed portions 662d and 860d can be formed on the upper end side of the second variable winning device 66. Therefore, when the sphere flows into the second variable prize-winning device 66, it is possible to impart a displacement to the back side of the sphere due to the level difference, and to reduce the falling speed of the sphere. Thereby, in a state where the rotator 663 is disposed at the open position (see FIG. 4B), the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 66 and collided with the rotator 663 is stabilized to the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a. Can be entered.

  Here, an uneven portion 860c1 is formed on the front surface of a portion of the outer edge portion 860c of the substrate member 860 where the outer edge portion on the upper side of the substrate member 860 is formed in front view. The concavo-convex portion 860c1 is a portion formed in a sawtooth shape in cross section by alternately arranging peaks (projections) and valleys (concave grooves), and the extending direction of the projections and grooves is downward. As it goes toward (lower side in FIG. 4), the passage forming wall 661a is inclined toward the opening 661b side (left side in FIG. 4).

  Therefore, even when a plurality of balls flow into the second variable prize-winning device 66, each ball is brought into contact with the side surface of the ridge or groove in the concavo-convex portion 860c1 before the plurality of balls pass through the step. Can be rectified in the same direction. In particular, in this embodiment, since the extending direction of the ridges or grooves is inclined toward the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a, each sphere is rectified in the direction toward the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a. Can do. Thereby, even when a plurality of spheres enter the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a, the spheres can flow down along the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a without clogging the spheres.

  Returning to FIG. Below the variable winning device 65, at the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate, an identification label or the like is provided, and is attached to the sticking space K1. The stamp or the like can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 66a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 7, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 7). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are sequentially overlapped in the internal space of the back case 210. In addition, the decorative cover 500 is covered on the forefront.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (the left front side in FIG. 10) is opened by each of the wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The vertical slide unit 300 includes a long displacement member 310 and a first side member 320L and a second side member 320R that are disposed at a predetermined interval and support the one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 in a guideable manner. And the interposition member 370 interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and the one side member 320L, the other side member 320R, and the interposition member 370 are included in the rear case 210. It is arrange | positioned at the bottom wall part 211, respectively. The displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) while maintaining a posture parallel to the interposed member 370.

  The annular forming unit 400 includes a one-side annular unit 410L and an other-side annular unit 410R, and these one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R include the one-side member 320L and the other of the vertical slide unit 300. Each of the side members 320R is disposed on the front (front) side. In each of the annular units 410L and 410R, a pair of upper and lower annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are disposed so as to be displaceable. The annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing the annular shape into four in the circumferential direction. When these annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are displaced to the center position, the respective divided surfaces come into contact with each other. Thus, an annular shape is formed (see FIG. 45).

  The decorative cover 500 is attached to the standing end surface of the outer wall 212 in the back case 210 and is disposed on the front (front) side of the ring forming unit 400. That is, the decorative cover 500 is partially covered only on the portion along the outer wall 212 of the back case 210, and shields the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 from the player, while opening 211a (that is, the first cover). The 3 symbol display device 81) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

  The detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 in the operation unit 200 configured as described above will be described below. First, a detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 32.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 300. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the back. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, in the vertical slide unit 300, the first rack 315 is arranged in a posture parallel to each other on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310. The rack 315 is meshed with each first pinion 351 disposed on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In addition, the displacement member 310 is slidably connected to the guide rod P on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, and in the assembled state, the guide rod P has the axial direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Arranged (fixed) to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R in a posture matched with the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, when the first pinion 351 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 341 and the first rack 315 is linearly moved by the rotation of the vertical slide unit 300, the displacement member 310 is guided along with the linear movement. While being guided by the rod P, it is displaced along the longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (see FIG. 25). Here, a detailed configuration of the displacement member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18.

  FIG. 15A is a front view of the displacement member 310, and FIG. 15B is a rear view of the displacement member 310. 16A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 310 taken along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B is a displacement member 310 taken along the line XVIb-XVIb in FIG. 15B. FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 310 when the exploded displacement member 310 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement member 310 when the exploded displacement member 310 is viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the displacement member 310 includes a main body portion 311 that is formed in a long rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a cylinder that projects toward the front at the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. -Shaped rotary base 312, a rotary body 313 having a circular shape in front view that is rotatably and concentrically supported by the rotary base 312, and an end side that is displaceably connected to one side and the other side of the main body 311 in the longitudinal direction. It mainly includes a portion 314 and a first rack 315 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the end side portion 314.

  A pair of upper and lower projecting pins 311 a project from the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. The projecting pin 311a is a part for connecting the end side part 314 to the main body part 311 so as to be displaceable, is formed in a circular column shape with a circular cross section, and is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side part 314.

  The pair of upper and lower projecting pins 311 a are arranged along a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 15B) perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body 311, and the longitudinal direction of the projecting pins 311 a on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311. The protruding pins 311a on the other side are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (the left-right direction in FIG. 15B).

  Further, the main body 311 is provided with stopper surfaces 311b on end surfaces (on the left side and right side in FIG. 15A) on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The stopper surface 311b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311.

  A drive motor and a gear mechanism (both not shown) are disposed inside the rotation base 312, and the rotation driving force of the drive motor is transmitted to the rotation body 313 by the gear mechanism, whereby the rotation body 313 rotates. It is rotated relative to the base 312 (main body 311). The rotation base 312 is fixed to the main body 311. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation base 312 is held by another member, so that the displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be regulated (see, for example, FIG. 69).

  The end side portion 314 is formed with an elongated hole 314a, a stopper surface 314b, and a slider holding portion 314c. The elongated holes 314a are a pair of upper and lower through holes for receiving the projecting pins 311a of the main body 311 and are formed as oblong holes when viewed from the front. The oblong hole 314a has an oblong major axis direction orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 and the one side member 320L). And the direction connecting the other side member 320R (FIG. 15B, the left-right direction).

  In this case, between the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311 and the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314, a cylindrical tubular portion and a flange projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion. A color C composed of a part is interposed. In the collar C, the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the projecting pin 311 a of the main body portion 311, and the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion is equal to the shorter diameter of the long hole 314 a of the end side portion 314 or The outer diameter of the flange portion is set to be larger than the longer diameter of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 16).

  Thereby, as will be described later, the projecting pin 311a of the main body 311 is inserted into the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 via the collar C in the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a (FIG. 16 (a) left-right direction). It can be displaced along. That is, the main body 311 can be displaced relative to the end side 314 (see FIG. 31). In addition, since the collar C rolls between the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a by interposing the collar C in this way, relative displacement can be performed smoothly and wear can be suppressed. As a result, durability can be improved.

  The stopper surface 314b is a part for restricting the relative displacement between the main body part 311 and the end side part 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface and in an assembled state (the main body part 311 and the end side part 314b). In a state in which the portion 314 is connected), it is formed at a position facing the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 with a predetermined interval.

  The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 are provided in the case where each projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311 is located at the center in the major axis direction of each long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (that is, FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, the main body 311 is opposed to the left and right end sides 314 in a parallel posture without being inclined, and faces each other in a parallel posture.

  Further, while maintaining this parallel posture, each projecting pin 311a (collar C) is terminated at one end in the major axis direction (left side in FIG. 15 (a)) or the other side in the major axis direction (FIG. 15 (a)). ) When the displacement is made to the right end), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b face each other at a predetermined interval on the one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311 (between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). A gap is formed in the

  The first rack 315 is formed with a rack part 315a and a slider holding part 315c. The rack portion 315a is a portion that is formed as a rack that is cut into a side surface of a flat plate-like member and meshed with the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 13) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In the assembled state, the tooth surface is disposed in a posture parallel to the axis of the guide rod P.

  The slider holding part 315c is a part for holding the slider S between the slider holding part 314c of the end side part 314. The slider holding portion 314c of the end side portion 314 and the slider holding portion 314c of the first rack 315 are formed in a shape obtained by vertically dividing the cylinder into two parts, and are assembled (the first rack is fastened and fixed to the end side portion 314). The slider S is held between the opposing surfaces (between the inner peripheral surfaces of the cylinders).

  The slider S is a cylindrical member that is fitted around the guide rod P and slides along the axial direction of the guide rod P, and has an outer diameter that corresponds to the inner diameter of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. Is set. A pair of upper and lower locking walls protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surfaces of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. In the assembled state, the pair of upper and lower locking walls are on the end surface in the axial direction of the slider S. It abuts to prevent the slider S from coming off in the axial direction.

  As described above, the slider S is interposed between the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 and the guide rod P, so that the slider S is slidable with respect to the guide rod P made of brass. While it can be formed from a material having excellent wear resistance, the material of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be set independently of the guide rod P made of brass. That is, since the end side part 314 is a member that restricts the relative displacement of the main body part 311 by the stopper surface 314c, it is effective to select a material that can ensure rigidity at the time of restriction. On the other hand, since the first rack 315 is a member that meshes with the first pinion 351 and linearly moves by receiving the rotational driving force, it is effective to select a material that can ensure rigidity for maintaining the meshed state. It becomes.

  Returning to FIG. 11 to FIG. As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 by rotating the first pinions 351 disposed on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively. The first racks 315 provided are each linearly moved, whereby the displacement member 310 is slidably displaced in the vertical direction while being guided along the guide rods P fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Is done. Here, detailed configurations of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the back. is there.

  Note that the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R have a slight difference in shape, but the portions that exhibit the technical functions are bilaterally symmetric (plane symmetric with respect to a virtual plane located at the center between the opposing sides. In the following description, the other side member 320R will be described as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the other side member 320 </ b> R includes a back surface base 331, an intermediate base 332 that covers the front surface (front surface) of the back surface base 331, and a front surface (front surface) of the intermediate base 332. A front base 333 covered on the side, a drive motor 341 attached to the intermediate base 332, a first pinion 351 rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 334, and a drive motor 334 to the first pinion 351 And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force. Here, detailed configurations of the back base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  21 is a front perspective view of the back base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333. FIG. 22 is a rear perspective view of the back base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the rear base 331 has a substantially L-shape in front view from a vertically long main body portion and an overhang portion projecting sideways from the lower end of the main body portion. A transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 19 and 20) that is formed and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 341 to the first pinion is accommodated between the intermediate base member 332.

  A pinion shaft 331a and a rack shaft 331b project from the front surface of the main body portion (surface facing the intermediate base 332), and the first opening 331c and the second opening are formed in the main body portion and the projecting portion. Openings 331d are formed.

  The pinion shaft 331a is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 23), and the rack shaft 331b is a guide groove 364a (see FIG. 23) of the second rack 364. This is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for being inserted into the second rack 364 and for regulating the posture of the second rack 364. A screw is fastened to the end surface of the pinion shaft 331a, and the head of the screw is used to prevent the first pinion 351 from coming off. The diameter of the rack shaft 331b is set to a dimension that is the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364, and the second rack 364 is rotatable about the rack shaft 331b.

  The rack shaft 331b is disposed at a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332. Specifically, the arrangement position of the rack shaft 331b is set such that the direction connecting the axis of the rack shaft 331b and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364. . Thereby, as will be described later, the second rack 364 in which the guide groove 364a is guided by the rack shaft 331b can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a supported by the gear shaft 332i ( (See FIG. 30).

  Each of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d is an opening that extends linearly, and is an area corresponding to an urging spring 366 (see FIG. 26) disposed in a bent posture (biasing in front view). A region overlapping the spring 366). Therefore, when the urging spring 366 is mounted, the urging spring 366 is accommodated between the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and then the urging spring 366 is interposed via the first opening 331c or the second opening 331d. Since the end portion can be engaged with the mating member, mounting in a bent posture can be performed while suppressing the urging spring 366 from being bounced (jumping by its own elastic recovery force). The mounting operation of the urging spring 366 will be described later (see FIG. 32).

  The urging spring 366 is a coil spring, and the outer peripheral surface is curved in an arc shape. Therefore, the opening width of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d should be smaller than the diameter of the urging spring 366. Is preferred. This is because the lowering of the rigidity of the back surface base 331 can be suppressed while the end portion can be locked and the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

  The intermediate base 332 is formed in a shape corresponding to the back surface base 331. That is, the intermediate base 332 is formed in a substantially L shape in front view from a main body portion that is formed in a vertically long shape and a protruding portion that protrudes laterally from the lower end of the main body portion. By covering the front (front) side, the transmission mechanism is accommodated in a space formed between the opposing surfaces.

  The intermediate base 332 has a first pinion insertion window 332a and a motor shaft insertion window 332b formed in the main body portion thereof, and a plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i from the back surface of the main body portion (surface facing the back surface base 331). The roller shaft 332r is projected. The first pinion insertion window 332a is an opening for exposing the first pinion 351 pivotally supported by the pinion shaft 331a of the back surface base 331 to the front (front surface) side of the intermediate base 332, whereby the first pinion 351 can be meshed with the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 (see FIG. 25).

  The motor shaft insertion window 332b connects the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 attached to the front surface (front surface) of the intermediate base 332 to the gear 361 of the transmission mechanism housed between the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other. It is an opening for. The plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism. Screws are fastened to the end surfaces of the gear shafts 332c to 332i, and the heads of the screws are used to prevent the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism from coming off.

  The roller shaft 332r is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the roller 367 (see FIG. 23) of the transmission mechanism. The roller 367 supported by the roller shaft 332r is held by the opposing surfaces of the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 (the opposing surface is prevented from coming off).

  The intermediate base 332 is provided with a pair of left and right restricting walls 332t on the back surface of the main body portion (surface facing the back surface base 331) and on the front surface of the main body portion (surface facing the front base 333). A pair of upper and lower holding recesses 332j and 332k are formed, and a connecting shaft 332m projects from the front surface of the overhanging portion (the surface facing the front base 333).

  The restriction walls 332t are parts for restricting the posture of the second rack 364, and a pair is formed with a predetermined interval. The interval between the pair of regulating walls 332t is larger than the width of the second rack 364, and is formed so as to have a gap between the side surfaces of the second rack 364. Therefore, the second rack 364 can be rotated about the rack shaft 331b by the gap (see FIG. 30).

  The holding recesses 332j and 332k are portions for holding the upper end side and the lower end side of the guide rod P, respectively, and are separated in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 21) by a distance equivalent to the length dimension of the guide rod P. In addition to being positioned, the front base 333 side is formed as an open recess. The depth and width of the recess are set to dimensions that are equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the guide rod P. Therefore, by inserting the guide rod P into the holding recesses 332j and 332k and covering (fastening and fixing) the front base 333 to the intermediate base 332, the guide rod is provided between the back surface of the front base 333 and the holding recesses 332j and 332k. P can be pinched and the guide rod P can be held firmly.

  Thereby, while assembling the other side member 320R in a state excluding the front base 333, the guide rod P is held by the displacement member 310, and the guide rod P held by the displacement member 310 is fitted into the holding recesses 332j and 332k, By attaching (fastening and fixing) the front base 333, the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310 can be connected. Therefore, the assembly work of the vertical slide unit 300 can be made efficient.

  The connecting shaft 332m is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that becomes a connecting portion with the interposed member 370, and is rotatably inserted into the connecting hole in the connecting plate 371 of the interposed member 370, so that the other side member 320R is inserted. The interposed member 370 is connected. That is, the other side member 320R and the interposed member 370 are connected in a state where the relative position can be adjusted. Thus, as will be described later, when the vertical slide unit 300 is attached to the rear case 210, the attachment work can be performed while adjusting the attachment position, and therefore the workability can be improved.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the transmission mechanism and the first pinion 351 will be described with reference to FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the front, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, the transmission mechanism includes a gear 361 connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 341, and a leading gear (gear 362a) meshed with the gear 361. Gears 362a to 362e as a gear train, a crank gear 363 meshed with a rear gear 362e of the gear train, a second rack 364 driven by a crank mechanism of the crank gear 363, and a second rack 364 The transmission gear 365 meshed with the second rack 364, the biasing spring 366 for applying a biasing force to the second rack 364, and the roller 367 for bending the biasing spring 366. .

  Here, detailed configurations of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the crank gear 363 has an eccentric pin 363a protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and a side on which the eccentric pin 363a protrudes. Detected portion 363b is projected from the opposite side. The eccentric pin 363a is formed in a cylindrical shape having a circular cross section, and is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 in the assembled state. The detected portion 363b is a part detected by a sensor device (not shown), and the sensor device detects the rotational position (phase) of the crank gear 363 in accordance with detection / non-detection of the detected portion 363b by the detecting portion. ) Is detected. Based on the detection result, the main controller 110 can recognize that the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 25A) or the lowered position (see FIG. 25C).

  In the second rack 364, a guide groove 364a and a rack groove 364b are formed. The guide groove 364a is an opening through which the rack shaft 331b (see FIG. 21) of the back base 331 is inserted, and is straight in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack (FIG. 24 (a) and FIG. 24 (b) vertical direction). It is extended in the shape.

  The rack groove 364b is a concave groove through which the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack. The groove width of the rack groove 364b is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a, and the eccentric pin 363a can slide along the rack groove 364b as the crank gear 363 rotates. .

  Since the rack groove 364b extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack (that is, a direction orthogonal to the linear motion direction of the second rack 364), the eccentric pin of the crank gear 363 is described later. It is possible to suppress the generation of components other than the linear movement direction of the second rack 364 in the force component applied to the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 from the 363a, and accordingly, the resistance when the second rack 364 is linearly moved. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 23A and FIG. The transmission gear 365 includes a second pinion 365a meshed with the rack of the second rack 364, and a speed increasing portion 365b meshed with the first pinion 351, and the second pinion 365a and the speed increasing portion 365b are It is formed integrally in a concentric state.

  The biasing spring 366 is a metal coil spring, and one end is locked to the lower end of the second rack 364 and the other end is locked to the end portion of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. The biasing spring 366 is elastically deformed in a state where the second rack 364 is positioned at the lower end of the movable range, and applies the elastic recovery force to the second rack 364 as a biasing force. When the two racks 364 are displaced from the lower end to the upper end of the movable range, the biasing force applied to the second rack is gradually increased by further tensile deformation accompanying the displacement, and the second rack 364 is movable. When the upper end of the range is reached, the most deformed state is reached, and the maximum urging force is applied to the second rack 364.

  As will be described later, the biasing spring 366 applies a biasing force to the second rack 364 in a direction (inclination direction) that is non-parallel to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364 (see FIGS. 26 to 29). ) By forming the urging spring 366 from a coil spring, the structure in which the direction in which the urging force is applied is not parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 can be simplified. In addition, since the urging force according to the displacement of the second rack 364 can be continuously applied, the second rack 364 can be urged stably.

  The roller 367 has a cylindrical cylindrical portion 367a that is rotatably supported on a roller shaft 332r (see FIG. 22) of the intermediate base 332, and projects outwardly in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a. A flange portion 367b is provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a is brought into contact with one end and the other end of the bias spring 366, thereby forming a bent posture of the bias spring 366.

  Returning to FIG. 11 to FIG. The interposition member 370 is formed in an elongated shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R as described above. More specifically, a pair of flat plate-like connecting plates 671 are suspended from the lower surface (the lower side surface in FIG. 11) of the interposed member 370, and each connecting plate 671 has one circular connecting hole in front view. By inserting the connecting shaft 332m formed so as to penetrate from the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 671, the interposed member 370 is interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Established.

  A screw is fastened to the end surface of the connecting shaft 332m, and the head of the screw is used to prevent the connecting plate 671 from coming off. In this case, the inner diameter of the connecting hole in the connecting plate 671 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 332m, and the thickness of the connecting plate 671 is a dimension that is slightly smaller than the protruding height of the connecting shaft 332m. Set to Therefore, the connecting portion between the interposed member 370, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R is in a state in which the connecting plate 671 is rotatably supported by the connecting shaft 332m.

  As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is formed such that the displacement member 310 is displaceable along the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. That is, the displacement member 310 is formed such that one side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 11) and the other side (right side in FIG. 11) can be guided to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively, and the driving force of the drive motor 341 is generated. By being applied, it is displaced along the longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

  Conventionally, in such a unit (that is, a structure in which the displacement member 310 is installed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R), the rigidity of the entire unit is low, and it is easy to cause damage. That is, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are easily deformed with respect to the displacement member 310 (for example, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R that should be parallel to each other in the front view are The shape of the first member 320L and the second member 320R, which should be parallel to each other in a side view, are deformed into a “V shape”. The load concentrates on the connecting portion between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310 and is easily damaged. Therefore, for example, in the transporting process of transporting such a unit or the mounting process of attaching the unit to the counterpart member, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are in a “C” shape or “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, it is necessary to handle it so as not to be deformed, resulting in deterioration of workability.

  On the other hand, according to the vertical slide unit 300 in the present embodiment, since the interposition member 320 interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is provided, the entire unit is made into a frame shape, and its rigidity is increased. Improvements can be made. That is, it is possible to suppress the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R from being deformed into a “C” shape or a “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, the handling in the unit state can be facilitated, and the workability in the transport process and the mounting process can be improved.

  A brass guide rod P is fixed to each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both end portions of the displacement member 310 (the first rack 315 and the slider holding portion of the end side portion 314) are fixed to the guide rod P. 314c) is connected, the displacement member 310 can be connected to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R via the guide rod P, whereby the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L and the other side member can be connected. A closed connection loop between 320R and the interposed member 370 can be formed.

  In other words, in the conventional product (that is, a form that does not have the guide rod P with respect to the present embodiment), between the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 and the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. The connection loop is divided, and the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R are disconnected. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R can be connected via the guide rod P (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire vertical slide unit 300 can be increased. Further, the guide rod P is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and accordingly, the rigidity of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is improved. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole.

  The displacement member 310 is connected to the main body 311 and the end side portion 314 (and the first rack 315) so as to be relatively displaceable, so that the guide by the one side member 320L and the guide by the other side member 320R are described later. (Ie, the degree of linear motion of the first rack 315 driven by the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the first pinion 351 of the first pinion 320R of the other side member 320R). Even when a deviation occurs between the first rack 315 and the progress of the linear motion, the displacement is absorbed by the relative displacement and the displacement member 310 is stably displaced (see FIG. 31). ).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are connected to the guide rod P via the slider S (that is, in a form surrounding the guide rod P). Since the displacement is restricted in any of the directions perpendicular to the axis (the radial direction), the posture of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 when the displacement member 310 is slidably displaced can be stabilized. As a result, when a displacement occurs between the guide by the one-side member 320L of the displacement member 310 and the guide by the other-side member 320R, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 occurs. And the function of absorbing deviation due to such relative displacement can be surely exhibited.

  Here, as described above, the insertion member 370 is inserted into the connection hole of the connection plate 371 in a state where the connection shaft 332m is rotatable, so that each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is inserted. They are connected in a state where displacement (relative rotation) is possible. Therefore, since the relative positions of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the interposed member 370 can be adjusted, it is possible to improve workability when the vertical slide unit 300 is attached to the rear case 210. For example, after attaching the one side member 320L to a predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, even when the other side member 320R is displaced with respect to the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, The position of the other side member 320R can be adjusted with respect to the predetermined position, and as a result, workability can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311, the end side portion 314, and the first rack 315 are formed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the elongated hole 314a is used, the configuration in which the interposition member 370, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R are relatively rotatable can ensure the rigidity of the entire vertical slide unit 300. This is particularly effective in ensuring compatibility with the function that allows the mounting position to be adjusted.

  Next, the operation of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 31. In addition, as above-mentioned, below, the other side member 320R is demonstrated as a representative example, and description about the one side member 320L is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state in which the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 25B is a diagram in which the displacement member 310 is disposed between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 25C is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position. 25A to 25C show a state in which the front base 333 is removed in order to make the first pinion 351 and the first rack 315 visible.

  26 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. 19, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 in the direction of arrow XXVII in FIG. FIG. 28 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 26, and FIG. 29 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. is there.

  26 and 27 correspond to the state in which the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 25A is arranged at the raised position, and FIGS. 28 and 29 show that the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 25C is lowered. Corresponds to the state placed at the position. 26 and 28, the first pinion 351 is not shown. Further, a state where the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state where the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated) is illustrated. However, the application of hatching to the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a), 26 and 27, in the state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is at the lowest position within the movable range (see FIGS. 26 and 27). 27) and the biasing spring 366 is in the most contracted state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 26) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is caused by the gear train (gears 362a to 362e). And the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG.

  When the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 26, the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is slid along the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is moved. The second pinion 365a is displaced (raised) upward (upward in FIG. 26), and the second pinion 365a is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. That is, the transmission gear 365 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 365 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the speed increasing portion 365b, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 27)).

  The clockwise rotation (clockwise) in FIG. 27 of the first pinion 351 is the counterclockwise rotation (counterclockwise) in FIG. 25 (a) in the other side member 320R. a) Due to the counterclockwise rotation (counterclockwise), the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 is displaced (lowered) downward (downward in FIG. 25A). As a result, the displacement member 310 is lowered as shown in FIG. 25 (b), and then the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. 25 (c).

  In the state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 25 (c), as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is located at the top of the movable range (FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, and the biasing spring 366 is in the most extended state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 28) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is performed as described above via the transmission mechanism. Is transmitted to the first pinion 351 by the reverse action, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 27). As a result, the displacement member 310 is raised as shown in FIG. 25B, and then the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position shown in FIG.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 364 is transmitted to the transmission gear 365 and the first pinion 351 and converted into rotational motion, and then the rotational motion is transmitted from the first pinion 351 to the first rack 315. Then, the stroke amount of the displacement member 310 (first rack 315) is ensured by adopting a two-stage rack structure that converts to linear motion. In such a two-stage rack structure, when a third pinion that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 341 is adopted as a configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364, a tooth surface for the second pinion 365a is provided on the second rack 364. It is necessary to secure each tooth surface for the third pinion, and accordingly, the size of the second rack 364 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26) is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the second rack 364 is linearly moved is formed not by the third pinion but by the crank mechanism (the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 and the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the tooth surface for the third pinion on the second rack 364, and accordingly, the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  In this case, the rack groove 364b extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the second rack 364 (that is, a direction orthogonal to the linear movement direction of the second rack 364, the left-right direction in FIG. 26). When the crank gear 363 is rotated and the eccentric pin 363a slides in the rack groove 364b, a component other than the linear movement direction of the second rack 364 is generated in the force component applied to the rack groove 364b from the eccentric pin 363a. And the resistance can be reduced accordingly. As a result, energy consumption required for linear motion of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  As described above, the detection that the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position shown in FIG. 25A or the lowered position shown in FIG. 25C is detected by the sensor device of the detected portion 363b of the crank gear 363. It is done by doing. In this case, for example, sensor devices are arranged at the start and end of the movable range of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, respectively, and the displacement member 310 is arranged at the ascending position or the descending position depending on the detection result of each sensor device. In the structure for detecting this, it is necessary to dispose the sensor devices at positions such as the start end and the end in the linear motion of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, and the wiring becomes longer by that amount. If the wiring becomes longer, not only will the material cost increase, but it will also be necessary to route the wiring in a state avoiding interference with other members, and the degree of freedom in design will deteriorate, and the operation of other members will be involved. This increases the risk of disconnection. Particularly, in the structure in which the transmission mechanism is accommodated between the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members (transmission mechanism). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the crank gear 363 is provided with the detected portion 363b, and the rotational position (phase) of the detected portion 363 is detected by the sensor device, so that the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position. Therefore, the sensor devices can be arranged close to each other. Therefore, the wiring can be shortened, so that not only the material cost can be reduced, but also the degree of freedom in design and the suppression of disconnection can be achieved.

  Here, in the structure in which the displacement member 310 is raised and lowered, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member 310, a larger driving force is required when the displacement member 310 is raised than when it is lowered. In this case, in this embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 25C, the urging spring 366 is in the most extended state, as shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the displacement member 310 is raised to the raised position, the urging force of the urging spring 366 raises the displacement member 310 (that is, the second rack 364 is displaced downward (lower side in FIGS. 28 and 29)). It can be used as power for That is, the driving force of the driving motor 341 can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366.

  However, in the structure in which the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as described above, transmission of the driving force between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a tends to become unstable. That is, the guide mechanism that guides the linear motion of the second rack 364 is provided with a predetermined tolerance, and a gap exists between the guide mechanism and the second rack 364 corresponding to the tolerance, and the second The rack 364 has rattling. Therefore, when the second rack 364 is linearly moved, it cannot be completely displaced on the straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 is violated by the above-described tolerance (gap) (closer to and away from the second pinion 365a). (Shaking in the direction to do) occurs. For this reason, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In this case, in the structure applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366, when the direction of the urging force coincides with the direction of the rectilinear movement of the second rack 364, The urging force acts as a force that promotes the posture of the second rack 364.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is relative to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364. Since the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (tilted), the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as a force in a direction of pressing the second rack 364 toward one side of the guide mechanism that guides the second rack 364. Can act. As a result, it is difficult to rattle the second rack 364, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the posture fluctuation.

  Further, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined) with respect to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364. Even if the posture violence occurs once, the urging force of the urging spring 366 can be applied to the second rack 364 as a force in a direction to converge the posture violence. Therefore, the meshing (meshing) of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be stabilized, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, the direction in which the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied is inclined in a direction in which the lower end side of the second rack 364 is urged toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (for example, the left side in FIG. 26). . That is, since the direction in which the biasing force is applied is a direction in which a force component that causes the tooth surface of the second rack 364 to approach the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a is generated, a gap between these tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when the driving force is transmitted from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and the responsiveness can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the tooth surface from being accelerated or damaged by the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after transmitting the driving force from the stopped state (initial stage of meshing). Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing (meshing) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained.

  Here, as described above, in the structure in which the driving force of the drive motor 341 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366, it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the biasing spring 366. For this reason, it has been difficult to set the length of the biasing spring 366 to a length that enables a desired biasing force to be exhibited. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the biasing spring 366 is disposed in a bent posture, so that the length of the biasing spring 366 is ensured while avoiding interference of other members. be able to.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, as described above, the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are formed in a substantially L shape in front view from the main body portion and the overhang portion protruding from the main body portion, thereby extending the overhang portion. Is used as an arrangement space for the urging spring 366, so that the urging spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the rigidity of the structure including the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is increased. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized. Furthermore, since the overhanging portion projects inward from the lower end side of the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the dead space formed below the interposed member 370 is effective as an arrangement space for the overhanging portion. Available to: Further, by forming the connecting shaft 332m on the front surface of the overhanging portion (intermediate base 332), the connecting work with the interposed member 370 can be facilitated, workability can be improved, and the interposed member can be improved. The effect of improving the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole due to the interposition of 370 can be enhanced.

  Next, the meshing (meshing) state of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30A to FIG. 30C are partially enlarged front views of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and correspond to FIG. 30B, the state in which the second rack 364 is rotated clockwise around the rack shaft 331b with respect to the state of FIG. 30A is the same as that of FIG. 30C. ), The second rack 364 is rotated counterclockwise about the rack shaft 331b. FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state where the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated). However, the application of hatching to the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

  As described above, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, the second rack 364 cannot be displaced completely on a straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 is violated by the tolerance (gap) of the guide mechanism. A rattling in the direction of approaching and separating from the two-pinion 365a (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A) occurs. For this reason, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack shaft 331b of the back surface base 331 is disposed to face the second pinion 365a, and the rack shaft 331b can rotate and slide in the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364. Is inserted. Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second pinion 365a can be rotated about the rack shaft 331b, and the tooth surface of the second rack 364 can be rotated. It can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a.

  That is, when the posture of the second rack 364 is violated, the violence is not rattling in the direction of approaching and separating from the second pinion 365a (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A), but the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. (The rotation around the rack shaft 331b) can be restricted. Thereby, it is easy to maintain the meshing (meshing) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In this case, the guide groove 364a is formed in the plate surface of the second rack 364, and the rack shaft 331b is formed in a region facing the second rack 364 of the rear base 331. Therefore, the guide groove 364a and the rack shaft are formed. 331b can be arranged on the locus in the linear motion of the second rack 364. That is, it is not necessary to form a portion (guide groove 364a, rack shaft 331b) for allowing the second rack 364 to be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a outside the outer shape of the second rack 364. Since the second rack 364 can be disposed in a dead space in which no other member can be disposed because it is a space for movement of the second rack 364, space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

  Next, the operation of the movable mechanism of the displacement member 310 (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31A to FIG. 31C are partial enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit 300. In FIG. 31A, the slide displacement progresses coincide with each other at the left and right end side portions 314. In FIG. 31B, the slide displacement progresses at the left and right end side portions 314 are shifted. FIG. 31 (c) shows the state in which the stopper function is exerted by the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b because the deviation of the progress of the slide displacement exceeds a predetermined amount.

  As described above, when the driving motor 341 is rotationally driven in the other side member 320R, the driving force of the driving motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 26 to 29), The first pinion 351 is rotated. The first pinion 351 in the other side member 320R is engaged with the first rack 315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 (the right side in FIG. 25), and the first rack 315 is used for the rotation of the first pinion 351. Accompanied by linear motion (up or down). At the same time, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven in the one side member 320L, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism, and the first pinion 351 is rotated. A first rack 315 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is engaged with the first pinion 351 in the one side member 320L, and the first rack 315 moves linearly (ascends) as the first pinion 351 rotates. Or descend). As a result, the displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) (see FIG. 25).

  However, in such a structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is separately guided and driven by the one side member 320L and the other side in the longitudinal direction by the other side member 320R, respectively, guidance and driving by the one side member 320 are performed. In addition, a deviation is likely to occur between the guidance and driving by the other side member 320R. Therefore, it is difficult to displace the displacement member 310 stably. If a large deviation occurs between the guide and drive by the one side member 320 and the guide and drive by the other side member 320R, not only will the load of each drive motor 341 be excessive, but also the displacement member 310 may be stopped. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protruding pin 311a of the main body 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side 314 (see FIG. 16), so that the end side 314 and the second One rack 315 is formed to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is raised, the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L differs from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (for example, one side and the other side). Even if there is a difference in the sliding resistance of the slider S of FIG. 31 or when a variation in driving force occurs in the driving motor 341 on one side and the other side, as shown in FIG. The linear motion of the first rack 315 guided and driven (left side of FIG. 31B) precedes the linear motion of the first rack 315 guided and driven by the other side member 320R (right side of FIG. 31B). (Positioned upward in FIG. 31 (b)).

  That is, when a deviation occurs between the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L and the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R, the deviation is caused by the displacement member 310 as shown in FIG. It can be absorbed by a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be displaced relative to the main body portion 311). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the elongated hole 314a constituting the movable mechanism has a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310). Thus, a long slot shape is formed in the direction connecting the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (FIG. 31 (a) left and right direction) (see FIG. 17). Therefore, when the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (when a deviation occurs), the main unit 311 is moved accordingly. Displacement (sliding) along the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 of the projecting pin 311a is likely to occur, whereby one end side portion 314 is more along the guide rod P than the other end side portion 314. Transition to the configuration shown in FIG. 31 (b) that precedes the displacement can be reliably performed.

  Each end side part 314 is formed with two elongated holes 314a in parallel, and two projecting pins 311a are projected on one side and the other side of the main body part 311 in the longitudinal direction. The connection strength between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be ensured, and rattling or wobbling of the main body portion 311 when the displacement member 310 is slid in the vertical direction can be suppressed.

  Stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are formed on the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, respectively. In the assembled state, the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween (see FIG. 16). As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the displacement at one end side portion 314 precedes the displacement at the other end side portion 314, the displacement difference exceeds the specified amount. ), The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b can be regulated by contacting each other. Thereby, it can suppress that the protruding pin 311a breaks.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor 341 is disposed on each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction are driven (both sides drive). Compared with the structure driven by the drive motor 341 (one-side drive), the shared load of the drive motor 341 can be reduced, and the displacement member 310 can be enlarged or the displacement speed of the displacement member 310 can be increased accordingly. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, in such a double-sided drive structure, it is impossible to completely synchronize the drive on the one-side member 320L side and the drive on the other-side member 320R side, and deviation tends to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable mechanism (the structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 311) is arranged on one side and the other side of the main body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. Formed in two places. Therefore, even when there is a deviation between the driving on the one side member 320L side and the driving on the other side member 320R side, the movable member located on the one side member 320L side of the movable mechanisms formed at two locations. Depending on the state of guidance or driving of the one side member 320L, the movable mechanism located on the side of the other side member 320R is deformed in different forms depending on the state of guidance or driving of the other side member 320L (projecting pins). 311a can be displaced within the slot 314a).

  Therefore, the deviation on the one side and the other side can be effectively absorbed by the interlocking of the movable mechanisms on the one side and the other side. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 310.

  Next, a method for assembling the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L as viewed from the rear side. In FIG. 32, the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is performed by mounting the drive motor 341 on the front surface of the intermediate base 332 and attaching the gear shafts 332c to 332g to the rear surface of the intermediate base 332. After mounting the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 to the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 to the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 22 for the gear shafts 332c to 332i), the second rack 364 is mounted in its rack groove. The eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted into the 364b and the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365 is engaged with the eccentric pin 363a.

  Next, after the roller 367 is placed in a direction in which the flange portion 367a is brought into contact with the back surface of the intermediate base 322, the biasing spring 366 is placed. The biasing spring 366 is placed in a bent posture while the other end is locked to a locking portion formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. At this stage, one end of the biasing spring 366 is not locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, and is held between the roller 367 and a part of the gear train (the gears 362a and 362b). The

  In this case, the urging spring 366 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the free length is maintained), and can be stably held in a bent posture. In this case, a part of the gear train (the gears 362a and 362b) is also used as a portion for holding the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture, so that a wall portion or the like for holding the biasing spring 366 is used. It can be dispensed with, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Thus, after forming the state where the transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 332 (the state shown in FIG. 32), the front surface of the back surface base 331 faces the back surface of the intermediate base 332, and both are fastened and fixed. Finally, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 through the first opening 331 c of the back surface base 331. Thereby, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is completed.

  In addition, the operation | work which latches one end of the urging | biasing spring 366 to the latching | locking part of the 2nd rack 364 uses the jig | tool with which the nail | claw shape was formed in the front-end | tip, for example. Specifically, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked (held) by the tip of the jig inserted from the first opening 331c of the back surface base 331, and the biasing spring 366 is elastically deformed (extended) while the second rack. 364 is locked to the locking portion.

  Here, when the urging spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily secure the arrangement space, while maintaining the bent posture of the urging spring 366. It is difficult, and in the assembly process, a phenomenon occurs in which the biasing spring 366 is bounced (jumps by its own elastic recovery force). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 32 (that is, before covering the back surface base 331 on the back surface side of the intermediate base 332), when one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364. The urging spring 366 maintains a bent posture and the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed with one hand so that the second rack 364 does not fall off, while the rear base 331 is intermediated with the other hand. It is necessary to perform an operation of covering the base 332, which is complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first opening 331c is formed in a part of the back surface base 331 (a region including one end of the biasing spring 366), so that the back surface base 331 is formed on the back surface of the intermediate base 332. After the covering, one end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 through the first opening 331c. That is, the rear base 331 is covered first, so that the rear base 331 is disposed opposite to the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are arranged on the rear base 331). 364 can be held down), and the biasing spring 366 can be prevented from being repelled and the second rack 364 can be prevented from falling off. As a result, the work of connecting one end of the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 can be easily performed, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

  In addition, since the first opening 331c is formed in the back surface base 331 in this way, not only the workability of the assembly work (attachment work of the biasing spring 366) can be improved, but also the biasing spring 366. Can reduce sliding resistance when elastically deforming (stretching). In other words, as described above, the first opening 331c is formed in a region overlapping the biasing spring 366 when the back surface base 331 is viewed from the back, so that sliding between the biasing spring 366 and the back surface base 331 is suppressed. Thus, the occurrence of resistance can be reduced. Therefore, since the elastic deformation of the urging spring 366 can be suppressed, the urging force can be stably applied to the second rack 364. Further, even when the biasing spring 366 is formed as a metal coil spring and the back base 331 is formed of a resin material, the first opening 331c is formed, so that the biasing spring 366 It is possible to suppress the back base 331 from being worn due to the sliding, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the dust generated by the wear from entering the electronic device such as a mechanical movable part or a sensor device and having an adverse effect.

  In addition, not only the first opening 331c corresponding to one end side of the urging spring 366 but also the second opening 331d corresponding to the other end side of the urging spring 366 is formed in the back surface base 331. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sliding resistance and suppress the wear described above.

  In this case, the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are formed linearly (that is, only in a region corresponding to the linear part of the biasing spring 366). Therefore, the plate surface (opposing member facing the biasing spring 366) can be left at the bent portion of the biasing spring 366. Therefore, the opposing member is provided at a position necessary to maintain the posture in which the biasing spring 366 is bent while ensuring the effect of reducing the sliding resistance and suppressing the wear while ensuring the area where the opening is formed to the maximum. Can be arranged.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the ring forming unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 45.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the ring forming unit 400, and FIG. 34 is a rear view of the ring forming unit 400. 33 and 34 show a state in which the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the annular forming unit 400 includes a one-side annular unit 410L and another-side annular unit 410R that are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval and facing each other. The units 410L and 410R are provided with a pair of upper and lower annular divided bodies 440L1, 440L2, 440R1, and 440R2, respectively. The ring forming unit 400 operates each of the ring units 410L and 410R to move each of the ring divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position shown in FIG. (Formation position), and an annular shape is formed at the annular formation position (see FIGS. 43 to 45).

  Here, the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R have a slight difference in shape, but the portions that exhibit technical functions are symmetrical (except for the positioning mechanism) In the following description, the other-side annular unit 410R will be described as a representative example, and the one-side annular unit 410L will be described. Is omitted. The positioning mechanism will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of the other-side annular unit 410R, and FIG. 36 is a rear view of the other-side annular unit 410R. 35 and 36 show a state in which the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 are arranged at the annular formation position.

  37 is an exploded front perspective view of the other-side annular unit 410R as seen from the front side of the disassembled other-side annular unit 410R, and FIG. 38 is another side view as seen from the rear side of the disassembled other-side annular unit 410R. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the annular unit 410R. 37 and 38 correspond to a state where the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 to 38, the other-side annular unit 410R includes a back surface base 420, a drive mechanism 430 disposed on the back surface base 420, and an annular divided body 440R1 driven by the drive mechanism 430. , 440R2, a posture defining member 450 for defining the postures of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, a suspension mechanism 460 for supporting the upper portion of the posture defining member 450 on the back base 420, and a posture defining member 450 The lower end guide mechanism 470 that guides the lower end and the cover body 480 that covers the back surface base 420 are mainly provided. Here, the back surface base 420 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 39 is a front perspective view of the back base 420. As shown in FIG. 39, the back surface base 420 is composed of a main body portion that is formed in an elongated shape when viewed from the front, an upper overhanging portion that projects laterally from the upper end of the main body portion, and an upper overhanging portion. Is formed in a substantially inverted F shape in front view from a lower projecting portion projecting laterally from the main body portion at a lower position.

  A motor shaft insertion window 421 is formed in the main body portion of the rear base 420, and an upper rack shaft 422a, a lower rack shaft 422b, a gear shaft 423, an upper arm shaft 425a, and a lower arm shaft 426 are formed from the front of the main body portion. Are projected. The motor shaft insertion window 421 is an opening for connecting the drive shaft of the drive motor 431 attached to the back surface of the back surface base 420 to the gear 361 of the drive mechanism on the front surface side of the back surface base 420.

  The upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are inserted into the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d (both see FIG. 40) of the third rack 433 of the drive mechanism, respectively, to guide the linear movement of the third rack 433. This is an axial body having a circular cross section. The diameters of the upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are set to dimensions that are equal to or slightly smaller than the groove widths of the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d of the third rack.

  The gear shaft 423 is a shaft having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the transmission gear 434 (see FIG. 40) of the drive mechanism. The upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 are the upper arm of the drive mechanism. It is a cylindrical body with an annular cross section for rotatably supporting the rotation bases 435a and 436a (see FIG. 40) of the body 435 and the lower arm body 436.

  A cover body 480 is covered (fastened and fixed) in a region corresponding to the upper rack shaft 422a, the gear shaft 423, and the upper and lower arm shafts 425 and 426 on the front surface of the rear base 420, and the cover body 480 and the rear base 420 are covered. The upper end side of the third rack 433, the transmission gear 434, and the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 (rotating base parts 435a, 436a) are accommodated between the two (see FIG. 35).

  A suspension mechanism 460 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on an upper projecting portion of the back base 420, and a lower end guide mechanism 470 is disposed on a lower end and a lower projecting portion of the main body portion of the back base 420 ( Fastening and fixing) (see FIGS. 35 to 37). As will be described later, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the front (front) side of the rear base 420 in a slidable and displaceable manner in the left-right direction via the suspension mechanism 460. The lower end guide mechanism 470 restricts backlash (sway) in the front-rear direction when slid to the left. Note that the lower end side of the third rack 433 and the gear 432 are accommodated between the lower end guide mechanism 470 and the back surface base 420 (see FIG. 35).

  Returning to FIG. 35 to FIG. The drive mechanism 430 is a mechanism that displaces the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 by the drive force of the drive motor 431, and is fixed to the drive motor 431 attached to the back surface of the back surface base 420 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 431. Gear 432 driven by the gear 432, the third rack 433 driven linearly by the gear 432, the transmission gear 434 rotated by the linear motion of the third rack 433, and rotated by the transmission gear 434. The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are mainly provided. Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the detailed structure and operation | movement of the drive mechanism 430 are demonstrated.

  FIG. 40A is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state where the posture in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions is formed, and FIG. 40B is an annular divided body 440R1 and 440R2. It is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in the state in which the attitude | position which arrange | positions in a ring formation position was formed. In FIG. 40, the drive motor 431 is not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the third rack 433 is formed in a vertically long flat plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper rack portion 433a and a lower rack 433b, an upper guide groove 433c, and a lower guide groove. 433d. The upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b are portions formed as racks by cutting teeth on the upper end side and lower end side surfaces (the left side surface in FIG. 40 (a)) of the flat plate body, The transmission gear 434 is engaged with the rack portion 433b on the upper end side, and the gear 432 is engaged with the rack portion 433a on the lower end side.

  The upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d are openings through which the upper rack shaft 422a and the lower rack shaft 422b (see FIG. 39) of the rear base 420 are inserted, respectively, and are adjacent to the upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b, respectively. At a position where the first and second teeth extend in a straight line along the vertical direction (that is, the longitudinal direction of the flat plate body (third rack 433), FIG. 40A, the vertical direction).

  The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed as flat plate-like long bodies, and the rotation base portions 435a and 436a are formed on the proximal end side of the long body, and the rotation connecting portions 435b and 436b are formed on the distal end side of the long body. Are formed respectively.

  The rotation bases 435a and 436a are respectively provided with circular holes in a front view to be rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420, and along the outer peripheral surface. Gear is engraved. That is, the rotation bases 435a and 436a are formed as gears that are rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420. The gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is meshed with the gear at the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435, and the transmission gear 434 is meshed with the gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436.

  The rotation connecting portions 435b and 436b are portions connected to the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, and as will be described later, the annular divided bodies are provided via an arm connecting groove 451 (see FIG. 41) of the posture defining member 450. 440R1 and 440R2 are rotatably connected to a rotation connecting portion 441 (see FIG. 38) that protrudes from the back surface.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the drive mechanism 430 is configured such that the third rack 433 is located at the lowermost part of the movable range (see FIG. 40) in a state in which the annular split bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are disposed at the retracted position. 40 on the lower side, and the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 extend along the vertical direction (that is, on the extension line of the imaginary line along the longitudinal direction of each arm body 435, 436). The posture in which the arm shafts 425 and 426 of the back base 420 are positioned).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 can be raised up to a vertical posture in a state where the posture in which the annular divided members 440R1 and 440R2 are disposed at the retracted position is formed. As will be described later, the annular divided body 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted backward, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 431 can be suppressed.

  When the gear 432 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 from the state shown in FIG. 40A, the third rack 433 is rotated by the rotation of the gear 432. Is displaced upward (upward in FIG. 40 (a)), and the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40 (a).

  When the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40 (a), the rotation of the transmission gear 434 causes the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 to rotate clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 40 (a). And the rotation base 436a of the upper arm body 435 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40 by the rotation of the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436. As a result, the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is lowered, while the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is elevated, as shown in FIG. A posture is formed in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation position.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b), in a state in which the posture in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation position is formed, the third rack 433 is at the lowest position in the movable range (the lower side in FIG. 40). ). When the gear 432 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 40) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 from this state, the rotation of the gear 432 is transmitted via the third rack 433 and the transmission gear 434. Due to the reverse of the above-described action, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 and the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435. As a result, the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is raised, while the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is lowered, as shown in FIG. A posture is formed in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

  According to the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed with the rotation base portions 435a and 436a on the base end sides thereof, and the gears of the rotation base portions 435a and 436a are engaged with each other. Since it is pivotally supported on the back base 420 in a state, the rotation of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be synchronized. Thereby, as will be described later, the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 disposed on the distal ends of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be brought into contact with each other with high precision at the annular formation position (FIG. 35). And FIG. 36). Further, if the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is rotationally driven, the upper arm body 435 can also be driven and rotated through the engagement of the rotation bases 435a and 436a. Therefore, the two arms (upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436) can be rotationally driven by one drive motor 431, and there is no need to provide a drive source for each arm. Can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 35 to FIG. The posture defining member 450 is a member for defining the postures of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. That is, when the ring segments R1, 440R2 are displaced between the retracted position and the ring formation position, the ring segments are slid in the left-right direction along with the displacement of the ring segments R1, 440R2. The postures of the bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are maintained in the non-rotating state (that is, the body 440R1 is displaced between the retracted position and the ring forming position while maintaining the parallel posture). Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the detailed structure of the attitude | position definition member 450 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the posture defining member 450. 41 shows a state in which the upper end of the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460 and the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is guided to the lower end guide mechanism 470.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the posture defining member 450 is a front surface interposed between the distal end sides (rotational coupling portions 435b, 436b) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the annular divided bodies 440R1, 440R2. This is a vertically long plate member (see FIG. 35 and FIG. 36), and a set of three grooves, ie, an arm connecting groove 451 and a pair of posture defining grooves 452 positioned across the arm connecting groove 451, is vertically 2 A pair is formed.

  The arm connection groove 451 connects the rotation connection portions 435a and 436 (see FIG. 40) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 to the rotation connection portion 441 (see FIG. 38) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. And extends in a straight line along the vertical direction (that is, the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the posture defining member 450 by the suspension mechanism 460, the vertical direction in FIG. 41). The posture defining groove 452 is an opening through which the sliding shaft 442 (see FIG. 38) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 is inserted through the collar C, and is linear in the vertical direction parallel to the arm connecting shaft 451. It is extended to.

  The groove width of the arm connecting shaft 451 is such that the connecting portion between the rotary connecting portions 435a and 436 of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 and the rotary connecting portion 441 of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 can rotate within the groove and be along the groove. The slidable dimension is set, and the groove width of the attitude defining groove 452 is set to a dimension that allows the sliding shaft 442 (color C) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 to slide along the groove. .

  That is, the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotatably connected to the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 via the arm connecting shaft 451, while the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are slid into the posture defining groove 452. By the insertion of the moving shaft 442, the posture defining member 450 is made non-rotatable while the slide displacement in the vertical direction is held in an allowed state. Therefore, as will be described later, when the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 are rotated, the posture defining member 450 is slid in the left-right direction, and the annular divided bodies 440R1, 440R2 maintain their postures in a parallel state. However, it is slid along the arm connecting shaft 451 and the posture defining groove 452 in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 43 to 45).

  The suspending mechanism 460 is disposed on the base portion 461 having a horizontally long plate shape in front view disposed (fastened and fixed) on the upper projecting portion (see FIGS. 35 and 39) of the rear base 420, and the base portion 461. And a brass guide rod 462 formed as a rod having a circular cross section. The guide rod 462 is disposed in a posture along the left-right direction in a state where the base portion 461 is disposed on the back surface base 420. A cylindrical slider portion 453 is disposed at the upper end of the posture defining member 450, and a guide rod 462 is inserted through the slider portion 453. As a result, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the back surface base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 in a state in which it can slide and displace in the left-right direction.

  The lower end guide mechanism 460 is a member disposed (fastened and fixed) at the lower end of the main body portion of the rear base 420 and the lower projecting portion (see FIGS. 35 and 39), and is arranged at the lower projecting portion of the rear base 420. A guide groove 471 is formed in the portion to be provided. The guide groove 471 is displaced in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the posture defining member 450 (the direction in which the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is displaced when the posture defining member 450 is rotated about the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460). Is formed as a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section that extends along the direction parallel to the guide rod 462 while opening upward (upper side in FIG. 41). .

  The groove width of the guide groove 471 is set to be larger than the plate thickness at the lower end of the posture defining member 450, and the front and back surfaces of the lower end of the posture defining member 450 supported by the suspension mechanism 460 are supported. On the other hand, the mutually opposing inner side surfaces of the guide groove 471 are disposed at positions where they are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval. That is, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471. When the posture defining member 450 is in a stable state, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is not in contact with the inner surface of the guide groove 471. Is done.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the back surface base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 and the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, the resistance when the posture defining member 450 is slid in the left-right direction with respect to the back surface base 420 is suppressed, and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced by the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 (see FIG. 43 to FIG. 45) can be performed smoothly.

  For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are arranged on the back surface base 420 and the upper and lower ends of the posture defining member 450 are respectively guided by the pair of guide shafts, the sliding portion becomes two places and the frictional resistance increases. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the part which slides can be made into one place, the frictional resistance at the time of the attitude | position determination member 450 carrying out a slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is rotated around the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460, so that the lower end side of the posture defining member 450 is on the inner surface of the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Even if they come into contact with each other, since they are supported by suspension, the posture defining member 450 can be self-corrected to a posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the posture defining member 450 can be returned to a state in which the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the posture defining member 450 is slid.

  Returning to FIG. 35 to FIG. In the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, a rotary connecting portion 441 and a sliding shaft 442 are projected from the back surface. As described above, the rotary connecting portion 441 is connected to the rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 via the arm connecting shaft 441 of the posture defining member 450, and the sliding shaft 442 is connected to the collar. It is inserted through the posture defining groove 452 of the posture defining member 450 through C.

  As a result, the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are slid in the left and right direction together with the posture defining member 450 while being relatively displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the posture defining member 450 as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate. As a result, the arcuate path is displaced between the retracted position and the ring forming position while maintaining the parallel posture, and the ring divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the ring divided are formed at the ring forming position. The bodies 440R1 and 440R2 come into contact with each other to form an annular shape (see FIG. 45).

  In this case, a positioning mechanism is formed on each contact surface of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, thereby properly contacting the objects displaced by the arcuate trajectory and the backlash after contact. Can suppress wobble and wobble. Here, with reference to FIG. 42, the positioning mechanism formed in the contact surface of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 will be described.

  The positioning mechanism is formed on each contact surface of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, and since they all have the same configuration, the positioning mechanism between the annular divided body 440L1 and the annular divided body 440R2 is used. The positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface will be described as a representative example, and the description of the positioning mechanism formed on other contact surfaces will be omitted.

  42 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 440L1 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 42 (b) is a portion of the annular divided body 440R1 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIb in FIG. 42 (c) is an enlarged side view, FIG. 42 (c) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular divided body 440L1 along the line XLIIc-XLIIc in FIG. 42 (a), and FIG. 42 (d) is a diagram of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the annular divided body 440R1 in the XLIId-XLIId line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (d), the positioning mechanism accepts a positioning convex portion 491 projecting from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440R1, and the positioning convex portion 491. A positioning recess 492 provided as a possible recess on the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440L1, an engagement protrusion 492a protruding from the bottom of the positioning recess 492, and an engagement protrusion The concave portion 492a is formed as a concave portion that can accept the portion 492a, and an engaging concave portion 491a that is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the positioning convex portion 491.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 42 (d), the positioning convex portion 491 has upper and lower side surfaces (FIG. 42 (d) upper surface and lower surface so as to taper toward the projecting tip. Surface) and front and rear side surfaces (the right side surface and the left side surface in FIG. 42B) are formed as tapered surfaces that incline in a direction of narrowing the facing interval toward the projecting tip. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 42A, the positioning recess 492 narrows the facing interval as the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. 42A) move toward the recessed bottom surface. It is formed as a taper surface which inclines. As a result, even when there is a positional shift between the annular divided body 440L1 and the annular divided body 440R1, the positioning convex portion 491 is moved to the positioning concave portion 492 at the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. Easy to accept.

  The extension length of the positioning concave portion 492 (FIG. 42A, vertical length) is made longer than the extension length of the positioning convex portion 491 (FIG. 42B, vertical length) (FIG. 42). (See (d)), these extending directions are directions corresponding to the arc-shaped trajectories of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 (that is, directions along the movement trajectory when the contact surface is viewed from the front). . As a result, when the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other in an arcuate locus so that the contact surfaces come into contact with each other, one of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 precedes the other, Even in the case where there is a positional shift between them, the positioning convex portion 491 can be easily received by the positioning concave portion 492 in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other.

  The engagement concave portion 491a and the engagement convex portion 492a are engaged with each other (concave engagement) at the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are brought into contact with each other, thereby achieving final positioning. The projecting height of the engaging convex portion 492a is set to a size smaller than the concave depth of the positioning concave portion 492, and the concave depth of the engaging concave portion 491a is set to the position of the positioning convex portion 491. The dimension is set smaller than the protruding height.

  Thereby, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning is performed with a relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relative displacement tolerance is relatively wide) by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, when the projecting tip of the positioning convex portion 491 is reliably received in the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be performed smoothly, the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage, the engagement concave portions 491a and the engagement convex portions 492a are engaged with each other, so that positioning accuracy is improved, the ring shape is properly formed and the rattling after the ring shape is formed Two-stage positioning is possible in which wobble can be reliably suppressed.

  The operation of the ring forming unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

  43 (a) and 43 (b) are a front view and a rear view of the annular forming unit 400 in a state where the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions. 44 (b) is a front view and a rear view of the annular forming unit 400 in a state where the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are disposed between the retracted position and the annular forming position, and FIG. 45 (a) and FIG. 45 (b) is a front view and a rear view of the annular formation unit 400 in a state where the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are in the most separated state at the retracted position. That is, when the facing interval between the posture defining members 450 of the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R is maximized (that is, each posture-defining member 450 is disposed at the most retracted position in the left-right direction). Thus, the interval between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 in the left-right direction is maximized. In addition, the annular division bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the upper end or the lower end of each posture defining member 450, so that the vertical spacing between the annular division bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the annular division bodies 440L2 and 440R2 Is the maximum.

  When the drive mechanism 430 is operated from this state and the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are respectively rotated (see FIG. 40), each posture defining member 450 is moved in the left-right direction as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotated. By moving forward, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the direction of narrowing the facing distance in the left-right direction and the annular divided parts with respect to the posture defining members 450 The bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are respectively lowered or raised, and the facing distance in the vertical direction between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the annular divided bodies 440L2 and 440R2 is reduced, and the state shown in FIG. 44 is formed.

  When the operation of the drive mechanism 430 further proceeds from the state shown in FIG. 44, each posture defining member 450 is arranged at the most advanced position in the left-right direction as the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 rotate. The ring segments 440L1 and 440L2 and the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the left-right direction to a position where the contact surfaces abut each other, and the ring segments 440L1 and 440R1 and the ring segment 440L2 440R2 is displaced (raised or lowered) in the vertical direction to a position where the abutting surfaces come into contact with each other. As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation position, and an annular shape is formed.

  Thus, according to the ring forming unit 400, the horizontal displacement of the posture defining member 450 by the suspension mechanism 460, and the annular divided bodies 440L1 along the grooves 451 and 452 of the posture defining member 450 are provided. Due to the vertical displacement of 440R2, the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 can be displaced along an arcuate locus while maintaining their postures (parallel), and an annular shape can be formed at the annular formation position.

  Here, as a mechanism for displacing each of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, an annular ring can also be obtained by using a parallel link mechanism (a mechanism including a first arm and a second arm that are parallel to each other and have the same length). It is possible to form an annular shape at the formation position. For example, paying attention to the annular divided body R1, the proximal ends of the first arm and the second arm are rotatably connected to the back surface base 420, and the distal ends of the first arm and the second arm are connected to the annular divided body 440R1. By connecting in a rotatable manner and rotating the first arm and the second arm, the annular divided body 440R1 can be displaced while maintaining a constant posture. Therefore, by providing such a mechanism for each of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, an annular ring can be formed at the annular forming position.

  However, in the structure using the parallel link mechanism in this way, interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs, so that the operation range of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 cannot be sufficiently ensured. For example, when focusing on the annular divided body 440R1, in this embodiment, the upper arm 435 is tilted in the horizontal direction at the annular formation position (see FIGS. 40B and 45), and the upper arm body at the retracted position. Similarly, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring forming position and the first arm and the second arm in the retracted position. Will stand in the vertical direction. In this case, in the parallel link mechanism, when the first arm and the second arm are raised and lowered in the retracted position, one arm interferes with the proximal end side of the other arm, and thus cannot be raised in a vertical posture. . For this reason, the ring segment 440R1 cannot be sufficiently retracted backward.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the back surface base 420, and the rotation of the annular divided body 440R1 with respect to the posture defining member 450 is restricted. However, by arranging the upper arm body 435 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and connecting the proximal end side of the upper arm body 435 to the back surface base 420 and the distal end side of the upper arm body 435 so as to be rotatable to the annular divided body 440R1, The ring segment 440R1 is displaced while maintaining a constant posture. That is, as in the case of the parallel link mechanism, two arms are not required, and only one arm (upper arm body 435) can be configured. As a result, the arms do not interfere with each other, so that the upper arm body 435 can be erected until it becomes a vertical posture (see FIG. 40A), and the ring segment 440R1 is sufficiently retracted backward. Can do.

  Further, for example, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are inclined at the retracted position. Therefore, the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 causes the first arm and the second arm to be inclined (that is, Acts as a force that causes the ring to fall (in the direction of forming the ring formation position). Therefore, it is necessary to support the weight of the annular divided body R1 by the driving force of the drive motor 431, and energy consumption increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the upper arm body 435 can be vertically raised at the retracted position, the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 can be supported by the upper arm body 435. Accordingly, the driving force of the driving motor 431 required to support the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 (hold it in the retracted position) can be suppressed or unnecessary, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

  When the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation positions shown in FIG. 45, the positioning by the positioning mechanism is performed as described above (see FIG. 42).

  Specifically, a positioning projection 491 protrudes from the contact surface of the annular segment 440R1, and a positioning recess 492 is recessed from the contact surface of the annular segment 440L1. Since the extended length of 492 (FIG. 42 (a) vertical dimension) is set to be larger than the extended length of the positioning convex portion 491 (FIG. 42 (b) vertical dimension), the annular divided body When the 440L1 and 440R1 are displaced toward the ring forming position and the contact surfaces of the 440L1 and 440R1 come close to each other, the positioning convex portion 491 is received (engaged) into the positioning concave portion 492 to perform positioning. it can.

  In other words, the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are close to each other along a circular arc (circular motion) locus. Therefore, in the concave shape and the convex shape having the same dimensions, the concave shape is related to the convex shape. It cannot be combined. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the positioning concave portion 492 is extended as a long hole along the locus of the positioning convex portion 491. Therefore, the positioning convex portion 492 has a positioning convex portion. 491 can be received (engaged).

  On the other hand, only the positioning by the engagement of the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492 is the direction in which the positioning is orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492 (FIG. 42 (a) left-right direction, FIG. 45 (a)). (Vertical direction on the paper). That is, even when the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are close to each other due to the arc-shaped restriction, the positioning concave portion 492 can receive the positioning convex portion 491, so that the positioning concave portion is longer than the extended length of the positioning convex portion 491. Since the extending length of 492 is increased, the positioning convex portion 491 cannot be engaged with the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492. Therefore, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492, and rattling or wobble occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the engaging concave portion 491a is formed in the positioning convex portion 491 and the engaging convex portion 492a is formed in the positioning concave portion 492, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 produce effects. When arranged at the position, the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a can be engaged with each other, and as a result, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are positioned in the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling and wobbling.

  A structure in which the positioning convex portions 491 and the positioning concave portions 492 are omitted, and the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are positioned by only the engaging concave portions 491a and the engaging convex portions 492a is also conceivable. However, in this case, it is difficult to receive (engage) the engaging convex portion 492a in the engaging concave portion 491a due to the elastic deformation of the upper arm body 435 and the dimensional tolerance of the sliding portion and the rotating portion. It becomes. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is first engaged with the positioning concave portion 492 to perform the first stage positioning, and then the engagement concave portion 491a is covered as the second stage positioning. Since the engaging projections 492a are engaged, the second stage positioning (engagement of the engaging projections 492a with the engaging recesses 491a) can be performed reliably, and the above-described annular divided bodies 440L1, 440R1 Generation of rattling and wobble can be suppressed.

  In other words, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, the positioning accuracy is relatively rough (relative displacement tolerance is relatively wide) by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Positioning), the projected tip of the positioning convex portion 491 can be reliably received in the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be performed smoothly. In the final stage when abuts, the engagement recess 491a and the engagement protrusion 492a are engaged with each other (positioning in the second stage), so that the positioning accuracy is improved and the annular shape is properly formed. Shaking and wobbling after forming the ring shape can be reliably suppressed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in the second embodiment. 46 (c) and 46 (d) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state in which relative displacement by the ball joint mechanism is formed.

  46A corresponds to the cross section taken along line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 46B corresponds to the cross section taken along line XVIb-XVIb in FIG. 46C and 46D correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 46A and 46B, respectively.

  In 1st Embodiment, although the projecting pin 311a of the main-body part 311 was penetrated to the long hole 314a of the end side part 314, the case where the main-body part 311 and the end side part 314 were connected so that relative displacement was possible was demonstrated. The main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the second embodiment are connected to each other by a ball joint 2610 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 46A to FIG. 46D, in the displacement member 2310 in the second embodiment, between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower ball joints 2610. The ball joint 2610 is formed by connecting spheres (ball portions) at both ends with rod-like bodies, and spherical bodies at both ends are brought into spherical contact with socket portions formed on the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314, respectively. The part 2311 and the end side part 2314 are connected in a state in which relative rotation is possible in an arbitrary direction.

  In addition, the socket part of the main body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 is a cover in which a hemispherical spherical surface is recessed in a part where a hemispherical spherical surface is recessed on the back surface of the main body part 2311 and the front surface of the end side part 2314. By covering the bodies 2311d and 2314d, they are formed by their spherical surfaces. The cover bodies 2311a and 2314a are formed with tapered surfaces for avoiding interference with the rod-shaped body of the ball joint 2610.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the main-body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 are connected via a ball joint mechanism, they can be smoothly displaced relatively in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 2310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on one side and the other side). In the case where there is a difference in sliding resistance in this case, or when there is a variation in driving force between the driving motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if a deviation occurs between them, the deviation is caused by the ball joint mechanism. It can be absorbed by the relative displacement of the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 (see FIG. 31). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 2310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 2310.

  Further, in the displacement member 2310 in the present embodiment, a biasing spring 2620 is interposed between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. The biasing spring 2620 is formed as a coil spring, and is interposed between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 2620 acts as a force that keeps the facing distance between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 constant.

  As described above, when the biasing spring 2620 is interposed, when the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are relatively displaced via the ball joint mechanism in order to absorb the above-described deviation, the main body portions are arranged. 2311 and the end side portion 2314 can be returned to the initial positions by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the urging spring 2620.

  The urging spring 2620 is disposed in a state where a ball joint 2620 (rod-like body) is inserted through the inner periphery thereof. As a result, a mechanism for holding the biasing spring 2620 so as not to drop off can also be used as the ball joint 2610, and it is not necessary to provide a separate holding mechanism, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing component costs. Can be planned.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a) and 47 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 3310 in the third embodiment. 47C and 47D are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is elastically deformed.

  47A corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 47B corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XVIb-XVIb in FIG. 47 (c) and 47 (d) correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), respectively.

  In 1st Embodiment, although the projecting pin 311a of the main-body part 311 was penetrated to the long hole 314a of the end side part 314, the case where the main-body part 311 and the end side part 314 were connected so that relative displacement was possible was demonstrated. The main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the third embodiment are connected by a rubber-like elastic body 3630 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  47 (a) and 47 (b), in the displacement member 3310 in the third embodiment, between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630. The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is formed from an elastomer in a columnar shape, and elastically deforms itself to connect the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in a state where relative rotation is possible in an arbitrary direction. The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction is perpendicular to the back surface of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the main-body part 3311 and the end side part 3314 are connected via the rubber-like elastic body 3630, it can be smoothly displaced relatively in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 3310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on one side and the other side). In the case where there is a difference in sliding resistance in this case, or when there is a variation in driving force between the driving motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if a deviation occurs between the two, The main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced by the elastic deformation of the 3630 itself (see FIG. 31). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 3310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 3310.

  Further, in the case where the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are relatively displaced due to elastic deformation of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 in order to absorb the above-described deviation, the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are made to be rubber-like elastic. It can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the body 3630.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is made of an elastomer, the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 can be converged at an early stage by using the viscosity characteristic (damping effect) of the elastomer. Can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 from causing a difference between the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L and the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R. The occurrence of deviation can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a rear view of the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 4310 taken along the line XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, a description will be given of a case where drive motors 341 are disposed on each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 are driven (both sides drive). However, in the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 is disposed only on the one side member 320L (that is, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted), and only one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 4310 is driven. (Single side drive). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, the displacement member 4310 in 4th Embodiment is a movable mechanism (end side part 314 with respect to the main-body part 4311) in a longitudinal direction other side (FIG. 48 (a) left side) with respect to the displacement member 310 in 1st Embodiment. 4314) and the configuration of the first rack 4315 are different, and the other configurations are the same. Only different configurations will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 4311 (left side in FIG. 48 (a)). The number of protrusions of the installation pin 311a is 1. In addition, the arrangement position of the protruding pin 311a on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the vertical direction (FIG. 48 (a) vertical direction) is a pair of upper and lower disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 48 (a)). The intermediate position of the protruding pin 311a is set.

  On the other hand, the end side portion 4314 connected to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4311 (left side in FIG. 48 (a)) is provided with a shaft support hole 4314a at only one location. The shaft support hole 4314a is a circular hole with a circular shape in front view for receiving the protruding pin 311a on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 4311, and the inner diameter thereof is the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylinder portion of the collar C. Is set. Therefore, the projecting pin 311a is inserted into the shaft support hole 4314a through the collar C in a rotatable state.

  That is, on the one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 48A), as described above, the main body 311 is relatively displaced (sliding) along the left-right direction (the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a) with respect to the end side 314. On the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 48 (a)), only rotation around the protruding pin 311a is allowed as relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311. The

  In the fourth embodiment, the first rack 4315 disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 48A) is provided with the slider holding portion 315 as the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted. (Ie, the rack portion 315a is omitted). Thereby, the displacement member 4310 is guided along the guide rod P on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 48 (a)) and driven by the one side member 320L (drive motor 431). The other side (left side in FIG. 48 (a)) is only guided along the guide rod P, and is not driven by the other side member 320R (drive motor 431).

  In this way, in the fourth embodiment, since it is formed as a one-side drive that drives only one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 4310, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and its driving force are transmitted to the first rack 4315. Therefore, the transmission mechanism can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down, since it is a one-side drive, the guide by the one side member 320L and the guide by the other side member 320R are the guide on the drive side and the guide on the driven side. These states are different from each other. For this reason, when the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portions 314 and 4314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 4311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the above-described operation when the displacement member 4310 is lifted and lowered The shift cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form relative displacements in different forms (allowing different forms of relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

  Specifically, the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction serving as the driven side (the left side in FIG. 48A) allows only relative rotation with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311, while the longitudinal direction serving as the driving side. The movable mechanism on one side (right side in FIG. 48 (a)) allows relative rotation and relative displacement (slide displacement) of the main body portion 4311 with respect to the end side portion 4314.

  As a result, both movable mechanisms can be provided with a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively, and a deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member 320L and the guidance by the other side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed by the entire displacement member 4310. As a result, even with single-sided driving, the displacement member 4310 can be stably displaced, and an excessive load on the drive motor 341 and a stop of the displacement member 4310 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a rear view of the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 49B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 taken along the line XLIXb-XLIXb in FIG. FIG. 49C is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 taken along the line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, one-side drive is adopted, and a movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311). Different structures). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, the displacement member 5310 in 5th Embodiment enables the relative displacement of the end side part 3314 with respect to the displacement member 310 in 1st Embodiment in the longitudinal direction one side and other side (the main-body part 5311). Structure) and only the configuration of the first rack 3315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 49 (a)), and the other configurations are the same. Only different configurations will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 49A to FIG. 49B, in the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, the back surface and the end side portion 3314 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 5311 (right side in FIG. 49A). A pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 between the front faces and a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies between the back face on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 5311 (left side in FIG. 49 (a)) and the front face of the end side portion 3314. The bodies 5630 are connected to each other. That is, it is the same as in the case of the third embodiment. However, the rubber-like elastic body 5630 is formed in the same shape as the rubber-like elastic body 3630, but the rubber hardness is set higher (hard) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630, and the spring constant is high. (It is difficult to deform).

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, so that it is disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 49 (a)). The first rack 4315 is formed to have only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

  Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the first rack 4315 can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portion 3314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311) is the same on the one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction because of the one-side drive, the displacement member 5310 The above-described shift when the slid is raised or lowered cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form relative displacements in different forms (allowing different forms of relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

  Specifically, the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 5630 constituting the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 49A) serving as the driven side is the other side in the longitudinal direction serving as the driving side (see FIG. ) The right side) is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 constituting the movable mechanism, so that the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction) is less likely to be deformed than the driving side (constant The amount of deformation allowed when an external force is applied can be reduced).

  As a result, both movable mechanisms can be provided with a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively, and a deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member 320L and the guidance by the other side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed by the entire displacement member 5310. As a result, even in the case of one-side drive, the displacement member 5310 can be stably displaced, and an excessive load on the drive motor 341 and a stop of the displacement member 5310 can be suppressed.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 50A and 50B are front views of the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment. 50A shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven upward, and FIG. 50B shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven downward. 50A and 50B, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 in the front view (hereinafter referred to as “center of gravity position G”) is schematically illustrated using black circles.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 has the center of gravity position as the center of rotation has been described. However, in the rotating body 6313 of the sixth embodiment, the center of gravity position G is eccentric from the center of rotation. The center of gravity is formed to be changeable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Note that the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment has a rack portion 315a from the first rack on the other side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIGS. 50A and 50B) relative to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment. Only the points that are omitted and the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 are decentered are different, and the other configurations are the same. Only different configurations will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 50A to 50B, the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment is set such that the gravity center position G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered from the rotation center of the rotating body 6313. . Therefore, the rotator 6313 changes the rotational position (phase) so that the gravity center position G is decentered to the left as viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 50A, for example, or FIG. Can be decentered to the right as viewed from the front. Thereby, in the displacement member 6310, the gravity center position as the whole main-body part 311 can be adjusted (shifted) to the one side or the other side of a longitudinal direction.

  The rotating body 6313 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a rotationally symmetric shape with the rotational center as a symmetric point, and the metal weight is disposed in an eccentric position so that the center of gravity is obtained. The position G is formed so as to be eccentric from the center of rotation. Therefore, in the appearance of the rotator 6313, the player can visually recognize the center of gravity G of the rotator 6313 so that it is located at the center of rotation of the rotator 6313.

  Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, and accordingly, disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 50 (a)). The first rack (not shown) is formed to have only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

  Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the first rack can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (a structure capable of relatively displacing the end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 6311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction because of the one-side drive, the displacement member 6310 is The above-described shift when moving up and down cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the rotating body 6313 and adjusting the center of gravity position G in the left-right direction, the center of gravity position of the displacement member 311 as a whole is more than the center in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 311. It can be biased (moved) to one side or the other side (ie drive side or driven side).

  Therefore, when the displacement member 6310 is stopped, the rotating body 6313 is rotated to produce an effect, while when the displacement member 6310 is displaced (raised or lowered), the rotating body 6313 is brought to a predetermined rotational position (phase). By arranging and decentering the center of gravity of the displacement member 311 as a whole, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction is adjusted, and the above-described deviation is absorbed. An easy state can be formed.

  Here, when the displacement direction (up or down) of the displacement member 6310 is different, the influence of gravity is changed, so that the state required for each movable mechanism is changed. That is, for example, when attention is paid to the driven side, the state of being guided along the guide rod P is changed between an ascending position displaced against gravity and a descending position where the displacement is assisted by gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, for example, when the displacement member 6310 is lifted, the drive side (one side in the longitudinal direction, the left side in FIG. 50A). The center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism on the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 50B) when the displacement member 6310 is lowered. Accordingly, the weight acting on the drive-side movable mechanism and the driven-side movable mechanism can be adjusted according to the displacement direction (up or down) of the displacement member 6310, and the above-described deviation can be more easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 6310 even when the one-side drive is performed and the movable mechanism has the same shape on one side and the other side, and the drive motor It can suppress that the load of 341 becomes excessive and that the displacement member 6310 stops.

  The center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 does not need to be maintained at a fixed position while the displacement member 6310 is displaced (ascended or lowered), and the center of gravity position G may be adjusted during the displacement. For example, when the driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431 is started and during the period from the start to the predetermined period, the center of gravity position G approaches (or is separated from) the drive side (one longitudinal side, left side in FIG. 50 (a)). On the other hand, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431, the gravity center position G is brought close to (or separated from) the driven side (the other end in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 50A). ) The form is exemplified.

  Further, the center-of-gravity position G adjusted by the rotation of the rotating body 6313 is not limited to the position shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b) (left or right as viewed from the front), but any position (phase) ) Can be set.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51 and 52 are front views of the vertical slide unit 7300 in the seventh embodiment. 51 shows a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 52 shows a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the movable mechanism (the structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) is always effective has been described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the movable mechanism can be fixed. (The relative displacement of the end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 311 can be regulated). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the vertical slide unit 7300 in the seventh embodiment is provided with restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD on the front surface of the front base 333 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fix the movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position. This is a structure for restricting the relative displacement between the part 311 and the end side part 329, and restriction mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are disposed on one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, and Restricting mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD are disposed on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 disposed at the lowered position.

  The restricting mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD arranged at these four locations have substantially the same configuration except that they are arranged in a bilaterally symmetric or vertical symmetric posture, and thus the one side member 320L. The restricting mechanism 7640LU disposed above is described as a representative example, and the description of the other restricting mechanisms 7640LD, 7640RU, and 7640RD is omitted.

  The restricting mechanism 7640LU includes an arm body 7641 rotatably disposed on the front base 333, a torsion spring 7642 for applying an urging force for rotating the arm body 7641, and an urging force applied from the torsion spring 7642. And a holding body (not shown) for restricting the rotation of the arm body 7641 and holding it at the initial position.

  A roller 7641 a is rotatably supported at the tip of the arm body 7641. The torsion spring 7642 biases the arm body 7641 in the rotational direction in which the tip (roller 7641a) is separated from the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 (clockwise (clockwise) in the regulation mechanism 7640LU in FIGS. 51 and 52). . The holding body restricts the rotation of the arm body 7641 by the urging force of the torsion spring 7542, and moves the arm body 7641 to the initial position (the direction connecting the rotation center of the arm body 7641 and the rotation center of the roller 7641 a is the front base 333. (The posture shown in FIG. 52 in the regulation mechanism 7640LU).

  The main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is formed with a decorative portion along the upper and lower side edges thereof, and a roller receiving portion 7311e is provided at the longitudinal end portion of the decorative portion with the one side member 320L. And projecting to the front side of the front base 311.

  The roller receiving portion 7311e extends to a position where it overlaps the roller 7641a of the arm body 7641 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 51 and 52), and the side surface on the side facing the arm body 7641 approaches the regulation mechanism 7640. 51 (in the regulation mechanism 7640LU in FIG. 51, it is formed to be inclined upward from its proximal end to its distal end). In addition, a curved surface that is curved so as to come into contact with the outer periphery of the roller 7641a is formed at the base end of the side surface facing the arm body 7641. The roller 7641a is held by the curved surface.

  When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 51 and approaches the lowered position, the side surface (lower side surface in FIG. 51) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 is the roller 7641a of the arm body 7661 in the restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD. When the displacement member 310 is further lowered, the roller 7641a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311. As a result, the arm body 7641 gradually tilts from the initial position and is displaced. When the member 310 is disposed at the lowered position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (base curved surface) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 as shown in FIG.

  As a result, the movable body is fixed by the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 being sandwiched from both the left and right arms 7641 by the right and left restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD, and the left and right directions with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body 311 are fixed. Relative displacement (that is, sliding displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. 52 and approaches the lifted position, the side surface (upper side surface in FIG. 52) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 is the arm of the restriction body 7640LU, 7640RU. When the displacement member 310 is further lifted by being brought into contact with the roller 7641a, the roller 7461a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 so that the arm body 7641 is gradually tilted from the initial position. When the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (curved surface of the base end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 as shown in FIG.

  As a result, as in the case described above, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched from the left and right by both arm bodies 7641 of the left and right regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU, so that the movable mechanism is fixed and the end of the main body 311 is fixed. Relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the side portion 314 (that is, sliding displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side part 314 can be regulated, so that rattling and wobble are suppressed. Thus, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

  That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body portion 311, while the main body portion 311 is connected to the end side portion 314 by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 rotates. As a result, rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs and rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, and the movable part may be worn or damaged due to rattling or wobbling.

  On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 is displaced in a stable state while suppressing the rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered with respect to the rotation center as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 50), the configuration of this embodiment is effective.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD are in a state where the movable member is fixed by acting on the arm body 4671 by the displacement member 310 being displaced to its displacement end (upward position or downward position). Form. That is, since the movable mechanism is fixed by using the displacement (up and down) of the displacement member 310 (the arm body 7641 is tilted), it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for fixing the movable mechanism, and the displacement member The drive motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) 310 can also be used as driving means for causing the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  51, when the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 51, the upper restriction mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU have their arm bodies 7641 automatically returned to the initial positions by the biasing force of the torsion spring 7642 ( Similarly, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the lowered position shown in FIG. 52, the lower regulation mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD have their arm bodies 7641 in the initial position due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 7642. Is automatically restored (see FIG. 51). That is, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD can be automatically returned to the position (initial position) shielded by the front base 333 so that the player cannot see them.

  In addition, the roller receiving portion 7311e is formed as a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 (that is, a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 is formed by the roller portion 7311e), so that the arm body 7641 is tilted. Therefore, it is possible to make the mechanism portion for the player inconspicuous.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are front views of the vertical slide unit 8300 in the eighth embodiment. 53 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 54 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position. 53 and 54 show a state where the front base 333 is removed from the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

  In the seventh embodiment, a case is described in which the arm body 7641 of the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fixes the movable mechanism by sandwiching the main body portion 311 from the left and right (regulating relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314). However, in the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD of the eighth embodiment, the insertion mechanism 8642 is inserted between the main body portion 311 and the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the end side portion 314, thereby fixing the movable mechanism ( The relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 is restricted). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the vertical slide unit 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD are disposed in front of the intermediate base 332 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD fix the movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position. This is a structure for restricting relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and restriction mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU are disposed on one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, and Restricting mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD are disposed on one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 disposed at the lowered position.

  Although the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD arranged at these four places have different shapes, the configuration and the operation for inserting the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD between the opposing faces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are substantially the same. Therefore, the restriction mechanism 8640LU disposed above the one side member 320L will be described as a representative example, and description of the other restriction mechanisms 8640LD, 8640RU, and 8640RD will be omitted.

  The restriction mechanism 8640LU projects from the front surface of the intermediate base 332 toward the displacement member 310 from the projecting tip of the base part 8641 (in the restriction mechanism 8640LU, downward in FIG. 53). And an insertion portion 8642. In other words, the insertion portion 8642 is raised by the base portion 8641 to a height position facing between the opposing surfaces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b, and between the opposing surfaces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 53 and 54). It is arranged at the position that overlaps. In addition, the plate | board thickness of the insertion part 8642 is set to the dimension equivalent to or slightly smaller than the opposing space | interval of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b.

  53. When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 53 and then approaches the lowered position, the insertion in the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD is performed below the opposing portions of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314. When the portion 8642 faces and the displacement member 310 is further lowered and disposed at the lowered position, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

  As a result, in the displacement member 310, the gap between the stopper surface 311b of the main body 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (gap for relative displacement) is filled with the insertion portion 8642 of the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD. Thus, the movable mechanism is fixed, and relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 (that is, sliding displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted. The

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. 54 and approaches the lifted position, the insertion in the restriction mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU is performed between the main body portion 311 and the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the end side portion 314. When the portion 8642 faces and the displacement member 310 is further raised and disposed at the raised position, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

  As a result, as in the case described above, the displacement member 310 is configured such that the distance between the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (gap for relative displacement) is the restriction mechanism 8640LU, 8640RU. By being filled with the insertion portion 8642, the movable mechanism is fixed, and relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 (that is, the protruding pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314). Slide displacement).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted, so that rattling and wobble are suppressed. Thus, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

  That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body portion 311, while the main body portion 311 is connected to the end side portion 314 by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 rotates. As a result, rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs and rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, and the movable part may be worn or damaged due to rattling or wobbling.

  On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 is stably displaced in a state in which rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 is suppressed. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered with respect to the rotation center as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 50), the configuration of this embodiment is effective.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD cause the insertion member 8642 to be inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b by displacing the displacement member 310 to the displacement end (upward position or downward position). Thus, the movable mechanism is fixed. In other words, the movable mechanism is fixed using the displacement (up and down) of the displacement member 310 (the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposing surfaces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b), so that the driving means for fixing the movable mechanism The drive motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) the displacement member 310 can also be used as drive means for causing the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. 55 and 56 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 9331 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 55 corresponds to the state of FIG. 26 and FIG. 56 corresponds to the state of FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined) to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, so that the second rack Although the movement of the posture of 364 is suppressed, the magnetic force of the magnets 9652a to 9652e is applied to the second rack 364 of the ninth embodiment in a direction that is not parallel to (inclined to) the direction of the linear motion. Thus, the violence of the posture is suppressed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the back base 9331 has a main body portion formed in a vertically long shape and an overhang projecting laterally from the lower end of the main body portion, as in the first embodiment. A metal rod 9651 is disposed on the side of the main body portion (on the protruding direction side of the protruding portion). The metal rod 9651 is a metal rod-like body, and is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the linear motion direction of the second rack 364.

  The second rack 364 is provided with a plurality of magnets 9651a to 9562e on the side facing the metal bar 9651 provided on the back surface base 9331, and the metal bar 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e are provided. It is formed to attract by magnetic force. That is, the second rack 364 is given (acted) with a magnetic force in a direction in which the lower end side is biased toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (the left side in FIG. 55).

  Therefore, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the tooth surface of the second rack 364 can be brought close to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a, so that the gap between these tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when the driving force is transmitted from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and the responsiveness can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the tooth surface from being accelerated or damaged by the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after transmitting the driving force from the stopped state (initial stage of meshing). Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing (meshing) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained.

  In the first embodiment in which the urging spring 366 is formed as a coil spring, deterioration (sagging) occurs due to the repeated operation of the second rack 364, and the urging force is changed. For example, since the urging force applied to the second rack 364 uses the magnetic force of the magnet, a stable urging force can be applied to the second rack 364 over a long period of time.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the magnets 9652a to 9652e are all opposed to the metal rod 9651 in a state where the second rack 364 is positioned at the lowermost part of the movable range as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the state where the second rack 364 is positioned at the uppermost position of the movable range as shown in FIG. 56, all the magnets 9652a to 9651e are retracted to positions where they do not face the metal rod 9651.

  For this reason, the second rack 364 rises from the position located at the lowest position of the movable range shown in FIG. 55 to the first position (position where the head magnet 9562a and the metal rod 9651 are kept facing each other) (hereinafter referred to as “first”). In one period, since all the magnets 9652a to 9562e face the metal rod 9651, a constant magnetic force can be applied to the second rack 364.

  A period (hereinafter referred to as “second period”) in which the second rack 364 rises from the first position to the second position (a position where the facing magnet 9562e and the metal rod 9651 face each other) breaks down. With the displacement (rise), the number (area) of the magnets 9652a to 9651e facing the metal rod 9651 is gradually reduced, so that the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be gradually reduced.

  During the period in which the second rack 364 rises from the second position to the position at the top of the movable range shown in FIG. 56 (hereinafter referred to as “third period”), all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651. Therefore, a state in which almost no magnetic force is applied to the second rack 364 can be formed.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be applied while adjusting the magnitude to be suitable for the state of the second rack 364. Specifically, in the first period when the driving of the second pinion 365a by the second rack 364 is started, a larger magnetic force (a magnetic force exceeding a reference value) is applied to the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is It is difficult to rattle and suppresses the occurrence of the posture fluctuation (stabilizes the transmission of the driving force to the second pinion 365a), while the second rack 364 starts to drive the second pinion 365a. In the third period after entering the stable state, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 is reduced (below the reference value) or not applied, so that the magnetic force is driven by the second rack 364. Thus, the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the second period is provided between the first period and the third period, it is possible to avoid a sudden change (decrease) in the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364, and gradually Since it can be decreased, the transition from the first period to the third period can be performed smoothly, and the posture of the second rack 364 can be stabilized.

  In addition, the arrangement object (the back base 331, the second rack 364) of the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e may be reversed. Further, instead of the metal rod 9651, a magnet may be provided. When a magnet is provided, the magnetic force in the attracting direction may be used, or the magnetic force in the repulsive direction may be used. Also by these, the same effect as the case of this embodiment is acquired.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L in the tenth embodiment, and shows an exploded state. FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b) are rear perspective views of the other side member 320L, showing the assembled state. 57 and 58, the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 are not shown. FIG. 58A shows a state before the roller 10367 is mounted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the one end of the urging spring 366 and the locking portion of the second rack 364 are locked after the rear base 331 is covered with the intermediate base 332 has been described. One end of the biasing spring 366 in the form is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 before the rear base 331 is covered with the intermediate base 332. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the tenth embodiment, a slit portion 10331e having a substantially J-shape in front view extends on the back base 10331 at a portion where the extension lines of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d intersect each other. Established. The slit portion 10331e starts from a portion opened at the side edge of the back surface base 10331, and is folded back into a U shape at the end of a portion (first guide portion) extending linearly as a groove having a constant width. It is formed as a slit in which the end of the portion (second guide portion) extending in a straight line is terminated.

  The intermediate base 10332 has a lower side wall on the inner side of the bent portion (the portion where the main body portion and the overhanging portion intersect) than in the first embodiment, and is attached in the assembly process. Interference with the spring 366 is suppressed.

  The roller 10367 is formed in a disc shape and is arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the first flange portion 10367a, the second flange portion 10367b, and the third flange portion 10367c, and the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange. A cylindrical shaft portion 10367d that connects between the portions 10367b, and a cylindrical contact portion 10367e that connects between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c, and these portions 10367a to 10367e are concentric. It is integrally formed with the posture.

  The shaft portion 10367d is a portion that is inserted into the slit portion 10331e of the back surface base 10331 and is rotatably held (axially supported) at the end of the slit portion 10331e, and has an outer diameter equal to the groove width of the slit portion 10331e. Or a slightly smaller dimension is set. The abutting portion 10367e is a portion that forms a bent posture of the urging spring 366 by abutting the outer peripheral surface between one end and the other end of the urging spring 366.

  The facing interval between the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the plate thickness of the back base 10331, and the facing interval between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c is energized. The size is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the spring 366. Therefore, as will be described later, when the shaft portion 10367 is inserted into the slit portion 10331e, the back base 10331 is sandwiched between the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b and the roller 10367 in the axial direction. Movement is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 in the tenth embodiment is performed by mounting a drive motor 341 on the front surface of the intermediate base 10332 as in the case of the first embodiment. On the back surface of the intermediate base 332, gears 362a to 362e are mounted on the gear shafts 332c to 332g, a crank gear 363 is mounted on the gear shaft 332h, and a transmission gear 365 is mounted on the gear shaft 332i (for the gear shafts 332c to 332i). 22), the second rack 364 is disposed in a state where the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted into the rack groove 364b and the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365 is engaged.

  Next, in the tenth embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 and the other end is locked to the locking portion formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. Lock. In this case, in this embodiment, since the biasing spring 366 is set to be in a no-load state (a state in which the free length is maintained), both ends of the biasing spring 366 are locked. However, this state can be stably maintained.

  In this way, after the state in which the transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 10332 (the state shown in FIG. 57) is formed, the front surface of the rear base 10331 faces the back surface of the intermediate base 10332, and both are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 58 (a)), and finally, by attaching the roller 10367 to the slit portion 10331e of the back surface base 10331 (see FIG. 58 (b)), the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 is completed. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the rear base 10331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 10332, it is constructed so as to be bridged between both bent portions (between the main body portion and the overhanging portion). Since the biasing spring 366 is projected, the biasing spring 366 is sandwiched between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c of the roller 10367, and the shaft portion 10367d of the roller 10367 is inserted into the slit portion 10331 of the rear base 10331. The roller 10367 is pushed into the folded portion of the slit portion 10331. As a result, the biasing spring 366 is extended and bent, so that the roller 10367 is pressed against the end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 366 as shown in FIG. can do.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the biasing spring 366 is disposed in a bent posture by displacing the roller 10367 while abutting between the one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366. As a result, the assembly work of the biasing spring 366 can be facilitated. That is, the biasing spring 366 is bent while the back surface base 10331 is covered with the intermediate base 10332 (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the back surface base 10331). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the urging spring 366 from being flipped and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, it is possible to easily perform the work of assembling the biasing spring 366 in the bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 can be used not only as the urging force of the second rack 364 but also as the holding force for holding the roller 10367, so that the roller 10367 is held. There is no need to separately prepare a member (for example, a fastening screw), and it is not necessary to perform a fastening operation. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the roller 10367 is rotatably held by the shaft portion 10367d being pressed against the end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 366. Therefore, it is not necessary to project a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the roller 10367 from the back surface base 10331 or the intermediate base 10332. Therefore, since it is not necessary to cover the back base 10331 on the intermediate base 10332 while inserting the shaft-like body through the roller 10367 (see FIG. 32), it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work. .

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are urged by separate urging springs 366 has been described. The second rack 364 of the side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R are biased by one biasing spring 11366. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has one end locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. The biasing spring 11366 is provided. The biasing spring 11366 is disposed in a symmetrical manner by the roller 11661 being brought into contact with the center position between one end and the other end thereof.

  In addition, the projecting tip of the projecting portion of the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R is notched, and the biasing spring 11366 is installed on the interposed member 11370 through the notched portion. . In addition, the roller 1161 is rotatably disposed on the interposed member 11370, and the interposed member 11370 is positioned such that the lower portion where the urging spring 11366 is installed is recessed in the front side (the back side in FIG. 59). The urging spring 11366 can be disposed in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface of FIG. 59) from one end to the other end.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the second rack 364 of the one-side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other-side member 320R are urged by separate urging springs 366 (see FIG. 19). Due to individual differences of the biasing springs 366 (variations in characteristics due to dimensions, materials, etc.), the magnitude of the biasing force applied to each second rack 364 varies. This causes variations in the posture of each second rack 364 and affects the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism, so that the displacement member 310 is guided and driven by the one side member 320L. This causes a difference (displacement) between the guidance and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 320R. As described above, such a shift makes it difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310, and increases the load of each drive motor 341, and also causes the displacement member 310 to stop.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 11366 is locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end is locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. That is, since it is urged by one urging spring 11366, the urging force applied to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R can be made uniform. . Thus, variation in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed and transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform, so that the displacement member 310 can be guided and driven by the one side member 11320L. Further, the guiding and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

  In addition, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 in the eleventh embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 are connected to the locking portion of the second rack 364. The transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 332 (see FIG. 32), and the rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332, and between the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. By interposing the interposing member 11370, and then locking one end and the other end of the urging spring 11366 to the engaging portion of each second rack 364 via the first opening 331 c of each back surface base 331. Can be implemented. That is, also in this embodiment, the biasing spring 11366 can be easily disposed in a bent posture while suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being flipped and the second rack 364 from falling off. Work efficiency can be improved.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. 60 and 61 are rear views of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment. 60, the state before the interposed member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R is the same as that in FIG. 61, and the interposed member 12370 is between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. The state after the interposition is illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the interposed member 370 is fastened and fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R by a screw via the connecting plate 371 is described. However, the interposed member 370 of the twelfth embodiment is The urging force of the urging spring 12366 is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment, the engaged portions 12331f are respectively provided in the opposing surface sides of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and the respective engaged portions. Engaging portions 12372 that can engage with the portion 12331f protrude from both ends of the interposed member 12370. The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed by bending in a substantially L shape when viewed from the back.

  Further, a locking portion 12373 for locking the other end of the biasing spring 366 is formed on the back surface of the interposed member 12370, and the protruding tip at the protruding portion of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R is The other end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposed member 12370 through the notched portion.

  In addition, the interposed member 12370 is formed as a flat surface in which the region from the locking portion 12373 to the side edge is recessed in the front side (the back side in FIG. 60), and thereby the biasing spring 366 is moved from one end thereof. The entire arrangement up to the other end can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface of FIG. 60).

  The assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment is performed as follows. First, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are assembled. In this case, contrary to the case of the first embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, while the other end is unlocked, and the transmission mechanism is mounted. The back base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332 in the state (see FIG. 32).

  Thereby, the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are formed in the state shown in FIG. 60. Next, the engaging portion 12372 of the interposed member 12370 is engaged with the engaged side of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. The interposing member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R while being engaged with the portion 12331f, and finally, each biasing spring 366 is interposed via the first opening 331c of each back surface base 331. The other end is respectively engaged with the engaging portion 12373 of the interposed member 12370. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61, the assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 is completed.

  According to the present embodiment, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are disposed between the intermediate base 332 and the rear base 331 facing each other (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 331. ), The other end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposed member 12370, so that the urging spring 366 is prevented from being repelled and the second rack 364 is prevented from falling off. However, the biasing spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, each biasing spring 366 is arranged in a posture in which it is inclined downward from the roller 367 (see FIG. 23) toward the locked portion 12373 of the interposed member 2370. Therefore, the force component in the direction to draw the interposed member 12370 toward the left and right (the one side member 320L side and the other side member 320R side) and the direction in which the interposed member 12370 is pushed upward (to the displacement member 310 side) The force component can be applied to the interposed member 12370.

  Accordingly, the urging force of the urging spring 366 presses the engaging portion 12372 of the interposed member 12370 against the engaged portion 12331f of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and thus the one side member 320L and the other side member. The state where the interposed member 12370 is interposed between 320R can be maintained. As a result, the interposition member 12370 is held by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (that is, at least until the interposition member 12370 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 10) of the rear case 210). Fixed). Therefore, handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the back case 210 can be facilitated, and workability in the transport process and the attachment process can be improved.

  Furthermore, the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed in a substantially L shape in the back view, and the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R, and the interposition member 12370 include the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion. Since they are coupled by the engagement of 12331f, it is possible to prevent the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R from being deformed into a “C” shape when viewed from the front with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, also in this point, handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the back case 210 can be facilitated, and workability in the transport process and the attachment process can be improved.

  In addition, the biasing force of the biasing spring 363 is not only applied to the second rack 364 but also serves as a fixing force for fixing to the interposed member 12370 between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. In addition, members (for example, the connecting shaft 332m, the connecting plate 371, and screws for fastening them) for fixing to the interposed member 12370 on the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R can be eliminated, and the number of parts and assembly accordingly. Man-hours can be reduced.

  The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are engaged in a state having a predetermined shakiness due to the dimensional tolerance. That is, since the relative displacement of the interposed member 12370 with respect to the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R can be allowed by the amount of rattling, when attaching the vertical slide unit 12300 to the bottom plate portion 211 of the rear case 210, The attachment positions of the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R, and the interposed member 12370 can be individually adjusted, and the workability during the attachment can be improved.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (a) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c) schematically show how the biasing spring 366 changes its posture. It is a back surface schematic diagram of other side member 13320R to show in figure.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disposition position of the roller 367 for setting the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture is fixed at a predetermined position, but the roller 10367 in the thirteenth embodiment is disposed at the disposition position. Is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the other side member 10320R in the tenth embodiment except that a telescopic actuator 13671 is added. Therefore, the description about the same structure is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), a telescopic actuator 13671 is disposed on the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment. The telescopic actuator 13671 includes a main body portion 13671a, a rod portion 13671b held by the main body portion 13671a, and a drive mechanism (not shown) for moving the rod portion 13671b forward or backward (extends or shortens) with respect to the main body portion 13671a. The main body portion 13671a is fixed to the back surface of the back surface base 331, and the roller 10367 is rotatably connected to the tip of the rod portion 13671b.

  In this case, the expansion / contraction actuator 13671 is disposed in a posture in which the expansion / contraction direction (the axial direction of the rod portion 13671b) is along the straight line portion from the folded portion to the end of the slit portion 10331e. Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671, the rod portion 13671b is expanded and contracted, so that the roller 10367 has a terminal end of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. 62B and a folded portion of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. Can be displaced between.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 10367 for contacting the urging spring 366 and forming the bent posture of the urging spring 366 is determined by the expansion / contraction of the rod portion 13671b by the expansion / contraction actuator 13671. It can be changed by operation. Thereby, since the bending state of the biasing spring 366 can be adjusted, the state of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 (for example, the magnitude of the biasing or the biasing direction) is, for example, The second rack 364 can be adjusted according to the state (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position).

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened to preload the urging spring 366 (in the assembled state, it is applied to the urging spring 366). The apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be increased by increasing the load), while the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended as shown in FIG. 62 (b) to preload the biasing spring 366. Thus, the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be reduced.

  Thus, for example, when the displacement member 310 is stopped at the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased, and the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 at the raised position is increased by the biasing spring 366. While assisting by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (raised or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is decreased to reduce the biasing spring 366. It can suppress that urging | biasing force becomes resistance at the time of displacing the displacement member 310 (2nd rack 364).

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 and the second rack 364 are reduced. While the angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the linear motion can be reduced (becomes parallel), the biasing spring 366 is extended by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 as shown in FIG. 62 (b). The angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack and the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, in the initial stage in the transitional state in which the displacement of the second rack 364 is started, the behavior of the second rack 364 becomes unstable, so that the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced. A steady state in which the inclination angle is increased (ie, brought closer to the state shown in FIG. 62B) to suppress the occurrence of the posture of the second rack 364 and the displacement speed of the second rack 364 reaches a constant level. At this stage, since the behavior of the second rack 364 is stabilized, the inclination angle of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced (closer to parallel) to reduce the resistance. Thus, the energy required for driving the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300. 63A shows a state where the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, and FIG. 63B shows a state where the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the posture of the biasing spring 11366 is maintained constant has been described. However, the posture of the biasing spring 11366 in the thirteenth embodiment is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment in that a telescopic actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14661 are added, and a roller 11661 is a rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671. The other configuration is the same except that it is disposed at the tip of the. Therefore, the description about the same structure is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the vertical slide unit 14300 according to the fourteenth embodiment is provided with an extendable actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14662.

  The telescopic actuator 13671 is disposed in the center of the biasing spring 11366 in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 63 (a)) in the rear view shown in FIG. 63 (a), and its expansion / contraction direction (axial direction of the rod portion 13671b). ) In the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 63A) (that is, the posture along the symmetry line of the biasing spring 11366).

  In the present embodiment, the roller 11661 is rotatably disposed at the tip of the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671, while the left and right rollers 14662 are rotatably disposed on the back surface of the interposed member 11370.

  Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671, the rod portion 13671b is expanded and contracted, so that the roller 11661 is aligned with the left and right rollers 14662 in the left and right direction (FIG. 63 (a) left and right direction) as shown in FIG. 63 (a). As shown in FIG. 63 (c), it can be displaced between a position below the left and right rollers 14662 (lower side in FIG. 63 (a)).

  In the state shown in FIG. 63A in which the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, the urging spring 11366 extends from the left and right bent portions (see the roller 367, FIG. 23) to the contact portion with the roller 11661. A space is formed in a straight line.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 11661 in contact with the biasing spring 11366 can be changed by the expansion / contraction operation of the rod portion 13671b by the expansion / contraction actuator 13671. From the state of the urging force applied to the second rack 364 (for example, the magnitude of the urging force) according to, for example, the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position), Can be adjusted.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to preload the urging spring 11366 (the load applied to the urging spring 11366 in the assembled state). The apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366 can be increased by reducing the preload of the biasing spring 11366 by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 as shown in FIG. Thus, the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366 can be reduced.

  Thus, for example, when the displacement member 310 is stopped at the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased, and the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 at the raised position is increased by the biasing spring 366. While assisting by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (raised or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is decreased to reduce the biasing spring 366. It can suppress that urging | biasing force becomes resistance at the time of displacing the displacement member 310 (2nd rack 364).

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the preload can be adjusted with respect to one urging spring 11366, and therefore, the change in the urging force due to such adjustment is caused by the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. The second rack 364 can be made uniform. Thus, variation in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed and transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform, so that the displacement member 310 can be guided and driven by the one side member 11320L. Further, the guiding and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 11366 to each second rack 364 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 is not changed. Only the preload of the biasing spring 11366 can be adjusted (while maintaining a constant tilt angle). Thus, when adjusting the preload of the biasing spring 11366, the tilt angle (the direction in which the biasing force is applied) is changed in accordance with the adjustment, and the posture of the second rack 364 is caused by the change in the tilt angle. Can be avoided.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base 15331 in the fifteenth embodiment and corresponds to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the gear shaft 331b arranged to face the second pinion 365a is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is attached to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In the fifteenth embodiment, the first restricting portion 15331g arranged to face the second pinion 365a is brought into contact with the side surface of the second rack 15364. The second rack 15364 can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the second rack 15364 of the transmission mechanism in the fifteenth embodiment includes the side surface on the side where the rack is formed (the side surface on the second pinion 365a side) and the side opposite to the side surface (the left side in FIG. 64). ) Are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack. Specifically, the side surfaces on both sides of the second rack 15364 are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other at least in a range where a first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of second restricting portions 15331h, which will be described later, come into contact with each other.

  A first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of left and right second restricting portions 15331h are projected from the front surface of the back base 15331. The first restricting portion 15331g is a part that abuts on the side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 64) of the second rack 15364 to define its posture, and faces the axis of the second pinion 365a with the second rack 15364 interposed therebetween. It is disposed at a position (a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the back base 15331 and the intermediate base 332) and is formed as a cylindrical body having a circular cross section. Specifically, the arrangement position of the first restricting portion 15331g is a position where the direction connecting the axis of the first restricting portion 15331g and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 15364. Set to

  The second restricting portion 15331h is a portion for restricting displacement of the second rack 15364 in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 64), and a pair is formed at a predetermined interval, and each has a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. Formed as a body. The interval between the pair of second restricting portions 15331h (the interval in the left-right direction in FIG. 64) is larger than the width of the second rack 15364, and is formed to have a gap between the side surfaces of the second rack 15364.

  In this case, the amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 64) allowed by the second restricting portion 15331h is allowed between the first restricting portion 15331g and the second pinion 365a. The amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction) is larger. In addition, it is preferable that the difference of the allowable displacement amount is set to 1.5 times or more. This is because the displacement (rotation) of the second rack 15364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a can be reliably formed.

  With the above configuration, according to the present embodiment, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the second rack 15364 is displaced (rotated) along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a and moved in the direction of linear motion. It can be displaced (see FIG. 30). As a result, even when the posture of the second rack 15364 is unclear, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to open the rack groove 364b (see FIG. 26) in the second rack 15364 as in the case of the first embodiment. It is possible to secure rigidity and improve the durability. In addition, since the rack groove 364b can be omitted and the rigidity of the second rack 15364 is ensured in this way, deformation of the second rack 15364 when driven by the rotation of the second pinion 365a can be suppressed. From the point of view, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 and 66 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the back base 15331 in the sixteenth embodiment, and correspond to FIGS. 26 and 28, respectively.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed with a constant groove width along the longitudinal direction has been described, but the guide groove 634a of the second rack 16364 in the sixteenth embodiment is By forming the recess 16681, the groove width is enlarged in a part of the longitudinal direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the second rack 16364 of the transmission mechanism in the sixteenth embodiment has a recess 16681 on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (right side of FIGS. 65 and 66). It is recessed. The concave portion 16881 is a portion for restricting the linear movement of the second rack 16364, and can be formed as a concave portion that is curved in an arc shape that can be engaged with the rack shaft 331b at the upper end and the lower end of the guide groove 364a. . The inner diameter of the recess 16681 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rack shaft 331b.

  Note that the central angle of the arc of the recess 16681 is preferably set within a range of 30 ° to 120 °, and more preferably set within a range of 45 ° to 90 °. This is to achieve the contradictory functions of maintaining the engagement state between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and the ease of releasing the engagement.

  For example, in order to stop and hold the displacement member 310 at the raised position (see FIG. 25A), it is necessary to resist the gravity acting on the displacement member 310, and thus the drive required for the drive motor 341 is required. Power increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, as shown in FIG. 65, the second rack 16364 is arranged at the lowermost part of the movable range. The linear movement of the second rack 16364 can be restricted by engaging the rack shaft 331b with the recess 16681 at the lower end of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor 341 can be reduced (or the drive thereof is stopped). As a result, energy consumption of the drive motor 341 when holding the displacement member 310 in the raised position can be suppressed.

  In the state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 66, the second rack 16364 is disposed at the top of the movable range, so that the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 is disposed. The rack shaft 331b can be engaged with the recess 16681 at the upper end of the second rack 16364 to restrict the linear motion of the second rack 16364. Thereby, it can suppress that the displacement member 310 arrange | positioned in the descending position shakes by the influence of a disturbance.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the recess 16681 is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (the right side in FIGS. 65 and 66) and is provided from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 16364. The direction of the urging force to be tilted (non-parallel) with respect to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 16364 is such that the direction of the tilt causes the second rack 16364 to rotate around the rack shaft 331b as shown in FIG. 66, the rack shaft 331b is engaged with the recess 16681 by rotating clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 66, so that the engagement of the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and the release thereof are performed by the second rack 16364. This can be done with linear motion.

  That is, when the second rack 16364 is displaced to the uppermost or lowermost part of the movable range, the concave portion 16681 faces the rack shaft 331b, and the second rack 16364 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. The rack shaft 331 b can be engaged (inserted) in the recess 16681, and the engagement between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331 b can be maintained by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. On the other hand, when the second pinion 365a is rotationally driven from this state, the second rack 16364 is rotated in the direction in which the rack shaft 331b is pulled out from the recess 16681 while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 366, and the recess 16681 The engagement with the rack shaft 331b is released. Thereby, the second rack 16364 can be linearly moved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a mechanism (linear motion regulating means) for regulating the straight movement of the second rack 16364 includes a guide groove 364a formed in the second rack 16364 and a rack inserted through the guide groove 364a. Since it is configured using the shaft 331b, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the second rack 16364, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the portion for guiding the second pinion 365a to be rotatable, the rack shaft 331b also serves as a portion constituting the linear motion restricting means (a portion that engages with the concave portion 16881). The number of points can be reduced to reduce the size and product cost.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 17440L1 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 67 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 17440R1 in the seventh embodiment. 67 (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular divided body 17440L1 along the line LXVIIc-LXVIIc in FIG. 67 (a), and FIG. 67 (d) is a circle along the line LXVIId-LXVIId in FIG. 67 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of ring division body 17440R1. 67 (a) and 67 (b) correspond to FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the two-stage positioning mechanism is configured by providing the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a on the tip of the positioning convex portion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning concave portion 492 has been described. In the seventeenth embodiment, a ball plunger mechanism 17495 is disposed on the tip of the positioning convex portion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning concave portion 492. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (d), the positioning mechanism in the seventeenth embodiment protrudes from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440R1 as in the first embodiment. The positioning convex portion 491 and a positioning concave portion 492 that is recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440L1 as a concave portion that can receive the positioning convex portion 491 are provided. A recessed portion 17493a is recessed in the installation bottom surface 17493, and a ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 protrudes from the protruding front end surface of the positioning projection 491.

  The recess 17493a is formed as a spherical recess, and is formed so that the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be engaged therewith. In other words, the diameter of the spherical surface of the recess 17493a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495. The recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recess 17493a.

  The recess 17493a and the ball 17495a are engaged with each other in the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are brought into contact with each other (concave fitting), thereby performing final positioning. It is a part. The dimension in which the ball 17495a projects from the projecting tip surface of the positioning convex part 491 is set to be smaller than the concave depth of the positioning concave part 492.

  Thereby, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning is performed with a relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relative displacement tolerance is relatively wide) by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, when the projecting tip of the positioning convex portion 491 is reliably received in the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be performed smoothly, the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage, the ball 17495a is engaged with the recess 17493a to improve positioning accuracy, to properly form the annular shape, and to reliably prevent rattling and wobbling after the annular shape is formed. Two-stage positioning is possible.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the second stage of the positioning mechanism is a structure in which the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is engaged with the recess 17493a provided in the recessed bottom surface 17493. In the second stage of positioning when the bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the ring formation position, the ball 17495a can be rolled on the concave bottom surface 17493. As a result, the positioning convex portion 491 is formed in the positioning concave portion 492. The operation until the ball 17495a is engaged with the recess 17493 can be smoothly performed after being received, and the engagement between the ball 17495a and the recess 17493 is released. Performed smoothly with the movement of 17440R1 to the retracted position Rukoto can.

  In this case, since the recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recessed portion 17493a, the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be guided to the recessed portion 1793a along the recessed bottom surface 17493. These balls 17495a can be reliably engaged with the depressions 17493a.

  Further, even when the annular divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the annular formation position, even if the protruding tip of the positioning convex portion 491 collides with the concave bottom surface 17493 of the positioning concave portion 492, the ball plunger mechanism 17495 The ball 17495a can be brought into contact with the concave bottom surface 17493, and the spring can be elastically deformed to absorb the impact in accordance with the retracting operation of the ball 17495a.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400.

  68 and 69 correspond to a front view and a rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in a state where they are attached to the back case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operation unit 200). In FIG. 68, the vertical slide unit 18300 and the annular forming unit 18400 are partially cut by virtual planes passing through the center of the plate thickness direction (perpendicular to FIG. 69) of the posture defining member 18450 in the annular forming unit 18400. Corresponds to a sectional view.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 300 and the annular ring forming unit 400 are not in contact with each other except for the portion attached to the back case 210 has been described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the vertical slide unit 18300 The annular forming unit 18400 can be partially contacted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the vertical slide unit 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment, except that the diameter dimension of the rotation base 18312 is increased. On the other hand, the ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment is different from the ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in the shape of the side edge of the posture defining member 18450 facing the rotation base 18312 (the rotation base). The other configuration is the same except that the holding portion 18453 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer periphery of the 18312. In the following, description of these same configurations is omitted. Note that the holding portion 18453 is curved in an arc shape concentric with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 in the rear view.

  As shown in FIGS. 68A and 68B, after the vertical slide unit 18300 arranges the displacement member 310 in the middle between the raised position and the lowered position, the annular forming unit 18400 is changed to the annular divided body 440L1. When ˜440R2 is arranged at the annular formation position, an annular shape is formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, and a rotary body 313 having a circular shape in front view is formed at a predetermined interval on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape. It is arranged concentrically. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the annular shape.

  In this case, since a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) is interposed in the displacement member 310, both ends of the main body portion 311 are connected to the end side portion 314. It is supported in a state where it can move freely. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side part 314 of the main body 311 occurs with the rotation, so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (annular divided body). 440L1 to 440R2) collide with the inner peripheral surface and cause damage. In addition, when the gravity center position G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered from the rotation center as in the case of the sixth embodiment described above, the problem of damage due to collision becomes particularly significant.

  On the other hand, if a gap is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape and the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 313 so as not to collide, the effect of the effect of rotating the rotator 313 surrounded by the annular shape is achieved. Cannot fully demonstrate. Further, even when the rotating body 313 does not collide with the annular shape (annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2), the rotation of the rotating body 313 causes rattling and wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body 311. If it continues, wear of a movable part (for example, protruding pin 311a or long hole 314a) will be caused.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 of the vertical slide unit 18300 is disposed between the raised position and the lowered position, and the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 of the annular formation unit 18400 are arranged at the annular formation position. When the rotating body 313 is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape, a pair of annular forming units 18400 that are slid and displaced in the left-right direction (directions close to each other) by the suspension mechanism 450 are formed. The posture defining member 18450 brings the holding portion 18453 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 of the vertical slide unit 18300, and sandwiches the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions as shown in FIG.

  Accordingly, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 can be held by the ring forming unit 18400, so that the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side 314 can be restricted (movable mechanism is fixed). . As a result, even if the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 311 from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, whereby the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (circular shape). Collision with the inner peripheral surface of the ring divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2) and the wear and damage of the movable part (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 in the displacement member 310 is projected along the major axis direction (left and right direction in FIG. 69) of the elongated hole 314a in the end side portion 314. When the installation pin 311a is slid, as described above, the pair of posture defining members 18450 are slid in the left-right direction, and the holding portion 18453 of the pair of posture defining members 18450 is moved to the vertical slide unit 18300. 69, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is held (relative displacement with the end side portion 314 is restricted) by sandwiching the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions as shown in FIG.

  Therefore, the projecting pin 311a can be displaced along the elongated hole 314a, that is, the rattling or wobbling factor with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 can be efficiently regulated. As a result, the force required for holding the main body 311 (restriction of relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 314) can be further reduced, and rattling and wobble can be reliably suppressed.

  Further, in this case, the posture defining member 18450 that sandwiches the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions is supported by the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 extending in the left and right directions, as shown in FIG. The holding force in the direction (left-right direction) in which 311 is relatively displaced with respect to the end side portion 314 can be increased. Also from this point, rattling and wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 can be reliably suppressed. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an annular formation unit 18400 is provided that performs an effect by forming an annular shape by arranging the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position to the annular formation position, and the annular formation unit. The relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is regulated (the movable mechanism is fixed) by using an operation performed for the effect that the 18400 forms an annular shape. That is, the relative displacement can be restricted in association with the operation for the effect, and there is no need to separately provide a mechanism and a driving means for restricting the relative displacement. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment.

  70 corresponds to a front view and a rear view of the up / down slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in a state of being attached to the back case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operation unit 200). FIG. 70 is a partial view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the annular forming unit 19400 by a virtual plane passing through the center in the plate thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 70) of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 in the annular forming unit 19400. This corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the vertical displacement unit 18300 and the annular ring forming unit 18400 are directly brought into contact with each other to restrict the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 324 has been described. The nineteenth embodiment Then, the relative displacement with respect to the end side part 324 of the main-body part 311 is controlled, making the up-and-down slide unit 19300 and the ring formation unit 19400 non-contact. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the vertical slide unit 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment is different from the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment except that a plurality of magnets 1991 are disposed (added) on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313. Other configurations are the same. On the other hand, the annular forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment is the inner peripheral side of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313) with respect to the annular forming unit 400 in the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same except that a plurality of metal plates 1992 are provided (added). In the following, description of these same configurations is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the nineteenth embodiment, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) magnets 1991 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313 are positioned at an equal distance from the rotation center of the rotating body 313. Are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  On the other hand, a plurality (four in this embodiment) of metal plates 1992 disposed on the inner peripheral side (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313) of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are made of a metal material, It is formed as a flat plate-like body that is curved in an arc shape along an annular inner peripheral surface formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. That is, each metal plate 1992 forms an annular shape in front view that is concentric with the rotating body 313.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 313 is generated by the magnetic force that acts between the magnet 1991 disposed on the rotating body 313 and the metal plate 1992 disposed on the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. It is possible to regulate the displacement in the radial direction in any direction. That is, the rotating body 313 can be held at a position (center on the inner peripheral side) that is concentric with the annular shape formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 313 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape (the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2). Moreover, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, it can suppress that the main-body part 311 shakes or wobbles with respect to the end side part 314, Thereby, a movable part (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongate hole 314a) is suppressed. Wear and damage can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the metal plate 1992 is continuous over substantially the entire circumference, and the magnets 1991 are arranged at intervals of 90 ° in the circumferential direction, so that the positions where the magnetic force acts are arranged opposite to each other (the phases are different by 180 °). The rotating body 313 can be restrained from four directions. Therefore, not only the displacement (rattle or wobble) can be suppressed in any direction, but also the rotating body 313 with respect to the annular shape (inner peripheral surface) formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. When the relative positions of are not aligned, it is possible to perform centering to position the rotating body 313 concentrically with respect to the annular shape.

  Further, as in the case of the eighteenth embodiment, the rotating body 313 is held on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape by using an operation performed for the effect that the annular shape forming unit 19400 forms an annular shape. (The relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted), and it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism or driving means for holding the rotating body 313 (relative displacement restriction). Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  For example, when the configuration is one engagement member 12331R of the one side member 12320R, 12320L in the twelfth embodiment and the engagement structure 12372 of the interposition member 12370 and the urging spring 11366 in the eleventh embodiment. You may comprise a gaming machine combining with the structure to perform.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the biasing spring 366 has a substantially “<” shape when viewed from the front has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The posture may be an approximately “S” shape or a substantially “J” shape when viewed from the front, or may be a combination of these. That is, the bent posture of the urging spring 366 may be any shape as long as it is formed by bending or bending the coil spring at one or a plurality of locations.

  In each of the above embodiments, the oblong hole 314a formed in the end side portion 314 is formed in an oblong shape in front view in which the semicircles on both sides are connected by a straight line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The shape may also be That is, as long as the projecting pin 311a is formed to be displaceable, for example, the projecting pin 311a may be formed to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front, or may be bent into a "<" shape when viewed from the front, These may be formed in combination.

  In each of the above embodiments, the upper and lower slide units 300 are arranged in such a posture that the displacement member 310 is displaced along the direction of gravity (vertical direction). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member 310 is horizontal. The displacement member 310 may be disposed in a posture that is displaced along a direction (orthogonal to the gravitational direction). The displacement member 310 is disposed in a posture that is displaced along a direction inclined with respect to the gravity direction (vertical direction). May be. Even if it is these attitude | positions, the effect similar to the above can be acquired.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 and 17440L1 to 17440R2 are contacted with a locus of circular motion while maintaining a posture parallel to the other contact surface. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, for example, it may be close to each other while changing the parallelism with respect to the contact surface of the opponent, and finally contact in a parallel posture, or Maintaining a posture parallel to the contact surface of the other party, approaching each other by a linear motion in a non-perpendicular direction with respect to the contact surface, and finally contacting in a parallel posture Also good.

  In the first embodiment, the relative displacement amount between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted to a predetermined range by the contact of the stopper surfaces 311a and 314a. Alternatively, in addition to this, the projecting pin 311a may be in contact with the end of the elongated hole 314a, so that the relative displacement amount between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 may be regulated within a predetermined range. .

  In the first embodiment, in assembling the transmission mechanism to the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c. The other end of the biasing spring 366 may be locked to the intermediate base 332 via the second opening 331d.

  In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the displacement members 4310 and 5310 are driven by the drive motor 341 of the one side member 320L. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member 4310 is driven by the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R. , 5310 may be driven. That is, although the movable mechanism side where the slide displacement is allowed or the rubber hardness is low (soft) is set as the drive side, the movable mechanism side where only the rotation is allowed or the rubber hardness is high (hard) is set as the drive side. It is also good.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack and the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction actuator 13671 are the same. While the angle (inclination angle) formed by these two directions is increased or decreased, the inclination direction may be reversed. For example, when the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to a predetermined position, the direction of the inclination is rightward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 62B), and when the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened from this state, A state in which there is no inclination (that is, a state in which the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack coincides with the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, for example, as shown in FIG. A state in which the direction of the inclination is leftward through the state) is illustrated. Accordingly, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is changed (reversed) according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). Adjustments can be made.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the side surface of the second rack 15364 (the surface on the left side in FIG. 64) is formed as a flat surface, and the engagement between the side surface of the second rack 15364 and the first restricting portion 15331g is not formed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and a recess (for example, corresponding to the recess 16681 in the sixteenth embodiment) that can be engaged with the first restricting portion 15331g is formed on the side surface of the second rack 15364. good. Accordingly, as in the case of the sixteenth embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 15364 can be restricted, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a as an example>
One side member and other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member are respectively guided between the one side member and the other side member and are guided between the one side member and the other side member. A gaming machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, comprising a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable, the movable mechanism being connected to one end side of the displacement member and the other A gaming machine A1 that is provided at least at one point between the end side.

  Here, the one side member and the other side member that are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, a long displacement member that is installed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force applied to the displacement member. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a driving means for giving is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, one side member is formed to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Thus, the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

  However, as in the above-described gaming machine, in the structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member is guided separately to the one side member and the other side in the longitudinal direction to the other side member, respectively, the guidance by the one side member and the other side member There is a problem that a deviation easily occurs between the guide and the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guide by the one-side member and the guide by the other-side member, not only will the load of the driving means be excessive, but the displacement member may be stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a movable mechanism that can be deformed is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Even when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving unit and stop of the displacement member.

  The direction of displacement of the displacement member is not limited, and the displacement member may be displaced along the vertical direction (direction in which gravity acts), or may be displaced along a horizontal direction orthogonal to the vertical direction. Alternatively, it may be displaced along an inclination direction between the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Further, as the deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, for example, when a difference occurs in the guide speed of the displacement member between the one side member side and the other side member side or the displacement member Examples include a case where a difference occurs in the guide direction (phase), or a case where a difference occurs between the two. Since the same applies to the following, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed to include a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including the guide groove and the guided portion guided along the guide groove. Therefore, the structure of the movable mechanism is simplified. Can be Further, since the movable amount and the movable direction of the movable mechanism can be arbitrarily set according to the shape (contour) of the guide groove, it is suitable for the mode of deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. Easy to configure a movable mechanism.

  The guide groove may be a through hole or a concave groove as long as the guided portion can be guided by its inner wall surface. Moreover, the guided part should just be the shape which can be displaced in a guide groove, or can rotate (for example), for example, the cross-sectional circle, the cross-sectional polygon, or the rod-shaped body of a cross-section ellipse is illustrated. The guide groove may allow only the guided portion to rotate. That is, the guide groove is not limited to a linear shape, a curved shape, or a shape that is a combination thereof, and may be formed in a circular shape or a polygon shape that allows only the guided portion to rotate. good.

  In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the guide groove of the movable mechanism is formed in an elongated hole shape in a direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the guide groove of the movable mechanism is a long slot that is long in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member (that is, the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member). Since it is formed in a shape, it is easy to displace the guided part along the guide groove (it is easy to be guided), and the displacement generated between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member is effective by the movable mechanism. Can be absorbed into.

  The groove width of the guide groove (the width in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole shape) is preferably approximately equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guided portion. The direction in which the guided portion is displaced (guided) along the guide groove can be restricted to the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, and the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be controlled. This is because absorption by the movable mechanism can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine A3, the movable mechanism is formed with a plurality of the guide grooves.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the movable mechanism is formed with a plurality of long slot-shaped guide grooves in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. Can be secured, and rattling and wobbling when the displacement member is displaced can be suppressed.

  If the plurality of guide grooves are elongated holes in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, the start and end positions of each guide groove are along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. Each may be different. That is, as long as each guide groove is formed in parallel to each other, the arrangement position may be different along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including a ball joint including a spherical ball portion and a socket portion in spherical contact with the ball portion.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including a ball joint including a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that comes into spherical contact with the ball portion. It can be deformed, and the deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be stably absorbed. In addition, since the movable mechanism can be deformed in all directions, the absorption can be performed regardless of the direction of the deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body. The movable mechanism can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the elastic body. Further, when the elastic body is made of an elastomer, the vibration of the movable mechanism (displacement member) can be converged at an early stage by utilizing the viscosity characteristic (attenuation effect), so that the above-described deviation can be suppressed. .

  Examples of the elastic body include elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethane, etc.) and elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.). In addition, a movable mechanism including a guide groove and a guided portion or a movable mechanism including a ball joint may be further provided with an elastic body. As a result, a function for returning to the initial position and a function for easily converging the vibration can be further added to the movable mechanism.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the movable mechanism includes a regulation unit that regulates deformation exceeding a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with regulating means for regulating deformation exceeding a predetermined amount, so between the guidance by one side member and the guidance by the other side member It is possible to prevent the movable mechanism from being excessively deformed when absorbing the generated deviation and being damaged.

  As the restricting means, when the movable mechanism includes a guide groove and a guided portion, the guided portion is restrained by the inner wall surface (for example, the end) of the guide groove, thereby restricting deformation of the movable mechanism beyond a predetermined amount. For example, a member that restricts deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more by contacting one and the other of the deformable members separated by the movable mechanism is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is provided at two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is interposed at two positions between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. When there is a deviation between the guidance by the other side member and the guidance by the other side member, one of the movable mechanisms interposed in two places is deformed according to the guidance state by the one side member and the other is the other side member Can be deformed in accordance with the guiding state by means of, and the absorption of the deviation can be reliably performed by the interlocking of both movable mechanisms. Therefore, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving means and stop of the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member has a deformation mode in which the one end side is driven by the driving means and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanisms interposed in the two places are different from each other. A gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive (the one side drive), so the drive Compared with a structure (two-sided drive) in which the number of means can be set to 1, and the number of drive means is set to 2 in order to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member, respectively. Can be reduced.

  In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the one end side (drive side) which is the driven side and the other end side (driven side) which is the driven side are different from each other. Where there is a tendency for deviation between the guide by the member and the guide by the other side member, according to the gaming machine A8, in each of the two movable mechanisms, the deformation mode suitable for the driving side and the deformation suitable for the driven side A mode can be carried. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference which arises between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  In the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanism interposed between the two locations is different in at least one of an allowable deformation amount or a deformation direction from each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations differ from each other in at least one of the allowable deformation amount or the deformation direction. Each can be provided with a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the deformation amount allowed by the movable mechanism on the driving side is made larger (or smaller) than the deformation amount allowed by the movable mechanism on the driven side, or the deformation direction allowed by the movable function on the driving side is set on the driven side. The direction can be different from the deformation direction allowed by the movable mechanism. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference which arises between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  As an aspect of the gaming machine A10, for example, in one movable mechanism, a shaft-shaped guided portion is pivotally supported in a circular guide groove and only rotation is allowed, and in the other movable mechanism, an elongated hole shape is formed. A configuration in which a shaft-shaped guided portion is slidably inserted in the guide groove and allowed to be displaced along the extending direction of the guide groove, or the guide grooves of both movable mechanisms are formed in an elongated hole shape. However, since the extending directions are different from each other, a configuration in which the sliding direction of the guided portion is different from each other between one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A9, a gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the movable mechanisms interposed in the two places have different forces required for deformation by a unit amount.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms provided at the two locations differ in force required for deformation by a unit amount, so that the two movable locations are movable. Each mechanism can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the movable mechanism on the driving side can be more easily deformed (or hardly deformed) than the movable mechanism on the driven side. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference which arises between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  As an aspect of the gaming machine A11, for example, when both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type or different types of elastic bodies, the elastic body is deformed by one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism. Easiness (hardness when the elastic body is an elastomer, and spring constant when the elastic body is an elastic spring) is different from each other, and both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type of elastic body. For example, the body size (dimensions such as a cross-sectional area) is different between one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is driven by different driving means on the one end side and the other end side, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, one end side and the other end side are driven by different driving means (both sides driving), so the structure driven by one driving means (one side driving) Compared with the above, the load shared by the driving means can be reduced, and accordingly, the displacement member can be increased in size or the displacement member can be displaced at a higher speed.

  In such a double-sided drive structure, it is difficult to completely synchronize the drive on the one end side and the drive on the other end side of the displacement member, and there is a shift between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member. Since the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable, it has been impossible to employ the conventional method. On the other hand, as in the present invention, by interposing the movable mechanism at two locations between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, a double-sided drive structure can be employed for the first time. While securing the displacement of the member, it is possible to increase the size of the displacement member or increase the displacement speed of the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A12, “different driving means” is the same as “two driving means”. Therefore, the configuration of the drive means itself (type (for example, brush motor, brushless motor, stepping motor, etc.), characteristics (for example, torque-current characteristics, torque-speed characteristics, etc.), capacity (for example, rated output), etc. ) May have the same configuration or different configurations. The same applies to the following.

  The one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanism is one place between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, A gaming machine A13, characterized in that the game machine A13 is provided so as to be biased to either the one end side or the other end side with respect to the longitudinal center of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive (one side) Drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure in which the number of drive means is set to 2 to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member (both sides drive). Thus, the product cost can be reduced. Similarly, since the movable mechanism is provided only at one place, the product cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the movable mechanism is provided at two places.

  In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the one end side (drive side) which is the driven side and the other end side (driven side) which is the driven side are different from each other. In the gaming machine A13, the movable mechanism is biased to one of the one end side and the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side), where deviation between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to effectively absorb the shift generated between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one side drive and 1 movable mechanism, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7 includes a second displacement member that is disposed on the displacement member and is formed so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, the displacement member having the one end side on the driving means And the other end side is driven to displace the second displacement member, so that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is biased to one end side or the other end side from the longitudinal center of the displacement member. Characteristic gaming machine A14.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive (one side) Drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure in which the number of drive means is set to 2 to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member (both sides drive). Thus, the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the one end side (drive side) which is the driven side and the other end side (driven side) which is the driven side are different from each other. Where the deviation between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member is likely to occur, according to the gaming machine A14, by displacing the second displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is more than the longitudinal center of the displacement member. Since it can be biased to one end side or the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side), the displacement caused between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member due to the movement of the center of gravity is caused by the movable mechanism. A state of being easily absorbed can be formed. Thereby, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  In addition, as an aspect of changing the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member by the displacement of the second displacement member, for example, when the drive of the displacement member by the driving unit is started and during the predetermined period, the center of gravity of the displacement member is changed. While the position is brought closer to (or away from) the driving side (one end side), the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to the driven side (the other end side) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of driving the displacement member by the driving means. While the displacement member is displaced in the forward path (or away), the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to (or away from) the drive side (one end side), while the displacement member is displaced in the return path Examples include a form in which the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to (or away from) the driven side (the other end side). The latter form is particularly effective when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced (raised and lowered) along the vertical direction (the direction of gravity). That is, for example, when focusing on one end side, the state in which the one end side is guided to the one side member is changed between the rise when displaced against gravity and the fall when displacement is assisted by gravity. The ability to change the position of the center of gravity according to the state is effective in properly functioning the movable mechanism. The same applies to the other end side.

  In addition, as a form of the second displacement member, for example, as a form that is slid along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, or a rotating body that is formed to be rotatable and has a center of gravity eccentric from the center of rotation. The form etc. are illustrated. Examples of the slide displacement trajectory include straight lines, curved lines, and combinations thereof.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, a second displacement member that is disposed on the displacement member and is formed so as to be capable of relative displacement with respect to the displacement member, and a restriction unit that restricts deformation of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine A15, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, the gaming machine A15 includes the second displacement member that is disposed on the displacement member and that can be relatively displaced with respect to the displacement member. An effect can be performed by displacing the second displacement member. In this case, since the movable member is interposed in the displacement member, when the second displacement member is displaced, the movable member is deformed and the displacement member rattles, and the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced. There is a risk of being disturbed. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A15, since the regulation means for regulating the deformation of the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement of the movable mechanism is regulated and the second displacement member is controlled in a state where the rattling of the displacement member is suppressed. It can be displaced in a stable state.

  As the second displacement member, for example, a rotating body that is rotatably arranged on the displacement member, a slide body that is slidably displaced with respect to the displacement member, or a shaft that is rotatably supported by the displacement member. An oscillating body that oscillates and displaces the other end with the one end as a center is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A15, the restricting means acts on at least one of the displacement member or the movable mechanism when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, so that the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. A gaming machine A16 characterized by forming.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A15, the restricting means acts on at least one of the displacement member or the movable mechanism when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement. Since the deformation is regulated, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be regulated using the displacement of the displacement member. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide driving means for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As a form of the restricting means that acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, one side member, the other side member, or one of them A first engagement member is formed on the base member to which the side member and the other side member are attached, and a second engagement member that can be engaged with the first engagement portion is formed on the displacement member. When the displacement end is displaced, the first engagement member and the second engagement member are engaged, and the displacement of the displacement member is regulated, so that the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated. Second, the insertion member is formed on the one side member, the other side member, or the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, Insertion member in the gap between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the intervention Third, the configuration in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated by inserting the first magnet is applied to the one side member, the other side member, or the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached. The second magnet is disposed on the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, thereby Fourth, when the movable mechanism is formed of a guide groove and a guided portion, a concave portion is provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove, and the displacement of the member is restricted and the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. When the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, the forms in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated by fitting the guided portion into the recessed portion of the guide groove are exemplified. In the third embodiment, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member.

  The gaming machine A15 includes a third displacement member formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, and the restricting means is configured such that the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. Thus, the gaming machine A17 is characterized by forming a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A15, the third displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the predetermined position is provided, so that an effect can be achieved by displacing the third displacement member. It can be carried out. In this case, the restricting means forms a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted when the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. Therefore, the displacement of the third displacement member is utilized. The deformation of the movable mechanism can be restricted. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide driving means for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the third displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As a form of the restricting means that acts on the displacement member to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, firstly, the third displacement member displaced to a predetermined position contacts the displacement member. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member is restricted and the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. Second, a part of the third displacement member displaced to a predetermined position is divided by the intervention of the movable mechanism. The form in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated by being inserted into the gap between one of the deformed members and the other is thirdly arranged with the first magnet on the third displacement member, When the second magnet is disposed on the displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the displacement of the displacement member is caused by the first magnet and the second magnet attracting or repelling each other. Each of the forms is restricted and the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. In the third embodiment, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member.

  In particular, in the first and second embodiments, the third displacement member includes a plurality of annular forming members, and when the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the plurality of annular forming members combine to form an annular body. Preferably, the annular body is formed so as to surround the second displacement member (that is, the annular body is disposed around the second displacement member). Thereby, if it is a 1st form, the deformation | transformation of a movable mechanism is controlled by abutting the outer peripheral side of a 2nd displacement member from four directions in the inner peripheral side of the annular body formed of an annular formation member, The positioning (centering) of the two displacement members can also be performed. The same applies to the third embodiment.

<Concept of Invention with Biasing Spring 366 Energizing Second Rack 364 Non-Parallel>
A gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit. A rack and a pinion that transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the rack An urging means for applying an urging force to the rack, and the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. B1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting a driving force of a driving means by a rack and a pinion (see, for example, JP-A-2014-28226). In this case, for example, in a structure in which the displacement member is raised and lowered, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering the displacement member. Therefore, an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear movement direction of the rack is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is assisted by the urging force of the urging means.

  However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to become unstable. That is, the rack is guided along the guide mechanism when linearly moving (linearly moving), and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. Since the posture of the rack is violated (that is, the rack rattles in the direction of approaching and separating from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied along the linear movement direction of the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force that promotes the unraveling of the attitude of the rack.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine B1 includes a rack and a pinion that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and an urging means that applies an urging force to the rack, and is applied from the urging means to the rack. Since the direction of the urging force is not parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, the urging force of the urging means can be applied as a force in a direction in which the rack is pressed against the guide mechanism that guides the rack. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack from rattling and to prevent the posture from being violated. Furthermore, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is made non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that even if the erratic posture of the rack once occurs, the erratic posture of the rack is prevented. As the force in the direction of convergence, the urging force of the urging means can be applied. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

  In the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of an elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, since the biasing means is formed of an elastic body, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is changed with respect to the linear movement direction of the rack. Therefore, the structure for making it non-parallel can be simplified. Moreover, if it is an elastic body, since the urging | biasing force according to the displacement of a rack can be provided continuously, it becomes possible to urge | bias a rack stably.

  Examples of the elastic body include an elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) and an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.). For example, an elastic body is formed from a band-like or string-like rubber-like elastic body (rubber band) or a metal coil spring, and its longitudinal direction (stretching direction) is set to be non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. On the other hand, by connecting one end to the rack and the other end to the base member, the structure can be simplified and stable urging (giving continuous urging force) can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer, and is arranged in a bent posture.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and is arranged in a bent posture, so that it is necessary for the arrangement of the elastic body. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a sufficient space, and accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design and secure the urging force. That is, in order to secure the urging force of the elastic body, it is necessary to increase the length of the elastic body. However, if the length of the elastic body increases, the elastic body is arranged due to interference with other members. It is difficult to secure the installation space. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, since the elastic body is arranged in a bent posture, the length of the elastic body is lengthened to ensure its urging force and avoid interference with other members. Thus, the space for arranging the elastic body can be secured.

  The bent posture of the elastic body is intended to include a part or all of the curvature. Therefore, as the shape of the elastic body arranged in the bent posture, for example, a linear portion and a linear shape are used. Examples include a shape that is connected with a curved portion (ie, a “C” shape with a rounded bent portion), a shape that is curved as a whole (ie, a “C” shape), and the like. Is done.

  In the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of a magnet, the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the biasing means is formed of a magnet, so that a stable biasing force can be applied to the rack over a long period of time. That is, in the elastic body, deterioration (sagging) occurs with the repeated operation of the rack, and the urging force is changed. By using a magnet like the gaming machine B4, the urging force can be maintained over a long period of time. Can be constant. As a result, the effect of making the direction of the urging force non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack can be stably exhibited over a long period of time.

  In addition, as a structure in the case where the urging means is formed from magnets, the first magnet is disposed in the rack, and the second magnet is disposed on the movement trajectory of the rack. A configuration in which an urging force is applied to the rack by pulling or repelling the two magnets is exemplified. In this case, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member. Further, the number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including the iron member) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

  In the gaming machine B4, the biasing means includes a range in which the biasing force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack and a range in which the biasing force applied to the rack is equal to or less than the reference value in a range in which the rack moves linearly. A gaming machine B5 characterized by forming.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B4, the biasing means includes a range in which a biasing force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack and a load applied to the rack in a range in which the rack linearly moves. Since the range in which the force is equal to or less than the reference value is formed, the biasing force applied to the rack can be a biasing force suitable for the state of the rack.

  For example, in the first range, by applying an urging force exceeding the reference value to the rack, it is difficult for the rack to rattle, and the occurrence of the posture fluctuation is suppressed, while in the second range, By setting the urging force applied to the rack to a reference value or less, it is possible to reduce the urging force (magnetic force) from becoming resistance to driving of the rack, and to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means.

  In addition, as a structure in this case, while arrange | positioning a 1st magnet in a rack, on the movement locus | trajectory of a rack, the range (1st range) which arrange | positions a 2nd magnet, and a 2nd magnet When the rack (first magnet) passes through the first range, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other. By matching, an urging force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack, while when the rack (first magnet) passes through the second range, a magnet acting with the first magnet is A configuration in which the urging force is not applied to the rack (or the applied urging force is set to be equal to or less than the reference value) due to the absence (or a small effect) is exemplified. As described above, also in this case, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member. Further, as in the case described above, the number of first magnets and second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary and may be one or more.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is a direction that generates a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion Therefore, the gap between the rack tooth surface and the pinion tooth surface can be suppressed. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surfaces suppresses the generation of a time lag when driving force is transmitted from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa), thereby improving the response and collision between the tooth surfaces at the initial stage of meshing. Thus, it is possible to suppress the tooth surface from being accelerated and the tooth surface from being damaged. Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is a direction that generates a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surface of the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion is excessively clogged, and it is possible to suppress the pressure from being excessively engaged. As a result, from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa) Resistance at the time of transmitting the driving force to can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the range in which the rack moves linearly includes a force component that causes the tooth surface of the rack to approach the tooth surface of the pinion in the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack. A first range that is a direction to be generated, and a second range that is a direction in which a force component that causes the tooth surface of the rack to be separated from the tooth surface of the pinion is the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack can be changed within the range in which the rack moves linearly. The meshing state of the rack and the pinion can be changed to an optimum state according to the state of the displacement member, the rack or the driving means.

  For example, by applying the first range to the initial stage in a transient state when starting transmission of driving force (that is, the stage of starting displacement of the displacement member), the tooth surfaces are brought close to each other, and the driving force The second range is applied to the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stabilized and is in a steady state (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed). Thus, the tooth surfaces can be separated and the resistance can be suppressed.

  Or it is good also as the contrary. That is, in the initial stage in the transient state when starting transmission of the driving force (that is, the stage of starting the displacement of the displacement member), the inertia force is large to start the displacement of the displacement member in the stopped state, and the drive When the load of the means increases, the second range is applied to the initial stage, whereby the tooth surfaces can be separated from each other and the resistance can be suppressed, so that the load of the driving means can be suppressed. On the other hand, at the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stable and steady (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed), the displacement speed of the displacement member becomes high. When the influence of the rattling is transmitted to the displacement member and the stable displacement of the displacement member is hindered, applying the first range to such a stage makes it possible to bring the tooth surfaces close together and make the rack difficult to rattle. Even when the displacement speed of the displacement member is high, the displacement can be stabilized. In particular, the latter configuration has a structure in which a long displacement member installed between the one side member and the other side member is displaced by being guided by the one side member and the other side member on one end side and the other end side, respectively. It becomes effective in.

  One of the gaming machines B1 to B8 includes a one-side member and another side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and the displacement member is installed between the one-side member and the other-side member, and the one side A gaming machine B9, wherein one end and the other end are guided and displaced by the member and the other member, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machine B9 includes the one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and between the one side member and the other side member. The urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is determined by the direction of the linear movement of the rack. The effect of being non-parallel to can be effectively exhibited.

  Here, in such a structure, if a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable and the load of the driving means becomes excessive, and the displacement member There is also a risk of stopping. That is, in the conventional product in which the posture of the rack is likely to be violated, due to the erraticness of the rack, a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the posture rage. In addition, even if the rack posture is violated, the urging force of the urging means can be applied as a force in a direction to converge the posture violence. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing the occurrence of a deviation between the guide by the one side member and the other side member due to the rampage of the rack.

  The gaming machine B9 includes a movable mechanism formed to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the gaming machine B10 includes a movable mechanism that is deformably formed, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, if the movable mechanism functions when the displacement member is displaced, the deformation of the movable mechanism acts as an external force on the rack, causing the rack to rattle. . As a result, the rack posture becomes unsteady, leading to destabilization of the engagement between the rack and the pinion and a decrease in durability. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that the external force acting with the deformation of the movable mechanism On the other hand, the rack can be opposed by the biasing force applied from the biasing means, and the rack can be hardly rattled. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rack posture from being violated, stabilize the meshing of the rack and the pinion, and improve the durability.

<Concept of Invention with Biasing Spring 366 Arranged in Bent Position>
A base member, a target member disposed displaceably on the base member, and one end connected directly or indirectly to the target member and the other end connected directly or indirectly to the base member. A gaming machine C1, wherein the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture.

  Here, a base member, a target member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, a biasing unit having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member, and a biasing unit 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a facing member that is disposed so as to face a base member is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-28226). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing unit.

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to secure the urging force because the space where the urging means can be disposed is limited. That is, in order to ensure the urging force of the urging means, it is necessary to ensure a sufficient length dimension, but it is necessary to dispose the urging means while avoiding interference with other members. It was difficult to make the length dimension sufficiently long.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture, it can be easily disposed while avoiding interference of other members, so that a sufficient length dimension can be ensured. It is possible to easily secure the urging force.

  The bent posture of the elastic body is intended to include a part or all of the curvature. Therefore, as the shape of the elastic body arranged in the bent posture, for example, a linear portion and a linear shape are used. Examples include a shape that is connected with a curved portion (ie, a “C” shape with a rounded bent portion), a shape that is curved as a whole (ie, a “C” shape), and the like. Is done.

  The gaming machine C1 includes a facing member disposed to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, and the facing member is formed in an area including at least one of one end or the other end of the biasing member. A gaming machine C2 including an opening.

  Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is easy to secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture, and the urging means is not elastic in the assembly process. There was a problem of being struck (hopping with its own elastic recovery force). Therefore, in the assembly process, the work of connecting the biasing means to the target member or the base member with the other hand while pressing the biasing means with one hand so as to maintain the bent posture of the biasing means. It was necessary and complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 includes a facing member that is disposed to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, and the facing member includes one end of the biasing member or Since the opening is formed in a region including at least one of the other ends, the opening of the facing member can be opened even after one end or the other end of the biasing means is connected and the facing member is disposed. The other one of the one end or the other end of the urging means can be connected to each other. That is, it is possible to suppress the biasing means from being flipped by disposing the facing member so as to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween. As a result, it is possible to easily perform the operation of connecting one of the urging means and the other of the other ends, and it is possible to simplify the assembling operation.

  Further, even when the opposing member is disposed opposite to the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, the opening is formed in the opposing member, so that the portion between the opposing member and the biasing means is correspondingly formed. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of resistance by suppressing the sliding. Therefore, since it can suppress that the elastic deformation of an urging | biasing means is inhibited, the urging | biasing force can be made to act on an object member stably. In addition, for example, when the biasing means is formed of a metal coil spring and the opposing member is formed of a resin material, even if one material is lower in strength than the other, those members It is possible to suppress wear of one member accompanying sliding, and dust generated by the wear entering an electronic device such as a mechanical movable part or a sensor to have an adverse effect.

  In the gaming machine C2, the opposing member includes the opening in a region including one end and the other end of the biasing member, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the opposing member is formed with an opening in each of the region including one end of the biasing member and the other region including the other end. An opposing member can be left in the bent portion. Therefore, it is possible to press the portion necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the biasing means with the opposing member while ensuring the maximum formation area of the opening. As a result, simplification of assembly work and suppression of sliding resistance and generation of dust can be effectively achieved.

  In the gaming machine C3, the opposing member communicates with an opening formed in an area including one end of the urging means and an opening formed in an area including the other end of the urging means. And the communication passage is formed as an opening having a size through which the biasing means can pass, and is further outwardly bent than the bent portion of the biasing means disposed in the bent posture. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being located.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, an opening formed in an area including one end of the urging means and an opening formed in an area including the other end of the urging means are provided. A communication passage is provided to be communicated, and the communication passage is formed as an opening having a size through which the urging means can pass, and is bent outward from the bent portion of the urging means disposed in a bent posture. First, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to each of the target member or the base member through each opening of the opposing member, and then through each opening and communication path of the opposing member. The urging means can be arranged between the base member and the opposing member (that is, a bent posture can be formed after fixing both ends of the urging means), whereby the urging means is repelled. Figure that bent such urging means while suppressing Easily disposed.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C5 is provided with a stop plate member arranged to face the base member with a bent portion of the biasing means arranged in the bent posture.

  Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is easy to secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture, and the urging means is not elastic in the assembly process. There was a problem of being struck (hopping with its own elastic recovery force). Therefore, in the assembly process, the work of connecting the biasing means to the target member or the base member with the other hand while pressing the biasing means with one hand so as to maintain the bent posture of the biasing means. It was necessary and complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, a stop plate member disposed opposite to the base member with the bent portion of the biasing means disposed in the bent posture is provided. Therefore, first, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to each of the target member or the base member, and then the intermediate portion of the urging means is locked to the stop plate member (the opposite of the base member and the stop plate member). (That is, a bent posture can be formed after fixing both ends of the urging means), and the urging means is bent while suppressing the urging means from being repelled. It can be easily arranged in the posture. Therefore, the assembling work can be simplified.

  Furthermore, the region where the stop plate member faces is only the bent portion of the urging means, and the region excluding the bent portion of the urging device is open, so that sliding when the urging device is elastically deformed is suppressed. Thus, the occurrence of resistance can be reduced. Therefore, since it can suppress that the elastic deformation of an urging | biasing means is inhibited, the urging | biasing force can be made to act on an object member stably. In addition, since the area excluding the bent portion of the biasing means is open, the mating member wears due to sliding, and the dust generated by the wear is mechanically movable parts, electronic devices such as sensors, etc. It is possible to suppress the penetration and adverse effects.

  The gaming machine C5 includes a rotating contact member that is formed to be rotatable and has an outer peripheral surface formed to be able to contact the urging means, and the urging means is provided between the one end and the other end. A part of the rotating contact member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating contact member, and is arranged in a bent posture. The stop plate member is formed in a flange shape radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating contact member. A gaming machine C6, wherein the gaming machine C6 is formed integrally with the rotary contact member as a protruding flange portion.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the rotating contact member that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the biasing means is formed to be rotatable in order to make the biasing means a bent posture. When the urging means is elastically deformed (for example, expanded or contracted), the rotation contact member and the stop plate member (flange) can be rotated along with the elastic deformation, and the elastic deformation of the urging means can be smoothly performed. Can be done. In other words, in order to make the urging means a bent posture, the member abutting on the urging means (corresponding to a rotating abutting member) or the urging member is prevented from being repelled (does not jump by its own elastic recovery force). Compared with a case where a member to be kept (corresponding to a stop plate member) is fixed, it is possible to suppress the sliding resistance generated between the biasing means. Further, since the sliding can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the adverse effects of the wear caused by the sliding and the dust generated by the wear.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a displacement abutting member is provided that is displaceably disposed on the base member and that can be abutted against the biasing means, and the displacement abutting member is the biasing force. A gaming machine C7, wherein the biasing means is arranged in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a part between the one end and the other end of the means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 includes a displacement abutting member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable. Since the urging means is arranged in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a part between the other end, the assembling work of the urging means can be facilitated. That is, by first connecting one end and the other end of the urging means to each of the target member or the base member, and then displacing the displacement contact member, the urging means can be bent. Therefore, since the posture bent after fixing both ends of the urging means can be formed, the arrangement of the urging means in the bent posture can be facilitated while suppressing the urging means from being flipped. .

  In the gaming machine C7, the base member includes guide means for guiding the displacement contact member, the guide means extending in a direction in which the biasing means is bent, and the first guide portion. A gaming machine C8, comprising: a second guide portion that is folded back from the terminal end side of the guide portion and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the guide means for guiding the displacement member includes a first guide portion extending in a direction in which the biasing means is bent, and a terminal end of the first guide portion. And a second guide portion that is folded back from the side and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means. Therefore, by displacing the displacement abutting member along the first guide portion of the guide means, A bent posture can be formed, and the displacement abutting member is arranged on the second guide portion of the guide means, so that the displacement abutting member is pressed against the terminal end of the second guide portion and held by the elastic recovery force of the urging means. be able to. That is, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only for urging the target member but also for holding (fixing) the displacement contact member, a member for fixing the displacement contact member (for example, There is no need to prepare a fastening screw), and there is no need to perform fastening work. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a pair of the target members are disposed so as to be displaceable on the base member, and the biasing means has one end directly on one target member of the pair of target members. Connected to the other target member of the pair of target members, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member.

  Here, the base member, a target member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and one end thereof is directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. It is known that a pair of target members are disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the pair of target members are biased by separate biasing means. According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing unit.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, each target member is urged by a separate urging means, so that the urging force applied to each target member is large due to individual differences of these separate urging means. There was a problem that variation occurred in the thickness.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, when a pair of target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are disposed on one and the other of the pair of target members. Since each is connected, the urging | biasing force provided to a pair of object member can be equalize | homogenized. That is, when two urging means are provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in characteristics (such as dimensional tolerance) of the respective urging means. By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, variation in the urging force applied to each target member can be suppressed. As a result, variation in the displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

  In this case, a pair of target members may be disposed on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be disposed on different base members. It may be a form.

  In addition, the gaming machine C9 has one side member and another side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and is constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and is connected to the one side member and the other side member at one end side. It is particularly effective to apply to a gaming machine that includes a displacement member that is guided and displaced on the other end side, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to the configuration for guiding one end side of the displacement member and the configuration for guiding the other end side. In such a gaming machine, a shift is likely to occur between the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side of the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. By applying, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and variations in their displacement can be suppressed, so that the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement can be suppressed and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  The gaming machine C9 includes a connecting member connected to the base member, and one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means is The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained by contacting the connection member. A gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the intermediate portion of the biasing means whose one end and the other end are connected to the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so that the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained by pressing the member, the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, the work efficiency at the time of attaching these base members and connecting members to an attachment object can be improved by such temporary fixing. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example, ), And it is not necessary to prepare a fastening screw), and it is not necessary to perform fastening work. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, a displacement abutting member that is displaceably disposed on the base member and abuts against the urging means to form a bent posture of the urging means, Contact member drive means for applying a drive force to the contact member, and the bending state of the biasing means can be changed by the displacement contact member being displaced by the drive force of the contact member drive means A gaming machine C11, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the base member is displaceably disposed and abuts against the biasing means to form a bent posture of the biasing means. A displacement abutting member; and a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement abutting member. The displacement abutting member is displaced by the driving force of the abutting member driving means. Since the bent state can be changed, the urging state by the urging means can be adjusted to a more appropriate one according to the state of the target member to which the urging force is applied.

  As the displacement direction of the displacement abutting member, first, the direction connecting the one end of the urging means (the position connected to the target member) and the displacement abutting member is not changed, and one end of the urging means is Second, the direction in which the distance between the displacement abutting member is changed does not change the distance between one end of the urging means and the displacement abutting member, and the one end of the urging means and the displacement abutting member Examples of the direction in which the direction connecting the third and third directions is changed, and the direction in which the first and second directions are combined are exemplified.

  In the case of the first direction, the preload of the urging means (the load applied to the urging means in the assembled state) is changed without changing the direction of the urging force applied to the target member from the urging means. The size can be adjusted. That is, the apparent spring constant of the biasing means can be adjusted (increased or decreased). Therefore, the magnitude of the urging force applied from the urging means in accordance with the amount of displacement from the reference position of the target member is controlled according to the state of the target member (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). be able to. For example, when the target member is at the upper end position, the preload of the biasing means is increased, and the force required to maintain the target member at the upper end position is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means, while the target member is When displacing, it is possible to reduce the preload of the urging means and prevent the urging force of the urging means from becoming a resistance when displacing the target member.

  In the case of the second direction, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member can be changed without changing the magnitude of the preload of the urging means. Therefore, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member is switched between the direction coinciding with the direction of displacement of the target member and the non-parallel direction, or the increase / decrease of the degree of non-parallelity is changed. Control can be performed according to the state (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). For example, in the initial stage in the transitional state where the displacement of the target member starts, the behavior of the target member becomes unstable, increasing the degree of non-parallel biasing force direction, On the other hand, at the stage where the displacement speed of the target member reaches a constant state, the behavior of the target member is stabilized, but the degree of making the direction of the urging force non-parallel is decreased to reduce the resistance. Thus, energy required for driving the target member can be suppressed.

  The configuration of the gaming machine C11 is particularly effective when the target member is formed as a rack that meshes with the pinion. This is because the meshing state (meshing state) between the pinion and the rack can be controlled by changing the direction of the biasing force applied to the target member from the biasing means.

  In the gaming machine C11, the case where the displacement abutting member is driven by the driving force of the abutting member driving means has been described. However, the abutting member driving means is omitted, and the displacement abutting member is elastically supported so as to be displaceable. May be. In this case, the displacement abutting member is displaced according to the state of the target member, and the direction of the preload or (and) the urging force of the urging means can be adjusted, while the displacement abutting by the elastic recovery force in the elastic support. The member can be returned to the initial position. As an elastic support structure, for example, an elastic body is connected to a displacement abutting member that is displaceable along a guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement of the displacement abutting member is initially determined by elastic deformation of the elastic body. A structure that enables return to the position, and an outer cylinder of a bush in which the inner cylinder and the outer cylinder are connected by a rubber-like elastic body are disposed on the base member, and a displacement abutting member is disposed on the inner cylinder, Examples include a structure that enables displacement of the displacement contact member and return to the initial position by elastic deformation of the bush. According to the latter structure, since the displaceable direction of the displacement contact member is not limited to one direction, the displacement direction of the displacement contact member can be the above-described third direction.

  Further, the contact member driving means may be omitted, and the disposition position of the displacement contact member may be manually adjustable. In this case, depending on the secular change of each member (for example, decrease in spring constant due to sag (deterioration) of the biasing means, wear of the tooth surfaces of the rack and pinion, etc.) ) The direction of the urging force can be adjusted. As a structure that allows manual adjustment of the disposition position of the displacement contact member, for example, the displacement contact member can be displaced along a guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement contact member is fixed to the guide groove. A structure for adjusting the preload or the like according to the position to be moved, or a plurality of support holes to which the displacement contact member can be attached or detached is provided in the base member, and the preload or the like is adjusted according to the position of the support hole in which the displacement contact member is disposed. Examples include structures.

<Concept of Invention Taking Second Rack 364 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, a rack and a pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the rack And a guide means for guiding the rack, wherein the guide means guides the rack in a displaceable manner along the tooth surface of the pinion.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting a driving force of a driving means by a rack and a pinion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-75550). Since the rack and pinion can convert rotational motion into linear motion, they are often used as a mechanism for linearly displacing the displacement member by the driving force (rotational motion) of the motor.

  However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to become unstable. That is, the rack is guided along the guide mechanism when linearly moving (linearly moving), and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. Since the posture of the rack is violated (that is, the rack rattles in the direction of approaching and separating from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member and the guide means for guiding the rack are provided, and the guide means can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since the rack is guided in a stable state, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the meshing between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Note that the rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion when the linear tooth surface of the rack is in contact with the arcuate tooth surface of the pinion in the axial direction of the pinion (the straight line of the rack tooth surface). Is a state where the rack is tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface, and the rack is rotated around the pinion axis.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are disposed, and the guide means rotates along a toothed surface of the rack and a guided portion that rotates to the guided portion. A gaming machine D2 comprising: a projecting portion that is slidably inserted and projects from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the guiding means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the guided portion extending along the tooth surface of the rack and the pinion shaft. And a projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion of the rack.When the projecting portion is slid along the guided portion, the projecting portion protrudes within the guided portion. By rotating the installation part relatively, the rack can be displaced along the guided part while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the guided portion is formed in the rack, and the protruding portion is formed in the region of the base member facing the rack, the guided portion and the protruding portion are placed on the movement trajectory of the rack. Can be arranged. In other words, it is not necessary to form a portion for allowing the rack to be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion outside the outer shape of the rack, and it is a dead space where other members cannot be disposed in order to avoid interference with the rack. Since it can be disposed, the space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

  The guided portion may be a concave groove formed in a surface facing the base member of the rack, or may be a long hole opening formed in the rack. In this case, it is preferable that the width of the guided portion is constant along the longitudinal direction, and the cross-sectional shape of the protruding portion is a cross-sectional circle having a diameter substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the width of the guided portion. preferable. This is because the meshing when the rack is linearly moved while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion can be made more constant. However, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be a cross-sectional ellipse, a cross-sectional polygon, or the like. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the protruding portion may be any shape as long as it can slide along the guided portion and can rotate within the guided portion.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack and is provided on a side surface of the rack. A first restricting portion capable of contacting, and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction, and allowed by the second restricting portion. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack, and the second restricting the displacement in the width direction of the rack. When the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion, the displacement in the width direction of the rack is restricted by the first restriction portion and the second restriction portion, and the rack is displaced in the linear motion direction. be able to.

  In this case, since the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the amount of displacement permitted between the first restricting portion and the pinion, the amount of displacement permitted by the second restricting portion is larger. In addition to the effect produced by the machine D1, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a guided groove as a concave groove or an opening in the rack, it is possible to ensure the rigidity of the rack and improve the durability. Further, by ensuring the rigidity of the rack, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the rack when driven by the rotation of the pinion, and from this point, the meshing between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained.

  In addition, it is preferable that a 1st control part protrudes from a base member as a rod-shaped body. This is because the rack can be easily displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion when the first contact portion comes into contact with the side surface of the rack to restrict the displacement of the rack. Here, examples of the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion (rod-like body) include a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a shape obtained by partially combining these. In this case, it is preferable that the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion is a shape in which a side surface facing (abutting) the rack is curved in a cross-sectional arc shape. This is because the resistance can be reduced and the displacement of the rack can be prevented from being hindered when the displacement is regulated by contacting the side surface of the rack.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with a biasing means for imparting a biasing force to the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with a biasing means for imparting a biasing force to the rack, so that the driving force of the driving means is assisted using the biasing force. can do. For example, in a structure in which the displacement member is raised and lowered, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, when the displacement member is raised, a larger driving force is required than when the displacement member is lowered. Then, by applying an urging force to the rack, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion, the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack is guided by the guide means, a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide means and the rack, and the posture of the rack is exposed by the gap. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied to the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force that promotes the unraveling of the rack posture. On the other hand, in the present invention, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, in the structure in which the urging force by the urging means is applied to the rack, even if the posture of the rack is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized. it can.

  As the biasing means, for example, elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.) and elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethanes, etc.) are used as biasing forces, or the magnetic force of the magnet is used. What is used as an urging force is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D4, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect exerted by the gaming machine D4, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is made non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. The urging force of the urging means can be applied as the force in the direction of pressing against the guiding means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack from rattling and to prevent the posture from being violated.

  Furthermore, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is made non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that even if the erratic posture of the rack once occurs, the erratic posture of the rack is prevented. As the force in the direction of convergence, the urging force of the urging means can be applied. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

  The linear movement direction of the rack means a direction in which the rack driven by the rotation of the pinion is displaced, and is a direction along the tooth surface of the rack. In this case, in the gaming machine D5, the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion (the rack can be rotated about the axis of the pinion), so the linear movement direction of the rack changes according to the rotational position of the rack. Is done.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a gaming machine D6 comprising linear motion regulating means for regulating displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 includes linear motion regulating means for regulating the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction. The driving force required for the driving means can be reduced. For example, in the structure in which the displacement member is moved up and down, in order to stop and hold the displacement member in the raised position, it is necessary to resist the gravity acting on the displacement member, so that the driving force required for the driving means increases. Since the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction can be regulated by the linear motion regulating means, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced correspondingly (or the driving is stopped). As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means when holding the displacement member at a predetermined position (for example, the raised position).

  The gaming machine D6 includes an urging unit that applies an urging force to the rack, and the linear motion regulating unit is engageable with a first engagement portion formed on the rack and the first engagement portion. A second engaging portion formed on the guide means, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, and The gaming machine D7 is a direction in which the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the linear motion restricting means is formed into a first engaging portion formed on the rack, and engageable with the first engaging portion. A biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, and the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are formed. Since the engaging portion is in the direction in which the engaging portion is engaged, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be engaged and released in accordance with the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction.

  That is, the rack is displaceable along the tooth surface of the pinion (can be rotated about the pinion axis), and the urging force of the urging means urges the rack in a direction to displace the rack along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, for example, when the engagement of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is formed as a concavo-convex engagement, when the rack is displaced to a predetermined position in the linear motion direction, the concave and convex portions are formed. , The rack is rotated by the urging force of the urging means, and the engagement of the concavo-convex shape (the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion) can be formed (the protrusion is inserted into the recess). The engagement can be maintained by the urging force of the urging means. On the other hand, when the pinion is driven from this state, the rack is rotated in a direction to release the engagement of the concavo-convex shape against the urging force of the urging means, thereby releasing the engagement of the concavo-convex shape (from the recess) The projection can be extracted), and the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction.

  The gaming machine D7 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are disposed, and the guide means rotates along the tooth surface of the rack and a guided portion that rotates to the guided portion. A projecting portion that is slidably inserted and projects from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft, and the linear motion restricting means includes the first engaging portion A gaming machine D8, wherein the gaming machine D8 is formed by a recessed portion recessed in an inner wall surface of the guided portion of the guiding means, and the second engaging portion is formed by a protruding portion of the guiding means.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the guide means is guided to be extended to the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided part and faces the pinion shaft. Since it is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the base member at the position to be played, the same effect as the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, since the first engagement portion of the linear motion restricting means is formed in the guided portion of the guide means, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved, and linear motion restriction is also possible. Since the second engaging portion of the means is formed by the protruding portion of the guiding means, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly by using the parts as well. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  The gaming machine D7 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack and is provided on a side surface of the rack. A first restricting portion capable of contacting, and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction, and allowed by the second restricting portion. The amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion, and the linear motion restricting means is the first engagement member. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the joint portion is formed by a recess provided in a side surface of the rack, and the second engagement portion is formed by a second restricting portion of the guide means.

  According to the gaming machine D9, the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack, and can be brought into contact with the side surface of the rack, and in the width direction of the rack. A second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting the displacement of the rack, and a displacement amount in the width direction of the rack allowed by the second restricting portion is between the first restricting portion and the pinion. Since it is larger than the allowable displacement in the width direction of the rack, the same effect as the gaming machine D3 is obtained. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the linear motion restricting means is formed on the side surface of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, the space efficiency can be improved, and Since the two engaging portions are formed by the second restricting portion of the guide means, the number of components can be reduced correspondingly by using the components as well. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  The gaming machine D6 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed, and the guide means includes a guided portion as a recessed groove extending along the tooth surface of the rack and a guided portion thereof. A projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide portion and that projects from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion. A first engaging portion is formed with a part of the guided portion having a deep recess, and the leading end side of the protruding portion of the guide means is formed to be engageable with the first engaging portion. A gaming machine D10 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6, the guiding means is rotatable as a recessed groove extending in the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and to the guided part. Since it includes a projecting portion that is slidably inserted and projects from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft, the same effect as the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, the linear motion restricting means includes a first engaging portion formed by deepening a part of the recessed portion in the guided portion of the guiding means, and the guiding means protrudes from the first engaging portion. Since the front end side of the portion is formed to be engageable, the engagement of the first engagement portion and the protruding member and the release thereof can be performed in accordance with the displacement in the linear movement direction of the rack.

  In addition, since the first engagement portion of the linear motion regulating means is formed by partially deepening the rack groove (guided portion), it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and the space efficiency is improved. In addition to being able to achieve this, the portion for engaging with the first engaging portion is formed by the protruding portion of the guiding means, so that it is possible to reduce the number of components by using the components. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  In the gaming machine D11, a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a protruding direction by a spring is provided on the tip side of the projecting portion, and the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is engaged with the first engagement portion. It is preferable. This is because the engagement between the first engagement portion and the distal end side of the projecting portion and the release of the engagement can be smoothly performed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, comprising: a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed; and a cover member disposed to face the base member with the rack and the pinion interposed therebetween, the base member and the cover member The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that a displacement of the rack is restricted by the opposing surfaces of the rack, and a connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is disposed in the vicinity of the rack.

  Here, the rack and the pinion are disposed on the base member, the cover member is covered on the base member, and the thickness direction of the rack (that is, the base member and the cover member) is covered by the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member. A gaming machine having a structure that regulates displacement in the opposite direction) is known. In this case, if the distance between the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member is unstable, the displacement restriction in the rack thickness direction becomes insufficient, which adversely affects the meshing state with the pinion. However, if the number of connecting portions that connect the base member and the cover member is increased in order to stabilize the distance between the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member, the product cost increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the connecting portion that connects the base member and the cover member is disposed in the vicinity of the rack. The distance between the opposing surfaces of the members that contribute to the regulation of the rack displacement can be steadily stabilized. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the meshing state with the pinion by suppressing the number of connecting portions and reducing the product cost and making it possible to sufficiently restrict the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction.

  In the gaming machine D11, the rack includes an opening formed as an elongated hole-shaped opening, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D12, the rack has an opening formed in the shape of a long hole, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack, so that the base member and the cover member are connected at a position closest to the rack. It can connect with a part. Therefore, the space | interval can be stabilized in the area | region most suitable in order to regulate the displacement of the rack among the opposing surfaces of a base member and a cover member. As a result, the number of connecting parts is minimized, the product cost is reduced, and even when the number of connecting parts is minimized, the displacement restriction in the rack thickness direction is maximized to ensure engagement with the pinion. Can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine D12, the guide means is inserted into the rack as an elongated hole-shaped opening along the tooth surface of the rack, and is rotatably inserted into the guided part. And a projecting portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion, the opening is formed by the guided portion, and the connecting portion is formed by the projecting portion. A gaming machine D13 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D12, the guiding means is guided along the rack tooth surface and is guided to be rotatable and slidable on the guided part. Since it is provided with a projecting portion that is inserted and projecting from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft, the same effect as the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, since the opening is formed by the guided portion and the connecting portion is formed by the projecting portion, it is possible to improve the space efficiency and reduce the product cost. That is, since the connecting portion is provided by using the guided portion (opening portion) formed in the rack, it is not necessary to arrange the connecting portion outside the outer shape of the rack. This member can be disposed outside the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition, the guided portion and the projecting portion constituting the guiding means for guiding the displacement of the rack are connected to each other so as to connect and fix the base member and the cover member, and an opening through which the connecting portion is inserted. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D12 or D13, the gaming machine D14 is characterized in that the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is restricted by the contact of the connecting portion with the end of the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D12 or D13, the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by the contact of the connecting portion at the end of the opening, thereby improving the space efficiency. Product costs can be reduced. For example, a structure is conceivable in which a stopper wall that abuts against the side surface of the rack is erected from the base member and the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by abutting the side surface of the rack against the stopper wall. In the structure, since the stopper wall is formed, the space where other members can be disposed is reduced outside the outer shape of the rack. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D14, it is not necessary to dispose the connecting portion corresponding to the stopper wall outside the outer shape of the rack, and accordingly, other members can be disposed outside the outer shape of the rack. , Space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the function of connecting and fixing the base member and the cover member to the connecting portion, it can also be used as a stopper function for restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction. The number of points can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D14, the base member and the cover member are formed of a resin material, and the connecting portion is erected from one of the base member or the cover member, and the erected tip side of the base member or the cover member The game is characterized in that the metal screw is embedded in the inside of the connecting portion along the standing direction of the connecting portion when fastened to the other by a metal screw and fastened by the screw. Machine D15.

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D14, the standing tip side of the connecting portion that is erected from one of the base member or the cover member is fastened to the other of the base member or the cover member by a metal screw. That is, when the base member and the cover member are connected and fixed by the connecting member, the metal screw is embedded in the connecting portion, so that the rigidity of the connecting portion can be increased. Thereby, when the displacement of the rack is restricted by bringing the connecting portion into contact with the end of the opening, the connecting portion can be prevented from being damaged, and the durability can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using the interposed member 370 as an example>
One side member and other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member are respectively guided between the one side member and the other side member and are guided between the one side member and the other side member. A gaming machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, comprising an interposed member interposed between the one side member and the other side member. A gaming machine E1.

  Here, the one-side member and the other-side member that are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, the displacement member that is laid between the one-side member and the other-side member, and the driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, one side member is formed to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Thus, the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the rigidity of the entire unit (the structure in which the displacement member is installed between the one side member and the other side member) is lowered and easily damaged, so that it is difficult to handle in the unit state. There was a problem that. Therefore, for example, in the transporting process for transporting the unit and the mounting process for attaching the unit to the counterpart member, it is necessary to handle the unit so that a large load is not applied to the unit, resulting in deterioration in workability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the interposition member interposed between the one side member and the other side member is provided, the entire unit can be formed into a frame shape, and the rigidity can be improved. Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated. Therefore, for example, the allowable value of the load applied to the unit is relaxed in the transporting process and the mounting process, so that workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine E1, a pair of racks that are respectively connected to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member and that can be directly moved to the one side member and the other side member, and a tooth on each of the pair of racks And a pair of pinions rotatably arranged on the one side member and the other side member and applied with the driving force of the driving means, and in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the linear movement direction of the rack A pair of rod-like bodies fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively, and the rack is connected to the rod-like body and the connecting portion is slid along the rod-like body. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the rod-like body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, and the rack is connected to the rod-like body. It is possible to connect to the one side member and the other side member via the, thereby forming a closed connection loop of the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member and the interposed member. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinion disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member are not connected. In connection with the gaming machine E2, the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member can be connected via the rack and the rod-shaped body (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire unit can be increased. Moreover, the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member is improved by fixing the rod-like body to the one side member and the other side member. This also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the entire unit.

  Note that the rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member means that the rod-shaped body formed separately from the one-side member and the other-side member is attached and fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member ( For example, this is not limited to the case of fastening and fixing), and includes the case where a rod-shaped body is formed integrally with one side member and the other side member (for example, integrally formed by resin molding with a molding die). Moreover, it is preferable that a rod-shaped body is formed from a metal material. This is because when the one-side member and the other-side member are formed of a resin material, it is possible to efficiently improve the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member and the stabilization of the rack posture. Further, the driving force of the driving means may be applied to only one of the pair of racks, or may be applied to both of the pair of racks.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a ball screw mechanism having a nut, a screw shaft, and a plurality of balls interposed between the nut and the spiral groove of the screw shaft, the nut being at one end side and the other end side of the displacement member And the screw shaft is disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the screw shaft of the ball screw mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the displacement member is a ball. A gaming machine E3 that is displaced along the screw axis of the screw mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is connected to the one side member and the other side member via the ball screw mechanism, so that the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member are interposed. A closed connection loop with the installation member can be formed. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinion disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member are not connected. In the gaming machine E3, the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member can be connected via the ball screw mechanism (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire unit can be increased. Further, since the screw shaft is fixed to the one side member and the other side member, the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member is improved accordingly. This also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the entire unit.

  Further, in the rack and pinion, since the change in the meshing state is large, the state of the displacement member tends to become unstable. On the other hand, in the ball screw structure, due to the structure in which a plurality of balls are interposed between the nut and the spiral groove of the screw shaft, there is very little change in the meshing state. Therefore, for example, it is not necessary to separately provide a rod-like body as in the case of the gaming machine E2. That is, for example, in the gaming machine E2, the first configuration (rack and pinion) for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member, and the stability of the rack posture are improved. The two configurations (the rod-shaped body) for achieving the above are formed by separate members, but according to the gaming machine E3, these two configurations are formed by one member (ball screw mechanism). it can.

  In the structure in which one end side of the displacement member is separately guided to the one side member and the other end side is separately guided to the other side member, a shift is easily caused between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, It is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guide by the one-side member and the guide by the other-side member, not only will the load of the driving means be excessive, but the displacement member may be stopped. In this case, the structure of the gaming machine E3 that guides the displacement member by the ball screw mechanism is particularly effective for suppressing the deviation between the guide by the one-side safety and the guide by the other-side member.

  The gaming machine E2 or E3 includes a movable mechanism formed to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Game machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the gaming machine E4 includes a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is at least one between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, the gap between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member (that is, the deviation between the rack on the one side member side and the rack on the other side member side, or the one side member) Even if a shift between the nut on the side and the nut on the other member side occurs, the shift can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine E4, a rod-like body or a screw shaft is disposed on one side member and the other side member, the rack is connected to the rod-like body, and the nut is connected to the screw shaft via a ball. Or the posture of the nut can be stabilized. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member of the displacement member and the guide by the other side member, the movable mechanism itself can be easily deformed, and the function of absorbing the deviation by the movable mechanism is surely exhibited. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is connected to at least one of the one side member or the other side member in a displaceable state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one side member and the other side member in a displaceable state. The relative positions of the side member, the other side member, and the interposed member can be adjusted. Therefore, when attaching the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member for guiding the displacement member and the other side member) to the attachment target, for example, the one side member and the other side member or the intermediate member. Even when one of the installation members is attached and the other is displaced with respect to the attachment position, the other position can be adjusted and attached to the attachment position. As a result, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  In particular, when a movable mechanism is interposed in at least one position of the displacement member as in the gaming machine E4, deformation of the movable mechanism can be used, so that the workability of the mounting work for mounting the unit to the mounting target is improved. Can be achieved.

  In addition, as an aspect of the displacement of the interposed member with respect to the one side member and the other side member, for example, rotation by a shaft support, linear or curved slide displacement by a guide groove, displacement in an arbitrary direction by loose fitting, or Examples include displacement in a direction in which elastic deformation of the elastic body by elastic support is allowed.

  In the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposition member are connected at one place, and the connection place is connected in a displaceable state by fastening with a screw. A gaming machine E6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the interposition member are connected at one place, and the connecting place is fastened by screws. Since they are connected in a displaceable state, relative rotation of the interposed member with respect to the one side member or the other side member can be allowed with the screw as the rotation axis. Therefore, when attaching the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member that guides the displacement member and the other side member) to the attachment target, the attachment position with respect to the attachment target can be adjusted. The workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  Furthermore, after the unit is mounted on the mounting target, the unit can be fixed to the mounting target so as not to be displaced by a fastening force by a screw. That is, in the state before the unit is attached, the fastening of the screw is temporarily fixed, and the attachment position can be adjusted by the above-described relative displacement, and the fastening of the screw is permanently fixed (tightening) in the attaching operation. The unit can be firmly fixed to the mounting target.

  In addition, as a structure for fixing the unit to the mounting target so as not to be displaced, for example, a screw is formed as a tapping screw, and is fastened to a connecting portion between one side member or the other side member and the interposed member, And a unit that is relatively rotatable, and the tip of the tapping screw is fastened to an attachment target, whereby the whole is fixed so as not to be displaced by the axial force of the tapping screw.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposed member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposed member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement. Alternatively, the relative displacement of the interposed member with respect to the other side member is allowed, and the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member that guides the displacement member) is attached to the attachment target. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate part such as a screw for connecting the two while improving workability at the time, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The engaging displaceable engagement includes a form in which the other shaft is rotatably inserted in one hole, a form in which the other shaft is slidably inserted in one groove, and the other convex portion in one recess. The form etc. which slidably fit are illustrated.

  Any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, comprising: a target member disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member; and biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member. The urging force of the means is applied to the interposed member so that the state where the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member is maintained. .

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the biasing means disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member in order to apply a biasing force to the target member. And the biasing force of the biasing means acts on the interposed member so that the state in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member is maintained. At least the interposition member can be temporarily fixed to the other side member. Therefore, even when the interposition member is interposed in a displaceable state with respect to the one side member and the other side member, the unit (guides the displacement member) by temporary fixing using the urging force of the urging means. It is possible to improve the working efficiency when attaching the structure body in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member to be attached to the attachment target.

  Further, the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the interposed member to the one side member and the other side member, and accordingly, the number of parts and assembly Man-hours can be reduced.

  As a form in which the biasing force of the biasing means is applied to the interposed member, one end of the biasing means is connected to the target member and the other end is connected to the interposed member to apply the biasing force to the interposed member. When the target member is disposed in each of the first form and the one side member and the other side member, one end of the urging means is connected to one target member of the both target members and the other target member is connected Examples include a second form in which the other end of the biasing means is connected, and an intermediate portion between the one end and the other end of the biasing means is brought into contact with the interposed member to apply a biasing force to the interposed member. The

  In the first embodiment, the target member and the urging means may be disposed only in one of the one side member and the other side member. The urging means may be provided, and the other ends of the urging means may be connected to the interposed member. In the former case, for example, in the structure in which the target member and the urging means are disposed only on one side member of the one side member and the other side member, the one end side of the interposed member is recessed on the one side member and The urging force of the urging means is coupled in such a way that it can be displaced by the engagement of the convex portion, and the other end side of the interposed member is rotatably coupled to the other side member by a shaft support, and the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion. The form which gives urging | biasing force to an interposed member so that is acted is illustrated. According to this embodiment, the interposing member is rotated by the applied urging force around the shaft support on the other end side, and the concave / convex engagement can be formed by this rotation. Even in the case where only the urging force is used, it is possible to reliably maintain the engagement (the state where the interposition member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member) only by the urging force.

  Further, as the target member, a rack and a pinion are disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is linearly moved. Thus, a rack in a structure for displacing the displacement member is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E8, when the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one side member or the other side member, it is connected in a state in which displacement in a three-dimensional direction is allowed. A gaming machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E5 to E8, three-dimensional when the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one side member and the other side member in a displaceable state. Since the coupling is performed in a state where displacement in the direction is allowed, the adjustment range of the relative positions of the one side member, the other side member, and the interposed member can be expanded. Therefore, when attaching the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member for guiding the displacement member and the other side member) to the attachment target, for example, the one side member, the other side member, and the intermediate member. Even when the mounting surfaces of the installation members are non-parallel, the posture of each member can be adjusted with respect to the mounting surface. As a result, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E9 includes a base member to which the one side member, the other side member, and the interposed member are attached, and at least the one side member and the other side member are displaceable with respect to the base member. A gaming machine E10 that is attached in a state.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, since at least one side member and the other side member are attached to the base member in a displaceable state, the displacement of the displacement member Can be stabilized. That is, the one side member and the other side member are not rigidly connected to the base member, but are attached in a displaceable state, and the displacement (that is, rattling or wobbling) is utilized to obtain the displacement member. The deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member can be absorbed, and as a result, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In addition, the object attached in a displaceable state with respect to the base member is a case where the interposed member is displaceably connected to the one side member and the other side member as in gaming machines E5 to E9. In addition, only the one side member and the other side member may be provided, and in addition to this, the interposed member may be attached in a displaceable state. On the other hand, when the interposed member is connected to the one-side member and the other-side member in an undisplaceable state (that is, rigidly connected), the one-side member, the other-side member, and the interposed member Both are attached in a state displaceable with respect to the base member.

  In the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the target member, and an intermediate portion of the biasing member. A gaming machine E11, wherein the abutting member is disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the target member, Since the contact member is disposed on the base member, one of the one side member and the other side member (that is, the target member is disposed). When the object is displaced with respect to the base member (that is, rattling or wobbling occurs), the relative position between one of the one side member and the other side member and the contact member can be changed. . Therefore, by changing the relative position, the contact position of the contact member with respect to the urging means can be changed, and the urging means can be bent or the degree of bending of the urging means can be changed. The direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member can be changed. That is, according to one state of the one side member and the other side member (change in posture with respect to the base member), the biasing direction to the target member can be actively controlled only by the mechanical structure.

  In addition, as a target member, a rack and a pinion are disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is directly moved. Thus, a rack in a structure for displacing the displacement member is exemplified. Here, when one of the one side member and the other side member (the one on which the rack is disposed) is displaced (rattles or wobbles) with respect to the base member, the posture of the displacement member changes due to the rattling. As a result, the posture of the rack is changed, and the meshing state with the pinion becomes unstable. In this case, according to the gaming machine E11, as described above, the biasing direction to the target member (rack) is actively controlled according to one state (change in posture) of the one side member and the other side member. Therefore, the urging direction of the urging means applied to the rack can be changed in a direction in which the meshing state with the pinion is stabilized.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a second pinion that is directly or indirectly connected to the pinion, and a second rack that is meshed with the second pinion, and the second rack is driven by the driving means. Thus, the second pinion is rotated, the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion accompanying the rotation of the second pinion, and the displacement member is displaced, and the second rack is a crank mechanism. The game machine E12 is driven by the driving means via

  Here, in the gaming machine E12, the linear motion of the second rack is transmitted to the second pinion and the pinion and converted into a rotational motion, and then the rotation is transmitted from the pinion to the rack and converted into a linear motion. By using, the stroke amount of linear motion is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, when a structure in which the second rack is driven by the driving means via the third pinion is adopted, the second rack has a tooth surface for the second pinion and a tooth surface for the third pinion. There is a problem that the longitudinal dimension of the second rack increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the second rack is driven by the driving means via the crank mechanism, so that the tooth surface for the third pinion can be dispensed with. Accordingly, the longitudinal dimension of the second rack can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E12, the crank mechanism has an eccentric pin that protrudes at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and is rotated by a driving force of a driving means, and is extended to the second rack and extended from the second rack. A gaming machine E13 comprising a rack groove through which an eccentric pin is slidably inserted.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E12, the rotating body is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is positioned in the rack groove of the second rack. Can be slid along (sliding displacement), and thereby the second rack can be moved linearly.

  The rack groove may be a concave groove provided in the second rack, or may be an opening (through hole) provided in the second rack. Moreover, it is preferable that the extending direction of the rack groove is set to a direction orthogonal to the linear motion direction of the second rack. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of components other than the linear movement direction of the second rack in the force component applied to the rack groove of the second rack from the eccentric pin of the rotating body, and to minimize the resistance, the second rack This is because it can be moved directly.

  In the gaming machine E12, a protruding pin protruding from a surface of the rack facing the one side member or the other side member, and a protruding pin of the rack extended from the one side member or the other side member are slidably inserted. The crank mechanism has an eccentric pin protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentric pin of the rotating body is rotatable. A shaft hole formed in the second rack, and the guide groove of the one side member or the other side member is displaced as the rotating body of the crank mechanism is rotated, A gaming machine E14, wherein the projecting pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove to displace the second rack along the tooth surface of the second pinion.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E12, the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole of the second rack, so that the driving force of the driving means When the rotating body is rotated by the rotation of the rotating body, the projecting pin of the second rack is slid along the guide groove extending to the one side member or the other side member with the rotation of the rotating body. Can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion. Therefore, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the engagement between the second rack and the second pinion can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Further, the second rack and the crank mechanism (rotating body) are connected by inserting an eccentric pin into the shaft hole in a rotatable manner. That is, if the second rack is formed with a shaft hole having a circular cross section. Since it is not necessary to extend a long hole-like groove for sliding (sliding displacement) the eccentric pin, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rigidity of the second rack.

  Note that the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion when the second tooth of the second pinion is changed to the arcuate tooth surface of the second pinion when viewed in the axial direction of the second pinion. This means an operation in which the second rack is rotated around the axis of the second pinion while maintaining the state of contact with each other (the state where the straight line of the rack tooth surface is the tangent of the arc of the pinion tooth surface).

  Further, the guide groove may be a concave groove formed in the one side member or the other side member, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the one side member or the other side member.

  Any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, further comprising a detecting means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the gaming machine E15 is provided with detection means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism. It is possible to detect reaching the other end side, that is, that the displacement member has reached the start end and the end.

  In this case, in the structure in which the detection means detects that the rack has reached one end and the other end of the linear motion range in order to detect that the displacement member has reached the start end and the terminal end, respectively, in the rack linear motion range. Since it is necessary to dispose the detection units (sensors) at one end and the other end, both of these positions are separated from each other, so that there is a problem that the wiring becomes long. In other words, the longer length not only increases the member cost, but also makes it difficult to route the wiring to avoid interference with other members, which reduces the degree of design freedom and is caught by the movable member. The risk of disconnection at the site increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the rotation position (phase) of the crank mechanism is detected by the detecting means, so that one end of the crank rotation range and the other Even if the detectors (sensors) are arranged at the ends, they can be arranged close to each other. Accordingly, since the wiring can be shortened, not only the member cost can be reduced, but also the degree of freedom in design and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed.

  Note that the crank mechanism includes a rotating body that has a crank pin that protrudes eccentrically from the center of rotation and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a recess through which the crank pin of the rotating body is slidably inserted. A structure having a crank groove recessed in the second rack as the groove is exemplified. In this case, the detection means detects the rotational position (phase) of the rotating body of the crank mechanism by the detection unit (sensor).

<About the concept of the invention taking the upper arm body 435 or the lower arm body 436 as an example>
An effect member, a displacement means for displacing the effect member between the retracted position and the effect position, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, the effect member in a predetermined posture at the effect position In the gaming machine formed to be displaceable, the displacing means includes a base member, and an arm body that is rotatably connected to the base member at one end side and the effect member is displaceably disposed at the other end side. Defining means for defining the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body, and the effect member is moved to the retracted position and the effect by rotating the arm body about the one end side with respect to the base member. A gaming machine F1 that is displaced between positions.

  Here, an effect member, a displacement means for displacing the effect member between the retracted position and the effect position, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, the displacement means comprising a parallel link mechanism. A gaming machine is known in which an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position (see, for example, JP 2012-28226 A).

  That is, the parallel link mechanism includes a first arm and a second arm which are parallel to each other and are equal in length and are interposed between the effect member and the base member, and the first arm and the second arm are parallel to each other. Is rotated with respect to the base member. Therefore, it is possible to displace the effect member while maintaining the posture of the effect member constant, and thus it is possible to arrange the effect member in a predetermined posture at the effect position.

  However, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, in the structure in which the displacement means uses the parallel link mechanism, interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs, so that the operating range of the effect member is narrow. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the displacing means includes a base member, an arm body in which one end side is rotatably connected to the base member, and an effect member is disposed to be displaceable on the other end side, Defining means for defining the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body, so that when the arm body is rotated with respect to the base member around the one end side, the posture of the effect member is defined by the defining means. Therefore, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture. In this case, since the arm body does not interfere, the operating range of the effect member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means includes a pair of the arm bodies, and one end sides of the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect member is the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. Each of the pair of arm bodies has a tooth formed at one end thereof, and the one end side is rotatably connected to the base member in a state where the teeth are engaged with each other. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the effect members respectively disposed on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies, and the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member at one end side and the effect member is disposed at the other end side to be displaceable. Then, when the pair of arm bodies are rotated with respect to the base member around the one end side, the effect members respectively disposed on the other end side of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the pair of arm bodies are formed with teeth on one end side thereof and the base member in a state where the teeth of each other are meshed. Since one end side is rotatably connected to this, rotation of a pair of arm bodies can be synchronized. Thereby, the production members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies can be brought into contact with each other with high precision at the production position. In addition, if one of the pair of arm bodies is rotated, the other is also driven and rotated, so that the pair of arm bodies (effect members) can be operated by one driving means.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that at the retracted position, the arm body is in a posture along a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, in the retracted position, the arm body is in a posture along the vertical direction, so that the weight of the effect member can be supported by the arm body, Therefore, the driving force of the driving means required for holding the effect member at the retracted position can be suppressed. In this way, it is impossible for the conventional product using the parallel link mechanism to position the arm body in the vertical direction at the retracted position (since the second arm interferes with the first arm), This was made possible for the first time by the present invention. Thereby, suppression of the energy consumption of a drive means can be aimed at.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means includes a slide body that is slidably disposed on the base member, and the effect member is slidably disposed on the slide body. As the arm body is rotated about its one end, the slide body is slid relative to the base member and the effect member is slid relative to the slide body. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that a posture of the effect member with respect to the body is defined.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means includes the slide body that is slidably disposed on the base member, and the effect member is slidably disposed on the slide body. And the arm body is rotated about its one end side so that the slide body can be slid with respect to the base member and the effect member can be slid with respect to the slide body. Can be defined. Thereby, an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position.

  In the gaming machine F4, the base member includes a guide shaft that extends along the direction of slide displacement of the slide body, and a pair of surfaces that extend in parallel to the guide shaft and face each other at a predetermined interval. The slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member so as to be slidable and the lower end side is loosely fitted between the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member. A gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, the resistance when the slide body is slid and displaced with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the arm body is rotated around its one end side to produce an effect member. The operation of displacing can be performed smoothly.

  For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are arranged on the base member and one end and the other end of the slide body are guided so as to be slidable on each of the pair of guide shafts, there are two sliding portions and friction resistance. Will increase. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since there can be one sliding portion, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance when the slide body is slid. Further, according to the gaming machine F4, since the slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member, even if the slide body vibrates and the lower end side of the slide body abuts against the opposing wall portion of the base member. The slide body can be self-corrected to a posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the slide body can be returned to a state in which the lower end side is loosely fitted between the pair of opposing walls of the base member. Therefore, also from this point, the frictional resistance when the slide body slides can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies whose one ends are rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect members can be displaced to the other ends of the pair of arm bodies, respectively. The defining means connects the effect members disposed on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies, and at least one of the connecting portions with the effect member is slidable. As the arm body is rotated about its one end side, the pair of effect members are displaced while at least one of the connection portions is slid and displaced as the arm body is rotated about its one end side. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body is defined.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means connects the presentation members respectively disposed on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies and Since at least one of the connecting portions includes a slide connecting member that is slidable, at least one of the connecting portions is slid while the arm body is rotated about its one end side. The pair of effect members can be displaced, and the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body can be defined. Thereby, an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position.

  Further, in the gaming machine F6, two sets (one pair) of an arm body and an effect member arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the effect members of each set are connected to the slide connecting member. Since the posture of the effect member relative to the arm body can be defined by connecting the slide body so as to be slidable by the defining means, for example, it is necessary to provide a suspension structure (slide body) as in the case of the gaming machine F4 or F5. Absent. That is, since the slide body can be omitted, the weight can be reduced. Therefore, even if the hanging structure is omitted, it is possible to suppress the play of the effect member only with the arm body.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, two sets of the arm body and the effect member disposed to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the sets are disposed facing each other. In addition, the effect members are separated from each other at a predetermined interval at the retracted position, and the effect member in which the arm body is rotated around one end side from the retracted position is disposed at the effect position. And the effect members abut each other's abutment surfaces, and a positioning projection protrudes from one of the abutment surfaces, and the other abutment surface Is formed with a positioning recess extending along the locus of the positioning projection when the arm body is rotated and receiving the positioning projection, and an engaging portion is formed on the positioning projection. In addition, in the positioning recess, the engaging portion Gaming machine F7, characterized in that if possible the engaged portion is formed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, each set is disposed facing each other, and in the retracted position, the production members of each set are separated from each other by a predetermined interval. And the arm body is rotated around one end thereof to displace each group of effect members in a direction close to each other, and the effect members abut the mutual contact surfaces of each group of effect members. Can be made.

  In this case, a positioning projection protrudes from one abutment surface among the abutment surfaces of the production members, and a positioning when the arm body is rotated is projected to the other abutment surface. Since the positioning concave portion that extends along the locus of the convex portion and receives the positioning convex portion is provided, the positioning convex portion and the positioning concave portion can be engaged with each other at the production position, and the production members can be positioned. . That is, since the production members of each set are close to each other along the locus of circular motion, in the concave shape and the convex shape having the same dimensions, the concave shape cannot be engaged with the concave shape. Since it extends along the locus of the positioning convex portion when the arm body is rotated, the positioning convex portion can be received (engaged) by the positioning concave portion.

  On the other hand, the positioning of the effect members by the engagement of the positioning recess and the positioning protrusion is limited to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning recess. That is, in order to allow the positioning concave portion to accept the positioning convex portion even in the locus of the circular motion of the effect member, the positioning concave portion is extended along the positioning convex portion trajectory. Thus, the positioning projection cannot be engaged. Therefore, the effect members cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and rattling occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the engaging portion is formed on the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed on the positioning concave portion. In the position, the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be engaged, and as a result, the effect members can be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and the occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. .

  Here, it is conceivable that the positioning members are positioned by omitting the positioning recesses and the positioning projections and providing only the engaging portion and the engaged portion. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion due to the play or wobbling of the effect member due to the elastic deformation or dimensional tolerance of the arm body. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F7, the positioning recess and the positioning protrusion are engaged first, and the effect members are positioned, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. The effects of the rattling and wobbling of the effect member described above can be suppressed, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be reliably engaged.

  In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a protruding direction by a spring, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion are The other is formed as a spherical recess that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which the ball is urged in the protruding direction by a spring, The other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spherical concave portion that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism, so that the ball can be retracted as the effect members move closer to each other. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation from when the positioning convex portion is received in the positioning concave portion until the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged with each other, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion. The engagement with the joint can be released smoothly along with the operation when the effect member is displaced to the retracted position.

  The engaging portion as the ball plunger mechanism is preferably provided in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion as the concave portion is preferably provided in the positioning concave portion. In this case, the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is pressed along the bottom surface of the positioning recess while the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is pressed against the bottom surface of the positioning recess and the ball is retracted, thereby achieving a smooth movement. This is because the engagement of the balls (engaged portions) and the recesses (engaged portions) can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is attracted by the magnetic force to the one magnet. A game machine F9, which is formed as a magnet or an iron member disposed in the direction of the magnetic pole.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is one magnet. Since it is formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic pole in the direction attracted by the magnetic force, after the positioning convex portions are received in the positioning concave portions, they can be attracted to each other by the magnetic force. Even when there is a displacement between the engaging portion and the engaged portion, both can be engaged (magnetically attached) with high accuracy. As a result, it is possible to accurately position the effect members at the effect position.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and the one side member and the other side member are installed between the one side member and the other side member. A displacement member that is guided and displaced at one end side and the other end side; and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member, and the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the displacement member. The gaming machine F17 is characterized in that the rotating body is rotated by a driving force transmitted from the effect member when the effect member is disposed at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine F17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, one end of the displacement member can be guided by one side member, and the other end of the displacement member can be guided by the other side member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced along the one side member and the other side member by the driving force of the driving means. Moreover, the rotary body arrange | positioned at the displacement member can be rotated with the drive force transmitted from the production member arrange | positioned in the production position.

  In this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is separately guided to the one side member and the other end side is separately guided to the other side member, a shift is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. It has been difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guide by the one-side member and the guide by the other-side member, not only will the load of the driving means be excessive, but the displacement member may be stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F17, since the rotating body is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the effect member arranged at the effect position, the driving means for rotating the rotating body is arranged on the displacement member. It can be omitted. Therefore, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be reduced, and the weight reduction can suppress a deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, thereby stabilizing the displacement member. And can be displaced. Further, the size of the rotating body can be increased as much as the weight can be reduced.

  In addition, in order to rotate the rotating body arrange | positioned at a displacement member, as a means to transmit a driving force from the effect member arrange | positioned in an effect position to a rotating body, the gear provided in the rotating body, and an effect member, for example The gears provided on the rotor are meshed with each other by arranging the effect member at the effect position, and the driving force is transmitted from the effect member to the rotor via the gears, and the rotor (rotor) ) And a stator (stator) on the effect member, and a driving force is transmitted between the rotor and the stator (so-called DC motor structure), or the direction of the magnetic pole on the rotating body A structure (so-called linear motor) in which magnets (fixed magnets) that are alternately changed are disposed along the circumferential direction, electromagnets are disposed on the production member, and driving force is transmitted between the electromagnets and the fixed magnets. ) Is an example That.

<Concept of Invention with Bias Spring 11366 as an Example>
A base member, a target member disposed displaceably on the base member, and one end connected directly or indirectly to the target member and the other end connected directly or indirectly to the base member. Biasing means, and a pair of the target members are disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the biasing means are disposed in a bent posture and of the pair of target members. A gaming machine G1 having one end connected directly or indirectly to one of the target members and the other end connected directly or indirectly to the other target member of the pair of target members.

  Here, the base member, a target member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and one end thereof is directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. And a biasing means to be connected, and a pair of target members are disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the pair of target members are each biased by different biasing means. For example, refer to JP2013-169262A). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing unit.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, each target member is urged by a separate urging means, so that the urging force applied to each target member is large due to individual differences of these separate urging means. There was a problem that variation occurred in the thickness.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when a pair of target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are disposed on one and the other of the pair of target members. Since each is connected, the urging | biasing force provided to a pair of object member can be equalize | homogenized. That is, when two urging means are provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in characteristics (such as dimensional tolerance) of the respective urging means. By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, variation in the urging force applied to each target member can be suppressed. As a result, variation in the displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

  In this case, a pair of target members may be disposed on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be disposed on different base members. It may be a form.

  In addition, the gaming machine G1 has one side member and another side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and is constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and is connected to the one side member and the other side member at one end side. It is particularly effective to apply to a gaming machine that includes a displacement member that is guided and displaced on the other end side, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to the configuration for guiding one end side of the displacement member and the configuration for guiding the other end side. In such a gaming machine, a shift is likely to occur between the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side of the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. By applying, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and variations in their displacement can be suppressed, so that the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement can be suppressed and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a connecting member connected to the base member, and one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means is The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained by contacting the connection member. A gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the intermediate portion of the urging means having one end and the other end connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so that the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained by pressing the member, the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, the work efficiency at the time of attaching these base members and connecting members to an attachment object can be improved by such temporary fixing. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example, ), And it is not necessary to prepare a fastening screw), and it is not necessary to perform fastening work. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the arm body 7641 and the roller receiving portion 7311e as an example>
One side member and other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member are respectively guided between the one side member and the other side member and are guided between the one side member and the other side member. A displacement member that is displaced; and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, the displacement member being rotatably disposed on the displacement member, and a rotational driving force applied to the rotation member. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a rotation driving means for providing a displacement restriction means for restricting a displacement of the displacement member.

  Here, a game that produces an effect of rotating a rotating body is known (see, for example, JP 2012-231926 A). In addition, the one side member and the other side member that are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, a long displacement member that is installed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force is applied to the displacement member. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a driving unit that performs such a function is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-14602). For example, in the case where the former rotating body is disposed on the latter displacement member, the position where an effect is produced by the rotation of the rotating body can be changed by the displacement of the displacement member.

  However, in this case, in the structure in which one end side of the displacement member is separately guided to the one side member and the other end side is separately guided to the other side member, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is likely to occur. For this reason, when the rotating body is rotated, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is easily amplified due to the rotation of the rotating body, and there is a problem in that the movable part is worn or damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the displacement restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member is provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when the rotating body is rotated. . Therefore, even if the rotating body is rotated, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed, and as a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed.

  In addition, even when other members are disposed near the rotating body at the production position, the rotating body can collide with other members by suppressing the rattling or wobbling of the displacement member by the displacement regulating means. Can be suppressed. In other words, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the rotating body while positioning the other member close to the rotating body.

  Four sets of arm members and effect members arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm members are arranged, and the effect members of each set come into contact with each other at the effect position. A form in which an annular shape is formed and the annular shape surrounds the rotating body (an annular shape is disposed around the rotating body) may be employed. According to the gaming machine H1, as described above, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed and the rotating body can be prevented from colliding with the effect member. That is, even in the form in which the annular shape (the production member) surrounds the rotating body, these collisions can be prevented, so that a state in which both are brought close together and the gap between the annular shape and the rotating body is smaller can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating only the rotator while allowing the player to recognize the circular shape and the rotator as one circle as a whole, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine H1 includes a movable mechanism formed to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, a movable mechanism that is deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is likely to occur as the movable mechanism is deformed. For this reason, when the rotating body is rotated, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is increased as compared with the case where the movable mechanism is not provided, and the movable part is likely to be worn or damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, the displacement of the displacement member can be regulated by the displacement regulating means, so that even when the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement member may be rattled or wobbled. This can suppress the wear and breakage of the movable part and the collision between the rotating body and the production member.

  In addition, it is impossible to perform an effect by bringing the effect member close to the rotating body that rotates as described above because it is necessary to avoid a collision with the rotating body, and in particular, when a movable mechanism is provided, Since the backlash and wobble of the displacement member become excessive, it is impossible to rotate the rotating body itself. On the other hand, by adopting a structure that restricts the displacement of the displacement member by the displacement restricting means as in the present invention, it becomes possible for the first time to rotate the rotating body even when a movable mechanism is provided. It is a thing.

  In the gaming machine H2, the movable mechanism is formed to include a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the displacement restricting means includes the guided portion of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine H3 that restricts at least displacement of the displacement member in a direction guided along the line.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the displacement regulating means at least regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the guided portion of the movable mechanism is guided along the guide groove. It is possible to efficiently regulate the factors that cause the rattling and wobbling of the member. Therefore, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member can be reliably suppressed while reducing the force required for the displacement regulating means.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformable members separated by the movable mechanism, and the displacement restricting means is formed so as to be insertable into the gap. A gaming machine H4, wherein the insert is inserted into the gap.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformable members separated by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the gap can be inserted into the gap. Since the displacement restricting means includes the insertion member to be inserted and the insert is inserted into the gap, the movable mechanism can be restrained so as not to be deformed (that is, the movable mechanism is fixed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when the rotating body is rotated, and it is possible to suppress the wear or breakage of the movable part and the collision between the rotating body and other members.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the game machine includes at least three sets of the arm body and an effect member disposed displaceably on the other end side of the arm body, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. And a rotation base formed concentrically with the rotating body, and the displacement restricting means is configured such that when the effect member is disposed at the effect position, the effect members or the displacement means of the respective groups are A gaming machine H5, wherein the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by being brought into contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of effects members arranged displaceably on the other end side of the arm body are provided, The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement member by causing each set of the production member or the displacement means to contact the outer periphery of the rotation base when the production member is disposed at the production position. The displacement can be regulated by contacting the outer periphery of the rotating base at a location. That is, since the outer periphery of the rotating base is held at a plurality of locations, displacement of the rotating base (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body, and a plurality of effect members The relative position of the rotating body with respect to can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the game machine includes at least three sets of the arm body and an effect member disposed displaceably on the other end side of the arm body, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. A rotating base formed concentrically with the rotating body, the magnet being disposed on one of the effect member or the displacement means and the rotating base, and the other being made of a magnet or iron. A member is disposed, and the displacement restricting means is configured such that when the effect member is disposed at the effect position, the magnetic force applied between the effect member or the displacement means of each set and the rotation base, A gaming machine H6 characterized by restricting displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the gaming machine H6 includes at least three pairs of effect members disposed so as to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body, The displacement restricting means restricts the displacement of the displacement member by the magnetic force applied between the effect member or the displacement means of each set and the rotation base when the effect member is disposed at the effect position. The displacement of the rotation base can be regulated by applying a magnetic force at the location. That is, since the magnetic force is applied to the rotating base from a plurality of directions, displacement of the rotating base (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body. The relative position of the rotator relative to the effect member can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  Note that in the gaming machines H5 and H6, the contact position where each group of presentation members or displacement means is in contact with the outer periphery of the rotating base or the position where the magnetic force is applied is equal in the circumferential direction (for example, in the case of three sets). Is preferably set at an interval of 120 °. In this case, there are four sets of arm members and effect members that are displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm members, and the effect members or the displacement means of each set are in contact with the outer periphery of the rotary base. It is preferable that the contact position or the position where the magnetic force is applied be set at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (that is, 90 ° intervals). The rotation base can be constrained from four sides by placing the contact positions or the positions where the magnetic force acts oppositely (arranged by 180 degrees in phase), so the displacement (rattle or wobble) can be controlled in any direction. If the relative position of the rotating body with respect to each group of production members is displaced, rotation with respect to the production members is caused by contact when the production members of each group are arranged at the production positions. This is because the relative position of the body can be corrected (positioned). When four groups of effect members form an annular shape at the effect position, centering can be performed in which the rotating body is positioned concentrically with respect to the annular shape, which is particularly effective.

  Further, when magnets are disposed on both the effect member or the displacement means and the rotation base, the magnetic poles of these magnets may be in a direction in which a magnetic force acts in a direction in which they are attracted to each other, or The direction in which the magnetic force acts in the direction of repelling each other may be used.

  In the gaming machine H5 or H6, when each group of effect members is disposed at the effect position, each effect member abuts an adjacent effect member with each other's abutment surface, and one abutment surface The magnet is disposed, and the other contact surface is disposed with a magnet or an iron member in the direction of the magnetic pole in the direction attracted by the magnetic force to the one magnet, The gaming machine H7, wherein when the effect member is disposed at the effect position, the contact surfaces of the effect member are magnetized.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5 or H6, when each group of production members is arranged at the production position, each production member touches the adjacent production members with each other. Since the contact surfaces are magnetized by using the magnetic force of the magnet, the effect members can be firmly coupled. As a result, when the displacement defining means (the production member or the displacement means) abuts on the rotation base or the magnetic force is applied to regulate the displacement of the rotation base, the displacement regulation means (the production member) itself may become unstable. It is possible to hold the rotating base firmly by suppressing rattling. As a result, the displacement of the rotating base member (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be reliably suppressed, and the relative position of the rotating body with respect to the plurality of effect members can be reliably positioned at a predetermined position.

<About the concept of the invention taking the second specific winning port 66a and the second variable winning device 66 as an example>
Displaced between a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a winning opening provided in the gaming board, an open position that allows winning to the winning opening, and a closed position that restricts winning to the winning opening A gaming machine comprising an opening / closing member that is provided on the front side of the opening / closing member and that overlaps at least a part of the opening / closing member in a front view.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a winning opening and an opening / closing member that is displaced between an open position that allows winning to the winning opening and a closing position that restricts winning to the winning opening (for example, JP, 2010-131375, A). However, in this gaming machine, it is possible to stop (stop) the ball launch in accordance with the timing at which the opening / closing member is displaced to the closed position. Therefore, there is a problem that the progress of the game is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the front member that is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing member and overlaps with at least a part of the opening / closing member in a front view is provided, It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing operation at the time of switching, and the player can be prevented from stopping. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  In the gaming machine I1, the front member is formed so as to be displaceable, and a displacement position of the front member is different between a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed and a state where the opening / closing operation is not performed. A gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, in a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed (for example, a special gaming state), the front and the displacement position is different from the state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is not performed. Since the member is displaced, even if the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is hidden by the front member and cannot be visually recognized, the gaming state (whether the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed or not is based on the displacement position of the front member). ) Can be determined by the player. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member, and it is possible to determine whether the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed (for example, a special gaming state) while suppressing the stoppage. Can be enjoyed.

  In the gaming machine I2, at least in a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed, the front member overlaps the entire displacement locus of the opening / closing member in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2, at least in a state in which the opening / closing member is opened / closed, the front member overlaps the entire displacement locus of the opening / closing member in front view, that is, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member. Is blocked by the front member and cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the player can be surely restrained from stopping, and as a result, it is easy to restrain the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the game machine includes a flow-down area partition member that partitions a flow-down area where the ball flows down and in which the opening / closing member is disposed in the flow-down area partitioned, the opening / closing member and the flow-down area A gaming machine I4, wherein at least a front side of the partition members is formed of a light transmissive resin material.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, at least the front side of the flow area dividing member is formed of a light transmissive resin material, so that the ball that flows down is given to the player. It can be visually recognized. In this case, since the opening / closing member is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the visibility of the player can be reduced by allowing the player to melt the opening / closing member into the flow area dividing member. Therefore, it is possible to surely suppress the player's stopping, and as a result, it is possible to easily prevent the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  In the gaming machine I4, the opening / closing member is made of a transparent resin material, and at least the front side of the flow area dividing member is made of a translucent resin material.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the opening / closing member is formed from a transparent resin material, and at least the front side of the flow-down region partition member is formed from a semi-transparent resin material. The visibility of the opening / closing member can be reduced while making the ball visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to surely suppress the player's stopping, and as a result, it is possible to easily prevent the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  Note that when the opening / closing member is formed of a transparent resin material and at least the front side of the flow area dividing member is formed of a translucent resin material, the latter light transmittance is lower than the former light transmittance. (That is, the relative relationship between the two) and is not intended to be specified by the absolute value of the light transmittance.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a flow-down area partition member is provided that partitions a flow-down area where a ball flows down and in which the opening and closing member is disposed in the partitioned flow-down area, An upper end portion that receives a ball that is located at the upper end and flows down the game area; and a retreat portion that is connected to the downstream side of the upper end portion and that is provided with the opening and closing member and is retracted to the back side from the upper end portion. A gaming machine I6 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I6, the flow area partition member is connected to the upper end portion that receives the ball that is positioned at the upper end and flows down the game area, and downstream from the upper end portion. The retractable part is provided with an opening / closing member, and the retracted part is positioned rearward from the upper end, so that a space can be secured between the retracted part and the glass unit. A front member can be arrange | positioned using space.

  Moreover, a step can be formed between the upper end portion and the retracted portion by retracting the retracted portion with respect to the upper end portion. Therefore, when a sphere is introduced into the flow-down region partition member, displacement can be imparted to the sphere by the step, and the flow-down speed can be reduced. Thereby, for example, in a state where the opening / closing member is disposed at the open position, it is possible to stably enter the winning opening.

  In the gaming machine I6, a gaming machine I7, wherein a plurality of ridges or grooves are arranged in parallel at the upper end.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, since a plurality of ridges or grooves are arranged in parallel at the upper end portion, when a plurality of balls flow into the flow area partition member, Before the sphere passes through the step, the flow direction of each sphere can be rectified in a predetermined direction by contact with the side surface of the ridge or groove. Therefore, even when a plurality of spheres are concentrated, it is possible to smoothly pass the steps and suppress clogging of the spheres.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, H1 to H7, I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine K1 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, H1 to H7, I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine K2 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, H1 to H7, I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine K3 that is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 66a 2nd specific prize opening (winning prize)
210 Back case (base member)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310 Displacement member 311a Projecting pin (guided part, part of movable mechanism)
311b Stopper surface (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
312 Rotating base 313 Rotating body (second displacement member)
314a oblong hole (guide groove, part of movable mechanism)
314b Stopper surface (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
314c Slider holding part (part of connecting part)
315c Slider holding part (part of connecting part)
315 First rack (rack)
320L One side member 320R, 10320R, 13320R Other side member 331, 10331, 15331, 16331 Back base (opposing member, base member, cover member)
331b Rack shaft (a part of guide means, a part of linear motion restricting means, a protruding portion, a second engaging portion)
331c First opening (opening)
331d Second opening (opening)
332, 10332 Intermediate base (base member, cover member)
341 Drive motor (drive means)
351 1st pinion (pinion)
363 Crank gear (part of the crank mechanism, rotating body)
363a Eccentric pin 364 Second rack (rack, target member)
364a Guide groove (part of guide means, guided portion)
364b Rack shaft (part of crank mechanism, guide groove)
365a Second pinion (pinion)
366, 11366 Energizing spring (urging means)
367 roller (rotating contact member, contact member)
367b Flange part (stop plate member)
370 Interposition member (joint member)
420 Back base (base member, cover member)
422a Upper rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
422b Lower rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
431 Drive motor (drive means)
433 Rack 433c Upper guide groove (opening, guided portion)
433d Lower guide groove (opening, guided portion)
435 Upper arm body (arm body)
436 Lower arm body (arm body)
440R1, 440R2 Ring segment (part of regulating means, third displacement member, effect member)
440L1, 440L2 Ring segment (part of regulating means, third displacement member, effect member)
450 Posture defining member (part of defining means, slide body)
460 Slide mechanism (part of base member)
462 Guide rod (guide shaft)
480 Cover body (cover member, base member)
491 Positioning convex part 491a Engaging concave part (engaging part or engaged part)
492 Positioning concave part 492a Engaging convex part (engaged part or engaging part)
662 Front cover (flow area partition member)
662c Outer edge (upper end)
662d Indentation part (retreat part)
663 Rotating body (opening / closing member)
664 Displacement member (front member)
860 Substrate member (flowing area partition member)
860c Outer edge (upper end)
860c1 Concavity and convexity (ridges, grooves)
860d hollow part (retreat part)
2610 Ball joint (part of movable mechanism)
2620 Biasing spring (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
3630, 5630 Rubber-like elastic body (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
7311e Roller receiving part (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
7641 Arm body (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
8641 Base (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
8642 insertion part (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
9652a-9652e Magnet (a part of biasing means)
9651 Metal rod (part of biasing means)
10331e Slit part (guide means)
10367 roller (rotating contact part, displacement contact member, contact member)
10367b First flange portion (stop plate member)
10367c 2nd flange part (stop plate member)
11661 roller (displacement contact member, contact member)
13671 Telescopic actuator (contact member driving means)
15331g 1st regulation part (a part of guide means)
15331h Second restriction part (part of guide means)
16681 Concave portion (part of linear motion regulating means, first engaging portion)
17493a Indentation part (engagement part or engaged part)
17495 Ball plunger mechanism 17495a Ball part (engaged part or engaged part)
18453 Holding part (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
1991 Magnet (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
1992 Metal plate (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
P Guide rod (bar-shaped body)
S Slider (part of connecting part)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known which includes a winning opening, an open position that allows winning to the winning opening, and an opening / closing member that is displaced between closed positions that restrict winning to the winning opening. (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-131375 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the progress of the game is hindered by stopping (stopping) the ball launch.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the progress of the game from being hindered.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side, a winning opening provided in the gaming board, and an open position that allows winning to the winning opening. And an opening / closing member that is displaced between closed positions that restrict winning to the winning opening , and is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing member and in front view with at least a part of the opening / closing member The opening / closing member and the front member are connected to different driving means, and are displaced by the driving of the driving means, and the front member moves between the first position and the second position. The front member, which is displaceable and displaced to the first position, overlaps with a part of the opening / closing member displaced to the open position in a front view, and the front member displaced to the second position is Said Overlap in whole and front view of a displaced release position the closing member.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective exploded view of the 2nd variable winning device. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of the 2nd variable prize-winning device in the state where a rotating body is arranged in a closed position, and (b) is the 2nd variable prize-winning device in a state where a rotating body is arranged in an open position. FIG. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the second variable winning device in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the reference position, and (b) is a second variable winning device in a state where the displacement member is arranged at the shielding position. FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus in the VI-VI line of FIG.5 (b). It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is the exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked at the exploded up-and-down slide unit from the front. It is the exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked back at the exploded up-and-down slide unit. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a rear view of a displacement member. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG.15 (b), (b) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XVIb-XVIb line of FIG.15 (b). is there. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the displacement member which looked at the disassembled displacement member in front. It is the disassembled back perspective view of the displacement member which looked at the disassembled displacement member from the back. It is the exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked at the exploded up-and-down slide unit from the front. It is the exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down slide unit which looked back at the exploded up-and-down slide unit. It is a front perspective view of a back base, an intermediate base, and a front base. It is a back perspective view of a back base, an intermediate base, and a front base. (A) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in the disassembled state, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear and the second rack in the disassembled state. (A) is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit in the state where a displacement member is arranged in an up position, and (b) is an up-and-down slide unit in a state in which a displacement member is arranged between an up position and a down position. It is a front view, (c) is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit in the state where a displacement member is arranged in a lowered position. FIG. 20 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. 19. FIG. 21 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVII in FIG. 20. FIG. 27 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base in a state where the transmission mechanism has changed from FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base in a state where the transmission mechanism has changed from FIG. 27. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of a second rack and a second pinion. (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical slide unit. It is the decomposition | disassembly back perspective view of the other side member which looked back at the other side member decomposed | disassembled. It is a front view of a ring formation unit. It is a rear view of a ring formation unit. It is a front view of an other side annular unit. It is a rear view of an other side annular unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the other side annular unit which looked at the exploded other side annular unit from the front. It is the decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of the other side annular unit which looked back at the other side annular unit disassembled. It is a front perspective view of a back base. (A) is a front view of the drive mechanism in a state in which the posture for arranging the annular divided body at the retracted position is formed, and (b) is formed by the posture for arranging the annular divided body at the annular forming position. It is a front view of the drive mechanism in the done state. It is a front perspective view of a posture regulation member. (A) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIIa in FIG. 33, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the direction of arrow XLIIb in FIG. (C) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular divided body taken along line XLIIc-XLIIc in FIG. 42 (a), and (d) is a portion of the annular divided body taken along line XLIId-XLIId in FIG. 42 (b). It is an expanded sectional view. (A) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the annular ring forming unit in a state where the annular divided body is disposed at the retracted position, and (a) and (b) are retracted the annular divided body. It is the front view and back view of a ring formation unit in the state arrange | positioned between a position and a ring formation position, (a) And (b) is the state by which the ring division body was arrange | positioned in the ring formation position It is the front view and rear view of an annular ring formation unit. (A) And (b) is the front view and back view of a ring formation unit in the state where the ring segment was arranged between the retreat position and the ring formation position. (A) And (b) is the front view and back view of a ring formation unit in the state where the ring division was arranged in the ring formation position. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a displacement member in a 2nd embodiment, (c) And (d) is a partial expansion of a displacement member in the state where relative displacement by a ball joint mechanism was formed. It is sectional drawing. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a displacement member in a 3rd embodiment, (c) And (d) is a partial expanded section of a displacement member in the state where a rubbery elastic body was elastically deformed. FIG. (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb line of (a). (A) is a rear view of the displacement member in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the displacement member in the XLIXb-XLIXb line | wire of Fig.49 (a), (c) is a figure. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the displacement member in the XLIXc-XLIXc line | wire of 49 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of the displacement member in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and back base in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the other side member in a 10th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of the other side member. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in a 12th embodiment. It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. (A) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member in 13th Embodiment, (b) And (c) is a back surface schematic diagram of the other side member which illustrates typically the aspect | mode of the attitude | position change of an urging | biasing spring. FIG. (A) is a rear view of the vertical slide unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and back base in 15th Embodiment. It is a front view of the transmission mechanism and back base in 16th Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a back base. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a diagram. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the annular ring body in the LXVIIc-LXVIIc line of 67 (a), (d) is the partially expanded sectional view of the annular ring body in the LXVIId-LXVIId line of FIG. 67 (b). It is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit and the ring formation unit in 18th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional rear view of an up-and-down slide unit and a ring formation unit. It is a front view of an up-and-down slide unit and a ring formation unit in a 19th embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 45, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when a projecting operation unit 400 or a composite operation unit 500, which will be described later, is operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the protruding operation unit 400 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 18A), the tip portion of the relative displacement member 450 can be visually recognized through the opening of the center frame 86. When arranged in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 19B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 8). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 8), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 8), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  A second variable winning device 66 is disposed above the variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 66 is provided with a second specific winning port 66a. In the present embodiment, when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is released for a predetermined time, and the ball becomes the specific winning opening while the specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the prize is entered into 65a, the rotating body 663 provided in the second variable winning device 66 rotates (opening / closing operation), and the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 causes the second specific winning opening 66a to be predetermined for a predetermined time. A special game state that is released a number of times is formed. Here, the detailed configuration of the second variable winning device 66 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 to FIG. 6.

  FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the second variable winning device 66. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 66. FIG. 4A shows a state in which the rotating body 663 is disposed at the closed position, and FIG. 4B shows that the rotating body 663 is in the open position. The arranged state is illustrated respectively. FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged front view of the second variable winning device 66. In FIG. 5A, the displacement member 664 is disposed at the reference position, and in FIG. 5B, the displacement member 664 is shielded. The state of being arranged at the positions is respectively illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the second variable winning device 66 includes a board member 860 that is connected to the right outer edge of the center frame 86, and a winning path cover 661 that is disposed on the front side of the board member 860. And a front cover 662, a rotating body 663 rotatably disposed between the front cover 662 and the substrate member 860, a displacement member 664 rotatably disposed on the front side of the front cover 662, and a rotation And a solenoid unit 665 for applying a driving force to the body 663 and the displacement member 664.

  Each of the winning path cover 661 and the front cover 662 is a plate-like member disposed at a predetermined interval from the front surface of the substrate member 860, and the back surface of both the covers 661 and 662 and the front surface of the substrate member 860. A sphere can flow down between the two. The winning path cover 661 is disposed in the left region in front of the substrate member 860, and the front cover 662 is disposed in the right region in front of the substrate member 860. Further, the front cover 662 is formed of a light transmissive resin material so that a player can visually recognize a ball flowing down the back surface.

  In the winning path cover 661, a passage forming wall 661a is erected from the back surface. The passage forming wall 661a is a wall portion for forming a spherical passage between the back surface of the winning path cover 661 and the front surface of the board member 860, and the side of the upper end of the passage forming wall 661a (the upper side in FIG. 4). On the right side, an opening 661b having a size through which a sphere can pass is formed. Further, the passage forming wall 661a is extended to a position where the lower end (the lower side in FIG. 4) exceeds the second specific winning port 66a (included in the passage).

  Accordingly, the ball that has entered from the opening 661b is guided along the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a and is awarded to the second specific winning opening 66a. Note that a winning at the second specific winning opening 66a is detected by a sensor device 861 disposed in the middle of the passage.

  A partition wall 662a is erected on the front cover 662 from the back surface. The partition wall 662a is a wall portion for partitioning the flow area of the sphere between the back surface of the front cover 662 and the front surface of the substrate member 860, and is formed on the right side of the passage forming wall 661a of the winning path cover 661 and the rotating body 663. The flow area of the sphere is defined. An opening 662b having a size through which a sphere can pass is formed below the partition wall 662a (the lower side in FIG. 4).

  Therefore, the sphere that has flowed into the second variable winning device 66 and did not enter the above-described opening 661b (the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a) flows down the flow-down region partitioned by the partition wall 662a, and the opening It passes through 662b and flows out to the second variable winning device 66.

  The rotating body 663 is a member for opening and closing the opening 661b of the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a, and is formed as a tapered long body whose width becomes narrower from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the other end. A shaft hole is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the rotating body 663, and the first shaft 665a of the solenoid unit 665 is fitted into the shaft hole. In the solenoid unit 665, a main controller 110 controls a solenoid (not shown) that drives the first shaft 665a.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the rotating body 663 is in a vertical posture along the opening 662b as shown in FIG. 4A, thereby closing the opening 662b and restricting the entry of the ball (blocking position). On the other hand, the first shaft 665a is rotated by driving the solenoid unit 665, and as shown in FIG. 4B, the opening 662b is opened by being inclined in a direction away from the opening 662b. Thus, the ball is placed at a position (open position) where the ball is allowed to enter.

  The displacement member 664 is a plate-like member disposed to face the front surface of the front cover 662 substantially in parallel. The second shaft 665b of the solenoid unit 665 is fitted into a shaft hole formed in the lower outer edge portion. Note that the front surface of the displacement member 664 is decorated with paint, plating, or the like, and the player can visually recognize (see through) the rotating body 663 located on the back side of the displacement member 664 via the displacement member 664. Impossible. In addition, the solenoid unit 665 is controlled by another control device in which a solenoid (not shown) that drives the second shaft 665 b is controlled by the main control device 110.

  In the initial state, the displacement member 664 is disposed in a posture (reference position) tilted toward the front cover 662 and covers the rotating body 663 disposed in the closed position as shown in FIG. Overlapping is invisible.) On the other hand, when the second specific winning opening 66a is in a special game state that is released a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, the second shaft 665b is rotated by driving the solenoid unit 665, so that the displacement member 664 is As shown in FIG. 5 (b), it is arranged in a posture (shielding position) tilted in a direction away from the winning path cover 661.

  The displacement member 664 arranged at the shielding position covers both the rotating body 663 arranged at the closed position and the rotating body 663 arranged at the open position (however, in FIG. 5B, the rotation member arranged at the open position). Only the body 663 is shown). That is, when the displacement member 664 is disposed at the shielding position, the displacement member 664 overlaps the entire movement locus of the rotating body 663 from the closed position to the open position in front view, and the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed by the player. It can be shielded invisible.

  Here, the opening / closing operation (for example, the present embodiment) of the bonus game is performed in a state where a ball can be won and a state where a prize cannot be won into a specific winning port (for example, the second specific winning port 66a in the present embodiment). Then, a gaming machine that is switched by the displacement of the rotating body 663 with respect to the opening 661b) has been conventionally known. However, in such a gaming machine, the player visually observes the opening / closing state of the accessory and matches the timing when it is closed. It was possible to stop the launch of the ball. As a result, the game temporarily stopped and hindered the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 664 is disposed on the forefront of the second variable prize-winning device 66, and the displacement member 664 is disposed at the shielding position. The rotating body 663 disposed in the open position can be covered with the displacement member 664 (overlapping in front view so as not to be visible). That is, when a special game state is formed in which the second specific winning opening 66a is released for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 can be shielded from being visible to the player. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the timing of the stop of the launch, and it is possible to prevent the game from being temporarily stopped by stopping the launch of the ball.

  In this case, the displacement member 664 changes its displacement position to the reference position or the shielding position depending on whether or not the rotating body 663 is opened and closed (that is, whether or not it is in a special gaming state). Even when it is shielded by the displacement member 664 and it is impossible to visually recognize whether the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed, the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed based on the displacement position of the displacement member 664 (that is, It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game is in a special gaming state. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663, and it is possible to suppress the hitting while recognizing whether the opening / closing operation of the rotating body 663 is performed (special game state). If possible, it is possible to secure an interest in gaming.

  In addition, when the displacement member 664 is not disposed, the rotating body 663 having a small outer shape is visually recognized, and the player has an impression that it is difficult for the ball to enter the opening 661b (it is difficult to win the second specific winning port 66a). As described above, as described above, in the special gaming state, the displacement member 664 having a larger outer shape than the rotating body 663 is disposed at the shielding position, and the ball flows into the back side of the displacement member 664, whereby the second specific prize is awarded. Since the winning to the mouth 66a is formed, compared with the case where the displacement member 664 is not provided, the player feels that many balls are winning and the expectation that the balls are likely to win. You can have it and improve your interest.

  That is, the rotating body 663 controlled by the main control device 110 is small in order to reduce the weight and improve the operation accuracy, so that in the conventional product, a special game state is formed, and the rotating body 663 is disposed in the open position. However, when the player is given an impression that it is difficult to enter the ball, the ball is inserted into the displacement member 664 having a large outer shape, so that it is possible to give the player an impression that the ball is easy to enter.

  In the present embodiment, the displacement member 664 is placed at the shielding position when the second specific winning opening 66a is in a special game state that is released a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, but in addition to this, the special game When not in a state (that is, when the rotating body 663 is disposed at the closed position and maintained at the closed position), the displacement member 664 may be disposed at the shielding position. Even when the rotating body 663 is in the closed position (that is, in a state where no winning is made to the second specific winning opening 66a), the displacement member 664 is disposed in the shielding position, so that the second variable winning device 66 is arranged. The player can have an interest in accordance with the prize for the inflow of the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the rotator 663 is a light transmissive resin material, and is formed from the same resin material as the front cover 662. Therefore, the visibility of the rotating body 663 can be reduced by melting the rotating body 663 into the front cover 662 for a player who sees through the rotating body 663 through the front cover 662.

  Therefore, for example, even when there is a deviation in the timing of displacement between the rotating body 663 and the displacement member 664, or when the back side (rotating body 663) of the displacement member 664 is looked into the player from an angle, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the rotating body 663. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the timing of stopping the launch, and it is possible to prevent the game from being temporarily stopped due to the stop of the launch of the ball.

  In this case, the rotating body 663 may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material that is colorless (transparent), while the front cover 662 may be formed from a light-transmitting resin material that is colored (translucent). This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the ball flowing down the back surface of the front cover 661, while allowing the rotating body 663 to be easily melted into the front cover 661, thereby further reducing the visibility of the rotating body 663. . As a result, it is difficult to grasp the timing of stopping the launch, and the game can be prevented from being temporarily stopped due to the stop of the launch of the ball.

  Here, the arrangement space of the displacement member 664 will be described. In this description, FIG. 6 is appropriately referred to in addition to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 66 taken along line VI-VI in FIG. FIG. 6 illustrates a state where the solenoid unit 665 is not viewed in cross section.

  The front cover 662 is formed with a recessed portion 662d that is recessed in a concave shape from the outer edge portion 662c (portions forming the upper and right outer edge portions of the front cover 662 in the front view) toward the back surface side. The winning path cover 661 is disposed so as to recede to the rear side until the front surface thereof is flush with the front surface of the recessed portion 662d of the front cover 662. Thereby, an arrangement space can be secured between the recessed portion 662d of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 and the glass unit 16, and the displacement member 664 is arranged to be displaceable (rotatable) using the arrangement space. can do.

  On the other hand, when the space for disposing the displacement member 664 is secured in front of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 in this way, the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 are retracted to the back side accordingly, and both covers 661 are removed. , 662 and the substrate member 860 become narrower, the space for the sphere to flow down cannot be secured.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the board member 860 has a concave shape from the outer edge portion 860c (parts forming the upper, lower, and right outer edge portions of the board member 860 in the front view) toward the back side. A recessed portion 860d is formed, and the recessed portion 860d is formed by the recessed portion 662d of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661 (specifically, the flow area divided by the partition wall 662a of the front cover 662 and the winning path cover 661). The region corresponding to the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a. Thereby, a space can be secured between the recessed portion 662d and the winning path cover 661 of the front cover 662 and the recessed portion 86c of the substrate member 860, and the sphere can flow down using the space.

  In particular, in this embodiment, the entire front cover 662 and the substrate member 860 are not retracted to the back side, but only a part thereof (recessed portions 662d, 860d) is partially retracted, as shown in FIG. In addition, a step formed by the outer edge portions 662c and 860c and the recessed portions 662d and 860d can be formed on the upper end side of the second variable winning device 66. Therefore, when the sphere flows into the second variable prize-winning device 66, it is possible to impart a displacement to the back side of the sphere due to the level difference, and to reduce the falling speed of the sphere. Thereby, in a state where the rotator 663 is disposed at the open position (see FIG. 4B), the ball that has flowed into the second variable winning device 66 and collided with the rotator 663 is stabilized to the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a. Can be entered.

  Here, an uneven portion 860c1 is formed on the front surface of a portion of the outer edge portion 860c of the substrate member 860 where the outer edge portion on the upper side of the substrate member 860 is formed in front view. The concavo-convex portion 860c1 is a portion formed in a sawtooth shape in cross section by alternately arranging peaks (projections) and valleys (concave grooves), and the extending direction of the projections and grooves is downward. As it goes toward (lower side in FIG. 4), the passage forming wall 661a is inclined toward the opening 661b side (left side in FIG. 4).

  Therefore, even when a plurality of balls flow into the second variable prize-winning device 66, each ball is brought into contact with the side surface of the ridge or groove in the concavo-convex portion 860c1 before the plurality of balls pass through the step. Can be rectified in the same direction. In particular, in this embodiment, since the extending direction of the ridges or grooves is inclined toward the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a, each sphere is rectified in the direction toward the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a. Can do. Thereby, even when a plurality of spheres enter the opening 661b of the passage forming wall 661a, the spheres can flow down along the passage formed by the passage forming wall 661a without clogging the spheres.

  Returning to FIG. Below the variable winning device 65, at the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate, an identification label or the like is provided, and is attached to the sticking space K1. The stamp or the like can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 66a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 7, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 7). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 210 formed in a box shape, and the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are sequentially overlapped in the internal space of the back case 210. In addition, the decorative cover 500 is covered on the forefront.

  The back case 210 includes a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and a box whose one surface side (the left front side in FIG. 10) is opened by each of the wall portions 211 and 212. It is formed in a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, and the back case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The vertical slide unit 300 includes a long displacement member 310 and a first side member 320L and a second side member 320R that are disposed at a predetermined interval and support the one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 in a guideable manner. And the interposition member 370 interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and the one side member 320L, the other side member 320R, and the interposition member 370 are included in the rear case 210. It is arrange | positioned at the bottom wall part 211, respectively. The displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) while maintaining a posture parallel to the interposed member 370.

  The annular forming unit 400 includes a one-side annular unit 410L and an other-side annular unit 410R, and these one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R include the one-side member 320L and the other of the vertical slide unit 300. Each of the side members 320R is disposed on the front (front) side. In each of the annular units 410L and 410R, a pair of upper and lower annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are disposed so as to be displaceable. The annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing the annular shape into four in the circumferential direction. When these annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are displaced to the center position, the respective divided surfaces come into contact with each other. Thus, an annular shape is formed (see FIG. 45).

  The decorative cover 500 is attached to the standing end surface of the outer wall 212 in the back case 210 and is disposed on the front (front) side of the ring forming unit 400. That is, the decorative cover 500 is partially covered only on the portion along the outer wall 212 of the back case 210, and shields the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 from the player, while opening 211a (that is, the first cover). The 3 symbol display device 81) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

  The detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 in the operation unit 200 configured as described above will be described below. First, a detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 32.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 300. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the back. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, in the vertical slide unit 300, the first rack 315 is arranged in a posture parallel to each other on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310. The rack 315 is meshed with each first pinion 351 disposed on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In addition, the displacement member 310 is slidably connected to the guide rod P on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, and in the assembled state, the guide rod P has the axial direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Arranged (fixed) to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R in a posture matched with the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, when the first pinion 351 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 341 and the first rack 315 is linearly moved by the rotation of the vertical slide unit 300, the displacement member 310 is guided along with the linear movement. While being guided by the rod P, it is displaced along the longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (see FIG. 25). Here, a detailed configuration of the displacement member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18.

  FIG. 15A is a front view of the displacement member 310, and FIG. 15B is a rear view of the displacement member 310. 16A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 310 taken along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 16B is a displacement member 310 taken along the line XVIb-XVIb in FIG. 15B. FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 310 when the exploded displacement member 310 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement member 310 when the exploded displacement member 310 is viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the displacement member 310 includes a main body portion 311 that is formed in a long rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a cylinder that projects toward the front at the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. -Shaped rotary base 312, a rotary body 313 having a circular shape in front view that is rotatably and concentrically supported by the rotary base 312, and an end side that is displaceably connected to one side and the other side of the main body 311 in the longitudinal direction. It mainly includes a portion 314 and a first rack 315 that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the end side portion 314.

  A pair of upper and lower projecting pins 311 a project from the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. The projecting pin 311a is a part for connecting the end side part 314 to the main body part 311 so as to be displaceable, is formed in a circular column shape with a circular cross section, and is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side part 314.

  The pair of upper and lower projecting pins 311 a are arranged along a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 15B) perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body 311, and the longitudinal direction of the projecting pins 311 a on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311. The protruding pins 311a on the other side are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (the left-right direction in FIG. 15B).

  Further, the main body 311 is provided with stopper surfaces 311b on end surfaces (on the left side and right side in FIG. 15A) on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The stopper surface 311b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311.

  A drive motor and a gear mechanism (both not shown) are disposed inside the rotation base 312, and the rotation driving force of the drive motor is transmitted to the rotation body 313 by the gear mechanism, whereby the rotation body 313 rotates. It is rotated relative to the base 312 (main body 311). The rotation base 312 is fixed to the main body 311. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation base 312 is held by another member, so that the displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be regulated (see, for example, FIG. 69).

  The end side portion 314 is formed with an elongated hole 314a, a stopper surface 314b, and a slider holding portion 314c. The elongated holes 314a are a pair of upper and lower through holes for receiving the projecting pins 311a of the main body 311 and are formed as oblong holes when viewed from the front. The oblong hole 314a has an oblong major axis direction orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 and the one side member 320L). And the direction connecting the other side member 320R (FIG. 15B, the left-right direction).

  In this case, between the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311 and the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314, a cylindrical tubular portion and a flange projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion. A color C composed of a part is interposed. In the collar C, the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the projecting pin 311 a of the main body portion 311, and the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion is equal to the shorter diameter of the long hole 314 a of the end side portion 314 or The outer diameter of the flange portion is set to be larger than the longer diameter of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 16).

  Thereby, as will be described later, the projecting pin 311a of the main body 311 is inserted into the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 via the collar C in the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a (FIG. 16 (a) left-right direction). It can be displaced along. That is, the main body 311 can be displaced relative to the end side 314 (see FIG. 31). In addition, since the collar C rolls between the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a by interposing the collar C in this way, relative displacement can be performed smoothly and wear can be suppressed. As a result, durability can be improved.

  The stopper surface 314b is a part for restricting the relative displacement between the main body part 311 and the end side part 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface and in an assembled state (the main body part 311 and the end side part 314b). In a state in which the portion 314 is connected), it is formed at a position facing the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 with a predetermined interval.

  The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 are provided in the case where each projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311 is located at the center in the major axis direction of each long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (that is, FIG. As shown in FIG. 15A, the main body 311 is opposed to the left and right end sides 314 in a parallel posture without being inclined, and faces each other in a parallel posture.

  Further, while maintaining this parallel posture, each projecting pin 311a (collar C) is terminated at one end in the major axis direction (left side in FIG. 15 (a)) or the other side in the major axis direction (FIG. 15 (a)). ) When the displacement is made to the right end), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b face each other at a predetermined interval on the one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 311 (between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). A gap is formed in the

  The first rack 315 is formed with a rack part 315a and a slider holding part 315c. The rack portion 315a is a portion that is formed as a rack that is cut into a side surface of a flat plate-like member and meshed with the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 13) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In the assembled state, the tooth surface is disposed in a posture parallel to the axis of the guide rod P.

  The slider holding part 315c is a part for holding the slider S between the slider holding part 314c of the end side part 314. The slider holding portion 314c of the end side portion 314 and the slider holding portion 314c of the first rack 315 are formed in a shape obtained by vertically dividing the cylinder into two parts, and are assembled (the first rack is fastened and fixed to the end side portion 314). The slider S is held between the opposing surfaces (between the inner peripheral surfaces of the cylinders).

  The slider S is a cylindrical member that is fitted around the guide rod P and slides along the axial direction of the guide rod P, and has an outer diameter that corresponds to the inner diameter of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. Is set. A pair of upper and lower locking walls protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surfaces of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. In the assembled state, the pair of upper and lower locking walls are on the end surface in the axial direction of the slider S. It abuts to prevent the slider S from coming off in the axial direction.

  As described above, the slider S is interposed between the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 and the guide rod P, so that the slider S is slidable with respect to the guide rod P made of brass. While it can be formed from a material having excellent wear resistance, the material of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be set independently of the guide rod P made of brass. That is, since the end side part 314 is a member that restricts the relative displacement of the main body part 311 by the stopper surface 314c, it is effective to select a material that can ensure rigidity at the time of restriction. On the other hand, since the first rack 315 is a member that meshes with the first pinion 351 and linearly moves by receiving the rotational driving force, it is effective to select a material that can ensure rigidity for maintaining the meshed state. It becomes.

  Returning to FIG. 11 to FIG. As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 by rotating the first pinions 351 disposed on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively. The first racks 315 provided are each linearly moved, whereby the displacement member 310 is slidably displaced in the vertical direction while being guided along the guide rods P fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Is done. Here, detailed configurations of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 when the exploded vertical slide unit 300 is viewed from the back. is there.

  Note that the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R have a slight difference in shape, but the portions that exhibit the technical functions are bilaterally symmetric (plane symmetric with respect to a virtual plane located at the center between the opposing sides. In the following description, the other side member 320R will be described as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the other side member 320 </ b> R includes a back surface base 331, an intermediate base 332 that covers the front surface (front surface) of the back surface base 331, and a front surface (front surface) of the intermediate base 332. A front base 333 covered on the side, a drive motor 341 attached to the intermediate base 332, a first pinion 351 rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 334, and a drive motor 334 to the first pinion 351 And a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force. Here, detailed configurations of the back base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  21 is a front perspective view of the back base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333. FIG. 22 is a rear perspective view of the back base 331, the intermediate base 332, and the front base 333.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the rear base 331 has a substantially L-shape in front view from a vertically long main body portion and an overhang portion projecting sideways from the lower end of the main body portion. A transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 19 and 20) that is formed and transmits the driving force of the drive motor 341 to the first pinion is accommodated between the intermediate base member 332.

  A pinion shaft 331a and a rack shaft 331b project from the front surface of the main body portion (surface facing the intermediate base 332), and the first opening 331c and the second opening are formed in the main body portion and the projecting portion. Openings 331d are formed.

  The pinion shaft 331a is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 23), and the rack shaft 331b is a guide groove 364a (see FIG. 23) of the second rack 364. This is a shaft-like body having a circular cross section for being inserted into the second rack 364 and for regulating the posture of the second rack 364. A screw is fastened to the end surface of the pinion shaft 331a, and the head of the screw is used to prevent the first pinion 351 from coming off. The diameter of the rack shaft 331b is set to a dimension that is the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364, and the second rack 364 is rotatable about the rack shaft 331b.

  The rack shaft 331b is disposed at a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332. Specifically, the arrangement position of the rack shaft 331b is set such that the direction connecting the axis of the rack shaft 331b and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364. . Thereby, as will be described later, the second rack 364 in which the guide groove 364a is guided by the rack shaft 331b can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a supported by the gear shaft 332i ( (See FIG. 30).

  Each of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d is an opening that extends linearly, and is an area corresponding to an urging spring 366 (see FIG. 26) disposed in a bent posture (biasing in front view). A region overlapping the spring 366). Therefore, when the urging spring 366 is mounted, the urging spring 366 is accommodated between the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and then the urging spring 366 is interposed via the first opening 331c or the second opening 331d. Since the end portion can be engaged with the mating member, mounting in a bent posture can be performed while suppressing the urging spring 366 from being bounced (jumping by its own elastic recovery force). The mounting operation of the urging spring 366 will be described later (see FIG. 32).

  The urging spring 366 is a coil spring, and the outer peripheral surface is curved in an arc shape. Therefore, the opening width of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d should be smaller than the diameter of the urging spring 366. Is preferred. This is because the lowering of the rigidity of the back surface base 331 can be suppressed while the end portion can be locked and the sliding resistance can be suppressed.

  The intermediate base 332 is formed in a shape corresponding to the back surface base 331. That is, the intermediate base 332 is formed in a substantially L shape in front view from a main body portion that is formed in a vertically long shape and a protruding portion that protrudes laterally from the lower end of the main body portion. By covering the front (front) side, the transmission mechanism is accommodated in a space formed between the opposing surfaces.

  The intermediate base 332 has a first pinion insertion window 332a and a motor shaft insertion window 332b formed in the main body portion thereof, and a plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i from the back surface of the main body portion (surface facing the back surface base 331). The roller shaft 332r is projected. The first pinion insertion window 332a is an opening for exposing the first pinion 351 pivotally supported by the pinion shaft 331a of the back surface base 331 to the front (front surface) side of the intermediate base 332, whereby the first pinion 351 can be meshed with the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 (see FIG. 25).

  The motor shaft insertion window 332b connects the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 attached to the front surface (front surface) of the intermediate base 332 to the gear 361 of the transmission mechanism housed between the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other. It is an opening for. The plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism. Screws are fastened to the end surfaces of the gear shafts 332c to 332i, and the heads of the screws are used to prevent the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363, and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism from coming off.

  The roller shaft 332r is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the roller 367 (see FIG. 23) of the transmission mechanism. The roller 367 supported by the roller shaft 332r is held by the opposing surfaces of the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 (the opposing surface is prevented from coming off).

  The intermediate base 332 is provided with a pair of left and right restricting walls 332t on the back surface of the main body portion (surface facing the back surface base 331) and on the front surface of the main body portion (surface facing the front base 333). A pair of upper and lower holding recesses 332j and 332k are formed, and a connecting shaft 332m projects from the front surface of the overhanging portion (the surface facing the front base 333).

  The restriction walls 332t are parts for restricting the posture of the second rack 364, and a pair is formed with a predetermined interval. The interval between the pair of regulating walls 332t is larger than the width of the second rack 364, and is formed so as to have a gap between the side surfaces of the second rack 364. Therefore, the second rack 364 can be rotated about the rack shaft 331b by the gap (see FIG. 30).

  The holding recesses 332j and 332k are portions for holding the upper end side and the lower end side of the guide rod P, respectively, and are separated in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 21) by a distance equivalent to the length dimension of the guide rod P. In addition to being positioned, the front base 333 side is formed as an open recess. The depth and width of the recess are set to dimensions that are equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the guide rod P. Therefore, by inserting the guide rod P into the holding recesses 332j and 332k and covering (fastening and fixing) the front base 333 to the intermediate base 332, the guide rod is provided between the back surface of the front base 333 and the holding recesses 332j and 332k. P can be pinched and the guide rod P can be held firmly.

  Thereby, while assembling the other side member 320R in a state excluding the front base 333, the guide rod P is held by the displacement member 310, and the guide rod P held by the displacement member 310 is fitted into the holding recesses 332j and 332k, By attaching (fastening and fixing) the front base 333, the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310 can be connected. Therefore, the assembly work of the vertical slide unit 300 can be made efficient.

  The connecting shaft 332m is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that becomes a connecting portion with the interposed member 370, and is rotatably inserted into the connecting hole in the connecting plate 371 of the interposed member 370, so that the other side member 320R is inserted. The interposed member 370 is connected. That is, the other side member 320R and the interposed member 370 are connected in a state where the relative position can be adjusted. Thus, as will be described later, when the vertical slide unit 300 is attached to the rear case 210, the attachment work can be performed while adjusting the attachment position, and therefore the workability can be improved.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the transmission mechanism and the first pinion 351 will be described with reference to FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the front, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the transmission mechanism when the transmission mechanism in the assembled state is viewed from the back.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B, the transmission mechanism includes a gear 361 connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 341, and a leading gear (gear 362a) meshed with the gear 361. Gears 362a to 362e as a gear train, a crank gear 363 meshed with a rear gear 362e of the gear train, a second rack 364 driven by a crank mechanism of the crank gear 363, and a second rack 364 The transmission gear 365 meshed with the second rack 364, the biasing spring 366 for applying a biasing force to the second rack 364, and the roller 367 for bending the biasing spring 366. .

  Here, detailed configurations of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the crank gear 363 has an eccentric pin 363a protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and a side on which the eccentric pin 363a protrudes. Detected portion 363b is projected from the opposite side. The eccentric pin 363a is formed in a cylindrical shape having a circular cross section, and is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 in the assembled state. The detected portion 363b is a part detected by a sensor device (not shown), and the sensor device detects the rotational position (phase) of the crank gear 363 in accordance with detection / non-detection of the detected portion 363b by the detecting portion. ) Is detected. Based on the detection result, the main controller 110 can recognize that the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position (see FIG. 25A) or the lowered position (see FIG. 25C).

  In the second rack 364, a guide groove 364a and a rack groove 364b are formed. The guide groove 364a is an opening through which the rack shaft 331b (see FIG. 21) of the back base 331 is inserted, and is straight in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack (FIG. 24 (a) and FIG. 24 (b) vertical direction). It is extended in the shape.

  The rack groove 364b is a concave groove through which the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack. The groove width of the rack groove 364b is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a, and the eccentric pin 363a can slide along the rack groove 364b as the crank gear 363 rotates. .

  Since the rack groove 364b extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack (that is, a direction orthogonal to the linear motion direction of the second rack 364), the eccentric pin of the crank gear 363 is described later. It is possible to suppress the generation of components other than the linear movement direction of the second rack 364 in the force component applied to the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 from the 363a, and accordingly, the resistance when the second rack 364 is linearly moved. Can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 23A and FIG. The transmission gear 365 includes a second pinion 365a meshed with the rack of the second rack 364, and a speed increasing portion 365b meshed with the first pinion 351, and the second pinion 365a and the speed increasing portion 365b are It is formed integrally in a concentric state.

  The biasing spring 366 is a metal coil spring, and one end is locked to the lower end of the second rack 364 and the other end is locked to the end portion of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. The biasing spring 366 is elastically deformed in a state where the second rack 364 is positioned at the lower end of the movable range, and applies the elastic recovery force to the second rack 364 as a biasing force. When the two racks 364 are displaced from the lower end to the upper end of the movable range, the biasing force applied to the second rack is gradually increased by further tensile deformation accompanying the displacement, and the second rack 364 is movable. When the upper end of the range is reached, the most deformed state is reached, and the maximum urging force is applied to the second rack 364.

  As will be described later, the biasing spring 366 applies a biasing force to the second rack 364 in a direction (inclination direction) that is non-parallel to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364 (see FIGS. 26 to 29). ) By forming the urging spring 366 from a coil spring, the structure in which the direction in which the urging force is applied is not parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 can be simplified. In addition, since the urging force according to the displacement of the second rack 364 can be continuously applied, the second rack 364 can be urged stably.

  The roller 367 has a cylindrical cylindrical portion 367a that is rotatably supported on a roller shaft 332r (see FIG. 22) of the intermediate base 332, and projects outwardly in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a. A flange portion 367b is provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a is brought into contact with one end and the other end of the bias spring 366, thereby forming a bent posture of the bias spring 366.

  Returning to FIG. 11 to FIG. The interposition member 370 is formed in an elongated shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R as described above. More specifically, a pair of flat plate-like connecting plates 671 are suspended from the lower surface (the lower side surface in FIG. 11) of the interposed member 370, and each connecting plate 671 has one circular connecting hole in front view. By inserting the connecting shaft 332m formed so as to penetrate from the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 671, the interposed member 370 is interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Established.

  A screw is fastened to the end surface of the connecting shaft 332m, and the head of the screw is used to prevent the connecting plate 671 from coming off. In this case, the inner diameter of the connecting hole in the connecting plate 671 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 332m, and the thickness of the connecting plate 671 is a dimension that is slightly smaller than the protruding height of the connecting shaft 332m. Set to Therefore, the connecting portion between the interposed member 370, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R is in a state in which the connecting plate 671 is rotatably supported by the connecting shaft 332m.

  As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is formed such that the displacement member 310 is displaceable along the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. That is, the displacement member 310 is formed such that one side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 11) and the other side (right side in FIG. 11) can be guided to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively, and the driving force of the drive motor 341 is generated. By being applied, it is displaced along the longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

  Conventionally, in such a unit (that is, a structure in which the displacement member 310 is installed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R), the rigidity of the entire unit is low, and it is easy to cause damage. That is, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R are easily deformed with respect to the displacement member 310 (for example, the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R that should be parallel to each other in the front view are The shape of the first member 320L and the second member 320R, which should be parallel to each other in a side view, are deformed into a “V shape”. The load concentrates on the connecting portion between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310 and is easily damaged. Therefore, for example, in the transporting process of transporting such a unit or the mounting process of attaching the unit to the counterpart member, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are in a “C” shape or “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, it is necessary to handle it so as not to be deformed, resulting in deterioration of workability.

  On the other hand, according to the vertical slide unit 300 in the present embodiment, since the interposition member 320 interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is provided, the entire unit is made into a frame shape, and its rigidity is increased. Improvements can be made. That is, it is possible to suppress the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R from being deformed into a “C” shape or a “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, the handling in the unit state can be facilitated, and the workability in the transport process and the mounting process can be improved.

  A brass guide rod P is fixed to each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both end portions of the displacement member 310 (the first rack 315 and the slider holding portion of the end side portion 314) are fixed to the guide rod P. 314c) is connected, the displacement member 310 can be connected to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R via the guide rod P, whereby the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L and the other side member can be connected. A closed connection loop between 320R and the interposed member 370 can be formed.

  In other words, in the conventional product (that is, a form that does not have the guide rod P with respect to the present embodiment), between the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 and the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. The connection loop is divided, and the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R are disconnected. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R can be connected via the guide rod P (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire vertical slide unit 300 can be increased. Further, the guide rod P is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and accordingly, the rigidity of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is improved. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole.

  The displacement member 310 is connected to the main body 311 and the end side portion 314 (and the first rack 315) so as to be relatively displaceable, so that the guide by the one side member 320L and the guide by the other side member 320R are described later. (Ie, the degree of linear motion of the first rack 315 driven by the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the first pinion 351 of the first pinion 320R of the other side member 320R). Even when a deviation occurs between the first rack 315 and the progress of the linear motion, the displacement is absorbed by the relative displacement and the displacement member 310 is stably displaced (see FIG. 31). ).

  In this case, according to the present embodiment, the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are connected to the guide rod P via the slider S (that is, in a form surrounding the guide rod P). Since the displacement is restricted in any of the directions perpendicular to the axis (the radial direction), the posture of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 when the displacement member 310 is slidably displaced can be stabilized. As a result, when a displacement occurs between the guide by the one-side member 320L of the displacement member 310 and the guide by the other-side member 320R, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 occurs. And the function of absorbing deviation due to such relative displacement can be surely exhibited.

  Here, as described above, the insertion member 370 is inserted into the connection hole of the connection plate 371 in a state where the connection shaft 332m is rotatable, so that each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is inserted. They are connected in a state where displacement (relative rotation) is possible. Therefore, since the relative positions of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the interposed member 370 can be adjusted, it is possible to improve workability when the vertical slide unit 300 is attached to the rear case 210. For example, after attaching the one side member 320L to a predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, even when the other side member 320R is displaced with respect to the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210, The position of the other side member 320R can be adjusted with respect to the predetermined position, and as a result, workability can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311, the end side portion 314, and the first rack 315 are formed so as to be relatively displaceable. Since the elongated hole 314a is used, the configuration in which the interposition member 370, the one side member 320L, and the other side member 320R are relatively rotatable can ensure the rigidity of the entire vertical slide unit 300. This is particularly effective in ensuring compatibility with the function that allows the mounting position to be adjusted.

  Next, the operation of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 31. In addition, as above-mentioned, below, the other side member 320R is demonstrated as a representative example, and description about the one side member 320L is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state in which the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position, and FIG. 25B is a diagram in which the displacement member 310 is disposed between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 25C is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position. 25A to 25C show a state in which the front base 333 is removed in order to make the first pinion 351 and the first rack 315 visible.

  26 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. 19, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 in the direction of arrow XXVII in FIG. FIG. 28 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 26, and FIG. 29 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. is there.

  26 and 27 correspond to the state in which the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 25A is arranged at the raised position, and FIGS. 28 and 29 show that the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 25C is lowered. Corresponds to the state placed at the position. 26 and 28, the first pinion 351 is not shown. Further, a state where the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state where the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated) is illustrated. However, the application of hatching to the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a), 26 and 27, in the state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is at the lowest position within the movable range (see FIGS. 26 and 27). 27) and the biasing spring 366 is in the most contracted state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 26) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is caused by the gear train (gears 362a to 362e). And the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG.

  When the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 26, the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is slid along the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is moved. The second pinion 365a is displaced (raised) upward (upward in FIG. 26), and the second pinion 365a is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. That is, the transmission gear 365 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 365 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the speed increasing portion 365b, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 27)).

  The clockwise rotation (clockwise) in FIG. 27 of the first pinion 351 is the counterclockwise rotation (counterclockwise) in FIG. 25 (a) in the other side member 320R. a) Due to the counterclockwise rotation (counterclockwise), the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 is displaced (lowered) downward (downward in FIG. 25A). As a result, the displacement member 310 is lowered as shown in FIG. 25 (b), and then the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. 25 (c).

  In the state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 25 (c), as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is located at the top of the movable range (FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, and the biasing spring 366 is in the most extended state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 28) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is performed as described above via the transmission mechanism. Is transmitted to the first pinion 351 by the reverse action, and the first pinion 351 is rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 27). As a result, the displacement member 310 is raised as shown in FIG. 25B, and then the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position shown in FIG.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 364 is transmitted to the transmission gear 365 and the first pinion 351 and converted into rotational motion, and then the rotational motion is transmitted from the first pinion 351 to the first rack 315. Then, the stroke amount of the displacement member 310 (first rack 315) is ensured by adopting a two-stage rack structure that converts to linear motion. In such a two-stage rack structure, when a third pinion that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 341 is adopted as a configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364, a tooth surface for the second pinion 365a is provided on the second rack 364. It is necessary to secure each tooth surface for the third pinion, and accordingly, the size of the second rack 364 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26) is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the second rack 364 is linearly moved is formed not by the third pinion but by the crank mechanism (the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 and the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the tooth surface for the third pinion on the second rack 364, and accordingly, the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  In this case, the rack groove 364b extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the second rack 364 (that is, a direction orthogonal to the linear movement direction of the second rack 364, the left-right direction in FIG. 26). When the crank gear 363 is rotated and the eccentric pin 363a slides in the rack groove 364b, a component other than the linear movement direction of the second rack 364 is generated in the force component applied to the rack groove 364b from the eccentric pin 363a. And the resistance can be reduced accordingly. As a result, energy consumption required for linear motion of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  As described above, the detection that the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position shown in FIG. 25A or the lowered position shown in FIG. 25C is detected by the sensor device of the detected portion 363b of the crank gear 363. It is done by doing. In this case, for example, sensor devices are arranged at the start and end of the movable range of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, respectively, and the displacement member 310 is arranged at the ascending position or the descending position depending on the detection result of each sensor device. In the structure for detecting this, it is necessary to dispose the sensor devices at positions such as the start end and the end in the linear motion of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, and the wiring becomes longer by that amount. If the wiring becomes longer, not only will the material cost increase, but it will also be necessary to route the wiring in a state avoiding interference with other members, and the degree of freedom in design will deteriorate, and the operation of other members will be involved. This increases the risk of disconnection. Particularly, in the structure in which the transmission mechanism is accommodated between the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members (transmission mechanism). .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the crank gear 363 is provided with the detected portion 363b, and the rotational position (phase) of the detected portion 363 is detected by the sensor device, so that the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position. Therefore, the sensor devices can be arranged close to each other. Therefore, the wiring can be shortened, so that not only the material cost can be reduced, but also the degree of freedom in design and the suppression of disconnection can be achieved.

  Here, in the structure in which the displacement member 310 is raised and lowered, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member 310, a larger driving force is required when the displacement member 310 is raised than when it is lowered. In this case, in this embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 25C, the urging spring 366 is in the most extended state, as shown in FIGS. Therefore, when the displacement member 310 is raised to the raised position, the urging force of the urging spring 366 raises the displacement member 310 (that is, the second rack 364 is displaced downward (lower side in FIGS. 28 and 29)). It can be used as power for That is, the driving force of the driving motor 341 can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366.

  However, in the structure in which the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as described above, transmission of the driving force between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a tends to become unstable. That is, the guide mechanism that guides the linear motion of the second rack 364 is provided with a predetermined tolerance, and a gap exists between the guide mechanism and the second rack 364 corresponding to the tolerance, and the second The rack 364 has rattling. Therefore, when the second rack 364 is linearly moved, it cannot be completely displaced on the straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 is violated by the above-described tolerance (gap) (closer to and away from the second pinion 365a). (Shaking in the direction to do) occurs. For this reason, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In this case, in the structure applied to the second rack 364 from the urging spring 366, when the direction of the urging force coincides with the direction of the rectilinear movement of the second rack 364, The urging force acts as a force that promotes the posture of the second rack 364.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is relative to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364. Since the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (tilted), the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as a force in a direction of pressing the second rack 364 toward one side of the guide mechanism that guides the second rack 364. Can act. As a result, it is difficult to rattle the second rack 364, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the posture fluctuation.

  Further, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined) with respect to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364. Even if the posture violence occurs once, the urging force of the urging spring 366 can be applied to the second rack 364 as a force in a direction to converge the posture violence. Therefore, the meshing (meshing) of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be stabilized, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In the present embodiment, the direction in which the urging force of the urging spring 366 is applied is inclined in a direction in which the lower end side of the second rack 364 is urged toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (for example, the left side in FIG. 26). . That is, since the direction in which the biasing force is applied is a direction in which a force component that causes the tooth surface of the second rack 364 to approach the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a is generated, a gap between these tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when the driving force is transmitted from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and the responsiveness can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the tooth surface from being accelerated or damaged by the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after transmitting the driving force from the stopped state (initial stage of meshing). Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing (meshing) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained.

  Here, as described above, in the structure in which the driving force of the drive motor 341 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366, it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the biasing spring 366. For this reason, it has been difficult to set the length of the biasing spring 366 to a length that enables a desired biasing force to be exhibited. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29, the biasing spring 366 is disposed in a bent posture, so that the length of the biasing spring 366 is ensured while avoiding interference of other members. be able to.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, as described above, the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are formed in a substantially L shape in front view from the main body portion and the overhang portion protruding from the main body portion, thereby extending the overhang portion. Is used as an arrangement space for the urging spring 366, so that the urging spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the rigidity of the structure including the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is increased. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized. Furthermore, since the overhanging portion projects inward from the lower end side of the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the dead space formed below the interposed member 370 is effective as an arrangement space for the overhanging portion. Available to: Further, by forming the connecting shaft 332m on the front surface of the overhanging portion (intermediate base 332), the connecting work with the interposed member 370 can be facilitated, workability can be improved, and the interposed member can be improved. The effect of improving the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole due to the interposition of 370 can be enhanced.

  Next, the meshing (meshing) state of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30A to FIG. 30C are partially enlarged front views of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and correspond to FIG. 30B, the state in which the second rack 364 is rotated clockwise around the rack shaft 331b with respect to the state of FIG. 30A is the same as that of FIG. 30C. ), The second rack 364 is rotated counterclockwise about the rack shaft 331b. FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state where the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated). However, the application of hatching to the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

  As described above, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, the second rack 364 cannot be displaced completely on a straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 is violated by the tolerance (gap) of the guide mechanism. A rattling in the direction of approaching and separating from the two-pinion 365a (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A) occurs. For this reason, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rack shaft 331b of the back surface base 331 is disposed to face the second pinion 365a, and the rack shaft 331b can rotate and slide in the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364. Is inserted. Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second pinion 365a can be rotated about the rack shaft 331b, and the tooth surface of the second rack 364 can be rotated. It can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a.

  That is, when the posture of the second rack 364 is violated, the violence is not rattling in the direction of approaching and separating from the second pinion 365a (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A), but the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. (The rotation around the rack shaft 331b) can be restricted. Thereby, it is easy to maintain the meshing (meshing) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In this case, the guide groove 364a is formed in the plate surface of the second rack 364, and the rack shaft 331b is formed in a region facing the second rack 364 of the rear base 331. Therefore, the guide groove 364a and the rack shaft are formed. 331b can be arranged on the locus in the linear motion of the second rack 364. That is, it is not necessary to form a portion (guide groove 364a, rack shaft 331b) for allowing the second rack 364 to be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a outside the outer shape of the second rack 364. Since the second rack 364 can be disposed in a dead space in which no other member can be disposed because it is a space for movement of the second rack 364, space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

  Next, the operation of the movable mechanism of the displacement member 310 (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31A to FIG. 31C are partial enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit 300. In FIG. 31A, the slide displacement progresses coincide with each other at the left and right end side portions 314. In FIG. 31B, the slide displacement progresses at the left and right end side portions 314 are shifted. FIG. 31 (c) shows the state in which the stopper function is exerted by the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b because the deviation of the progress of the slide displacement exceeds a predetermined amount.

  As described above, when the driving motor 341 is rotationally driven in the other side member 320R, the driving force of the driving motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 26 to 29), The first pinion 351 is rotated. The first pinion 351 in the other side member 320R is engaged with the first rack 315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 (the right side in FIG. 25), and the first rack 315 is used for the rotation of the first pinion 351. Accompanied by linear motion (up or down). At the same time, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven in the one side member 320L, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism, and the first pinion 351 is rotated. A first rack 315 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is engaged with the first pinion 351 in the one side member 320L, and the first rack 315 moves linearly (ascends) as the first pinion 351 rotates. Or descend). As a result, the displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) (see FIG. 25).

  However, in such a structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is separately guided and driven by the one side member 320L and the other side in the longitudinal direction by the other side member 320R, respectively, guidance and driving by the one side member 320 are performed. In addition, a deviation is likely to occur between the guidance and driving by the other side member 320R. Therefore, it is difficult to displace the displacement member 310 stably. If a large deviation occurs between the guide and drive by the one side member 320 and the guide and drive by the other side member 320R, not only will the load of each drive motor 341 be excessive, but also the displacement member 310 may be stopped. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protruding pin 311a of the main body 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side 314 (see FIG. 16), so that the end side 314 and the second One rack 315 is formed to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is raised, the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L differs from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (for example, one side and the other side). Even if there is a difference in the sliding resistance of the slider S of FIG. 31 or when a variation in driving force occurs in the driving motor 341 on one side and the other side, as shown in FIG. The linear motion of the first rack 315 guided and driven (left side of FIG. 31B) precedes the linear motion of the first rack 315 guided and driven by the other side member 320R (right side of FIG. 31B). (Positioned upward in FIG. 31 (b)).

  That is, when a deviation occurs between the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L and the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R, the deviation is caused by the displacement member 310 as shown in FIG. It can be absorbed by a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be displaced relative to the main body portion 311). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the elongated hole 314a constituting the movable mechanism has a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310). Thus, a long slot shape is formed in the direction connecting the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (FIG. 31 (a) left and right direction) (see FIG. 17). Therefore, when the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (when a deviation occurs), the main unit 311 is moved accordingly. Displacement (sliding) along the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 of the projecting pin 311a is likely to occur, whereby one end side portion 314 is more along the guide rod P than the other end side portion 314. Transition to the configuration shown in FIG. 31 (b) that precedes the displacement can be reliably performed.

  Each end side part 314 is formed with two elongated holes 314a in parallel, and two projecting pins 311a are projected on one side and the other side of the main body part 311 in the longitudinal direction. The connection strength between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be ensured, and rattling or wobbling of the main body portion 311 when the displacement member 310 is slid in the vertical direction can be suppressed.

  Stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are formed on the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, respectively. In the assembled state, the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween (see FIG. 16). As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when the displacement at one end side portion 314 precedes the displacement at the other end side portion 314, the displacement difference exceeds the specified amount. ), The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b can be regulated by contacting each other. Thereby, it can suppress that the protruding pin 311a breaks.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor 341 is disposed on each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction are driven (both sides drive). Compared with the structure driven by the drive motor 341 (one-side drive), the shared load of the drive motor 341 can be reduced, and the displacement member 310 can be enlarged or the displacement speed of the displacement member 310 can be increased accordingly. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, in such a double-sided drive structure, it is impossible to completely synchronize the drive on the one-side member 320L side and the drive on the other-side member 320R side, and deviation tends to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable mechanism (the structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 311) is arranged on one side and the other side of the main body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. Formed in two places. Therefore, even when there is a deviation between the driving on the one side member 320L side and the driving on the other side member 320R side, the movable member located on the one side member 320L side of the movable mechanisms formed at two locations. Depending on the state of guidance or driving of the one side member 320L, the movable mechanism located on the side of the other side member 320R is deformed in different forms depending on the state of guidance or driving of the other side member 320L (projecting pins). 311a can be displaced within the slot 314a).

  Therefore, the deviation on the one side and the other side can be effectively absorbed by the interlocking of the movable mechanisms on the one side and the other side. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 310.

  Next, a method for assembling the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L as viewed from the rear side. In FIG. 32, the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is performed by mounting the drive motor 341 on the front surface of the intermediate base 332 and attaching the gear shafts 332c to 332g to the rear surface of the intermediate base 332. After mounting the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 to the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 to the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 22 for the gear shafts 332c to 332i), the second rack 364 is mounted in its rack groove. The eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted into the 364b and the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365 is engaged with the eccentric pin 363a.

  Next, after the roller 367 is placed in a direction in which the flange portion 367a is brought into contact with the back surface of the intermediate base 322, the biasing spring 366 is placed. The biasing spring 366 is placed in a bent posture while the other end is locked to a locking portion formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. At this stage, one end of the biasing spring 366 is not locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, and is held between the roller 367 and a part of the gear train (the gears 362a and 362b). The

  In this case, the urging spring 366 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the free length is maintained), and can be stably held in a bent posture. In this case, a part of the gear train (the gears 362a and 362b) is also used as a portion for holding the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture, so that a wall portion or the like for holding the biasing spring 366 is used. It can be dispensed with, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Thus, after forming the state where the transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 332 (the state shown in FIG. 32), the front surface of the back surface base 331 faces the back surface of the intermediate base 332, and both are fastened and fixed. Finally, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 through the first opening 331 c of the back surface base 331. Thereby, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is completed.

  In addition, the operation | work which latches one end of the urging | biasing spring 366 to the latching | locking part of the 2nd rack 364 uses the jig | tool with which the nail | claw shape was formed in the front-end | tip, for example. Specifically, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked (held) by the tip of the jig inserted from the first opening 331c of the back surface base 331, and the biasing spring 366 is elastically deformed (extended) while the second rack. 364 is locked to the locking portion.

  Here, when the urging spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily secure the arrangement space, while maintaining the bent posture of the urging spring 366. It is difficult, and in the assembly process, a phenomenon occurs in which the biasing spring 366 is bounced (jumps by its own elastic recovery force). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 32 (that is, before covering the back surface base 331 on the back surface side of the intermediate base 332), when one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364. The urging spring 366 maintains a bent posture and the urging spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed with one hand so that the second rack 364 does not fall off, while the rear base 331 is intermediated with the other hand. It is necessary to perform an operation of covering the base 332, which is complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first opening 331c is formed in a part of the back surface base 331 (a region including one end of the biasing spring 366), so that the back surface base 331 is formed on the back surface of the intermediate base 332. After the covering, one end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 through the first opening 331c. That is, the rear base 331 is covered first, so that the rear base 331 is disposed opposite to the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are arranged on the rear base 331). 364 can be held down), and the biasing spring 366 can be prevented from being repelled and the second rack 364 can be prevented from falling off. As a result, the work of connecting one end of the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 can be easily performed, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

  In addition, since the first opening 331c is formed in the back surface base 331 in this way, not only the workability of the assembly work (attachment work of the biasing spring 366) can be improved, but also the biasing spring 366. Can reduce sliding resistance when elastically deforming (stretching). In other words, as described above, the first opening 331c is formed in a region overlapping the biasing spring 366 when the back surface base 331 is viewed from the back, so that sliding between the biasing spring 366 and the back surface base 331 is suppressed. Thus, the occurrence of resistance can be reduced. Therefore, since the elastic deformation of the urging spring 366 can be suppressed, the urging force can be stably applied to the second rack 364. Further, even when the biasing spring 366 is formed as a metal coil spring and the back base 331 is formed of a resin material, the first opening 331c is formed, so that the biasing spring 366 It is possible to suppress the back base 331 from being worn due to the sliding, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the dust generated by the wear from entering the electronic device such as a mechanical movable part or a sensor device and having an adverse effect.

  In addition, not only the first opening 331c corresponding to one end side of the urging spring 366 but also the second opening 331d corresponding to the other end side of the urging spring 366 is formed in the back surface base 331. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sliding resistance and suppress the wear described above.

  In this case, the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are formed linearly (that is, only in a region corresponding to the linear part of the biasing spring 366). Therefore, the plate surface (opposing member facing the biasing spring 366) can be left at the bent portion of the biasing spring 366. Therefore, the opposing member is provided at a position necessary to maintain the posture in which the biasing spring 366 is bent while ensuring the effect of reducing the sliding resistance and suppressing the wear while ensuring the area where the opening is formed to the maximum. Can be arranged.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the ring forming unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 45.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the ring forming unit 400, and FIG. 34 is a rear view of the ring forming unit 400. 33 and 34 show a state in which the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the annular forming unit 400 includes a one-side annular unit 410L and another-side annular unit 410R that are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval and facing each other. The units 410L and 410R are provided with a pair of upper and lower annular divided bodies 440L1, 440L2, 440R1, and 440R2, respectively. The ring forming unit 400 operates each of the ring units 410L and 410R to move each of the ring divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position shown in FIG. (Formation position), and an annular shape is formed at the annular formation position (see FIGS. 43 to 45).

  Here, the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R have a slight difference in shape, but the portions that exhibit technical functions are symmetrical (except for the positioning mechanism) In the following description, the other-side annular unit 410R will be described as a representative example, and the one-side annular unit 410L will be described. Is omitted. The positioning mechanism will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of the other-side annular unit 410R, and FIG. 36 is a rear view of the other-side annular unit 410R. 35 and 36 show a state in which the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 are arranged at the annular formation position.

  37 is an exploded front perspective view of the other-side annular unit 410R as seen from the front side of the disassembled other-side annular unit 410R, and FIG. 38 is another side view as seen from the rear side of the disassembled other-side annular unit 410R. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the annular unit 410R. 37 and 38 correspond to a state where the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 to 38, the other-side annular unit 410R includes a back surface base 420, a drive mechanism 430 disposed on the back surface base 420, and an annular divided body 440R1 driven by the drive mechanism 430. , 440R2, a posture defining member 450 for defining the postures of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, a suspension mechanism 460 for supporting the upper portion of the posture defining member 450 on the back base 420, and a posture defining member 450 The lower end guide mechanism 470 that guides the lower end and the cover body 480 that covers the back surface base 420 are mainly provided. Here, the back surface base 420 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 39 is a front perspective view of the back base 420. As shown in FIG. 39, the back surface base 420 is composed of a main body portion that is formed in an elongated shape when viewed from the front, an upper overhanging portion that projects laterally from the upper end of the main body portion, and an upper overhanging portion. Is formed in a substantially inverted F shape in front view from a lower projecting portion projecting laterally from the main body portion at a lower position.

  A motor shaft insertion window 421 is formed in the main body portion of the rear base 420, and an upper rack shaft 422a, a lower rack shaft 422b, a gear shaft 423, an upper arm shaft 425a, and a lower arm shaft 426 are formed from the front of the main body portion. Are projected. The motor shaft insertion window 421 is an opening for connecting the drive shaft of the drive motor 431 attached to the back surface of the back surface base 420 to the gear 361 of the drive mechanism on the front surface side of the back surface base 420.

  The upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are inserted into the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d (both see FIG. 40) of the third rack 433 of the drive mechanism, respectively, to guide the linear movement of the third rack 433. This is an axial body having a circular cross section. The diameters of the upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are set to dimensions that are equal to or slightly smaller than the groove widths of the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d of the third rack.

  The gear shaft 423 is a shaft having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the transmission gear 434 (see FIG. 40) of the drive mechanism. The upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 are the upper arm of the drive mechanism. It is a cylindrical body with an annular cross section for rotatably supporting the rotation bases 435a and 436a (see FIG. 40) of the body 435 and the lower arm body 436.

  A cover body 480 is covered (fastened and fixed) in a region corresponding to the upper rack shaft 422a, the gear shaft 423, and the upper and lower arm shafts 425 and 426 on the front surface of the rear base 420, and the cover body 480 and the rear base 420 are covered. The upper end side of the third rack 433, the transmission gear 434, and the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 (rotating base parts 435a, 436a) are accommodated between the two (see FIG. 35).

  A suspension mechanism 460 is disposed (fastened and fixed) on an upper projecting portion of the back base 420, and a lower end guide mechanism 470 is disposed on a lower end and a lower projecting portion of the main body portion of the back base 420 ( Fastening and fixing) (see FIGS. 35 to 37). As will be described later, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the front (front) side of the rear base 420 in a slidable and displaceable manner in the left-right direction via the suspension mechanism 460. The lower end guide mechanism 470 restricts backlash (sway) in the front-rear direction when slid to the left. Note that the lower end side of the third rack 433 and the gear 432 are accommodated between the lower end guide mechanism 470 and the back surface base 420 (see FIG. 35).

  Returning to FIG. 35 to FIG. The drive mechanism 430 is a mechanism that displaces the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 by the drive force of the drive motor 431, and is fixed to the drive motor 431 attached to the back surface of the back surface base 420 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 431. Gear 432 driven by the gear 432, the third rack 433 driven linearly by the gear 432, the transmission gear 434 rotated by the linear motion of the third rack 433, and rotated by the transmission gear 434. The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are mainly provided. Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the detailed structure and operation | movement of the drive mechanism 430 are demonstrated.

  FIG. 40A is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state where the posture in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions is formed, and FIG. 40B is an annular divided body 440R1 and 440R2. It is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in the state in which the attitude | position which arrange | positions in a ring formation position was formed. In FIG. 40, the drive motor 431 is not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the third rack 433 is formed in a vertically long flat plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper rack portion 433a and a lower rack 433b, an upper guide groove 433c, and a lower guide groove. 433d. The upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b are portions formed as racks by cutting teeth on the upper end side and lower end side surfaces (the left side surface in FIG. 40 (a)) of the flat plate body, The transmission gear 434 is engaged with the rack portion 433b on the upper end side, and the gear 432 is engaged with the rack portion 433a on the lower end side.

  The upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d are openings through which the upper rack shaft 422a and the lower rack shaft 422b (see FIG. 39) of the rear base 420 are inserted, respectively, and are adjacent to the upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b, respectively. At a position where the first and second teeth extend in a straight line along the vertical direction (that is, the longitudinal direction of the flat plate body (third rack 433), FIG. 40A, the vertical direction).

  The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed as flat plate-like long bodies, and the rotation base portions 435a and 436a are formed on the proximal end side of the long body, and the rotation connecting portions 435b and 436b are formed on the distal end side of the long body. Are formed respectively.

  The rotation bases 435a and 436a are respectively provided with circular holes in a front view to be rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420, and along the outer peripheral surface. Gear is engraved. That is, the rotation bases 435a and 436a are formed as gears that are rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420. The gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is meshed with the gear at the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435, and the transmission gear 434 is meshed with the gear at the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436.

  The rotation connecting portions 435b and 436b are portions connected to the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, and as will be described later, the annular divided bodies are provided via an arm connecting groove 451 (see FIG. 41) of the posture defining member 450. 440R1 and 440R2 are rotatably connected to a rotation connecting portion 441 (see FIG. 38) that protrudes from the back surface.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the drive mechanism 430 is configured such that the third rack 433 is located at the lowermost part of the movable range (see FIG. 40) in a state in which the annular split bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are disposed at the retracted position. 40 on the lower side, and the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 extend along the vertical direction (that is, on the extension line of the imaginary line along the longitudinal direction of each arm body 435, 436). The posture in which the arm shafts 425 and 426 of the back base 420 are positioned).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 can be raised up to a vertical posture in a state where the posture in which the annular divided members 440R1 and 440R2 are disposed at the retracted position is formed. As will be described later, the annular divided body 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted backward, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 431 can be suppressed.

  When the gear 432 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 from the state shown in FIG. 40A, the third rack 433 is rotated by the rotation of the gear 432. Is displaced upward (upward in FIG. 40 (a)), and the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40 (a).

  When the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40 (a), the rotation of the transmission gear 434 causes the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 to rotate clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 40 (a). And the rotation base 436a of the upper arm body 435 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 40 by the rotation of the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436. As a result, the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is lowered, while the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is elevated, as shown in FIG. A posture is formed in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation position.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b), in a state in which the posture in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation position is formed, the third rack 433 is at the lowest position in the movable range (the lower side in FIG. 40). ). When the gear 432 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 40) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 from this state, the rotation of the gear 432 is transmitted via the third rack 433 and the transmission gear 434. Due to the reverse of the above-described action, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 and the rotation base 435a of the upper arm body 435. As a result, the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is raised, while the distal end side (rotational coupling portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is lowered, as shown in FIG. A posture is formed in which the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

  According to the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed with the rotation base portions 435a and 436a on the base end sides thereof, and the gears of the rotation base portions 435a and 436a are engaged with each other. Since it is pivotally supported on the back base 420 in a state, the rotation of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be synchronized. Thereby, as will be described later, the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 disposed on the distal ends of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be brought into contact with each other with high precision at the annular formation position (FIG. 35). And FIG. 36). Further, if the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is rotationally driven, the upper arm body 435 can also be driven and rotated through the engagement of the rotation bases 435a and 436a. Therefore, the two arms (upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436) can be rotationally driven by one drive motor 431, and there is no need to provide a drive source for each arm. Can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 35 to FIG. The posture defining member 450 is a member for defining the postures of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. That is, when the ring segments R1, 440R2 are displaced between the retracted position and the ring formation position, the ring segments are slid in the left-right direction along with the displacement of the ring segments R1, 440R2. The postures of the bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are maintained in the non-rotating state (that is, the body 440R1 is displaced between the retracted position and the ring forming position while maintaining the parallel posture). Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the detailed structure of the attitude | position definition member 450 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the posture defining member 450. 41 shows a state in which the upper end of the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460 and the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is guided to the lower end guide mechanism 470.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the posture defining member 450 is a front surface interposed between the distal end sides (rotational coupling portions 435b, 436b) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the annular divided bodies 440R1, 440R2. This is a vertically long plate member (see FIG. 35 and FIG. 36), and a set of three grooves, ie, an arm connecting groove 451 and a pair of posture defining grooves 452 positioned across the arm connecting groove 451, is vertically 2 A pair is formed.

  The arm connection groove 451 connects the rotation connection portions 435a and 436 (see FIG. 40) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 to the rotation connection portion 441 (see FIG. 38) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2. And extends in a straight line along the vertical direction (that is, the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the posture defining member 450 by the suspension mechanism 460, the vertical direction in FIG. 41). The posture defining groove 452 is an opening through which the sliding shaft 442 (see FIG. 38) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 is inserted through the collar C, and is linear in the vertical direction parallel to the arm connecting shaft 451. It is extended to.

  The groove width of the arm connecting shaft 451 is such that the connecting portion between the rotary connecting portions 435a and 436 of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 and the rotary connecting portion 441 of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 can rotate within the groove and be along the groove. The slidable dimension is set, and the groove width of the attitude defining groove 452 is set to a dimension that allows the sliding shaft 442 (color C) of the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 to slide along the groove. .

  That is, the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotatably connected to the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 via the arm connecting shaft 451, while the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are slid into the posture defining groove 452. By the insertion of the moving shaft 442, the posture defining member 450 is made non-rotatable while the slide displacement in the vertical direction is held in an allowed state. Therefore, as will be described later, when the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 are rotated, the posture defining member 450 is slid in the left-right direction, and the annular divided bodies 440R1, 440R2 maintain their postures in a parallel state. However, it is slid along the arm connecting shaft 451 and the posture defining groove 452 in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 43 to 45).

  The suspending mechanism 460 is disposed on the base portion 461 having a horizontally long plate shape in front view disposed (fastened and fixed) on the upper projecting portion (see FIGS. 35 and 39) of the rear base 420, and the base portion 461. And a brass guide rod 462 formed as a rod having a circular cross section. The guide rod 462 is disposed in a posture along the left-right direction in a state where the base portion 461 is disposed on the back surface base 420. A cylindrical slider portion 453 is disposed at the upper end of the posture defining member 450, and a guide rod 462 is inserted through the slider portion 453. As a result, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the back surface base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 in a state in which it can slide and displace in the left-right direction.

  The lower end guide mechanism 460 is a member disposed (fastened and fixed) at the lower end of the main body portion of the rear base 420 and the lower projecting portion (see FIGS. 35 and 39), and is arranged at the lower projecting portion of the rear base 420. A guide groove 471 is formed in the portion to be provided. The guide groove 471 is displaced in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the posture defining member 450 (the direction in which the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is displaced when the posture defining member 450 is rotated about the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460). Is formed as a concave groove having a substantially U-shaped cross section that extends along the direction parallel to the guide rod 462 while opening upward (upper side in FIG. 41). .

  The groove width of the guide groove 471 is set to be larger than the plate thickness at the lower end of the posture defining member 450, and the front and back surfaces of the lower end of the posture defining member 450 supported by the suspension mechanism 460 are supported. On the other hand, the mutually opposing inner side surfaces of the guide groove 471 are disposed at positions where they are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval. That is, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471. When the posture defining member 450 is in a stable state, the lower end of the posture defining member 450 is not in contact with the inner surface of the guide groove 471. Is done.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is suspended and supported on the back surface base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 and the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, the resistance when the posture defining member 450 is slid in the left-right direction with respect to the back surface base 420 is suppressed, and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced by the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 (see FIG. 43 to FIG. 45) can be performed smoothly.

  For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are arranged on the back surface base 420 and the upper and lower ends of the posture defining member 450 are respectively guided by the pair of guide shafts, the sliding portion becomes two places and the frictional resistance increases. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the part which slides can be made into one place, the frictional resistance at the time of the attitude | position determination member 450 carrying out a slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is rotated around the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460, so that the lower end side of the posture defining member 450 is on the inner surface of the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Even if they come into contact with each other, since they are supported by suspension, the posture defining member 450 can be self-corrected to a posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the posture defining member 450 can be returned to a state in which the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the posture defining member 450 is slid.

  Returning to FIG. 35 to FIG. In the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2, a rotary connecting portion 441 and a sliding shaft 442 are projected from the back surface. As described above, the rotary connecting portion 441 is connected to the rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 via the arm connecting shaft 441 of the posture defining member 450, and the sliding shaft 442 is connected to the collar. It is inserted through the posture defining groove 452 of the posture defining member 450 through C.

  As a result, the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are slid in the left and right direction together with the posture defining member 450 while being relatively displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the posture defining member 450 as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate. As a result, the arcuate path is displaced between the retracted position and the ring forming position while maintaining the parallel posture, and the ring divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the ring divided are formed at the ring forming position. The bodies 440R1 and 440R2 come into contact with each other to form an annular shape (see FIG. 45).

  In this case, a positioning mechanism is formed on each contact surface of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, thereby properly contacting the objects displaced by the arcuate trajectory and the backlash after contact. Can suppress wobble and wobble. Here, with reference to FIG. 42, the positioning mechanism formed in the contact surface of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 will be described.

  The positioning mechanism is formed on each contact surface of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, and since they all have the same configuration, the positioning mechanism between the annular divided body 440L1 and the annular divided body 440R2 is used. The positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface will be described as a representative example, and the description of the positioning mechanism formed on other contact surfaces will be omitted.

  42 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 440L1 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 42 (b) is a portion of the annular divided body 440R1 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIIb in FIG. 42 (c) is an enlarged side view, FIG. 42 (c) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular divided body 440L1 along the line XLIIc-XLIIc in FIG. 42 (a), and FIG. 42 (d) is a diagram of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the annular divided body 440R1 in the XLIId-XLIId line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (d), the positioning mechanism accepts a positioning convex portion 491 projecting from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440R1, and the positioning convex portion 491. A positioning recess 492 provided as a possible recess on the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440L1, an engagement protrusion 492a protruding from the bottom of the positioning recess 492, and an engagement protrusion The concave portion 492a is formed as a concave portion that can accept the portion 492a, and an engaging concave portion 491a that is recessed in the protruding front end surface of the positioning convex portion 491.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and 42 (d), the positioning convex portion 491 has upper and lower side surfaces (FIG. 42 (d) upper surface and lower surface so as to taper toward the projecting tip. Surface) and front and rear side surfaces (the right side surface and the left side surface in FIG. 42B) are formed as tapered surfaces that incline in a direction of narrowing the facing interval toward the projecting tip. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 42A, the positioning recess 492 narrows the facing interval as the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. 42A) move toward the recessed bottom surface. It is formed as a taper surface which inclines. As a result, even when there is a positional shift between the annular divided body 440L1 and the annular divided body 440R1, the positioning convex portion 491 is moved to the positioning concave portion 492 at the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. Easy to accept.

  The extension length of the positioning concave portion 492 (FIG. 42A, vertical length) is made longer than the extension length of the positioning convex portion 491 (FIG. 42B, vertical length) (FIG. 42). (See (d)), these extending directions are directions corresponding to the arc-shaped trajectories of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 (that is, directions along the movement trajectory when the contact surface is viewed from the front). . As a result, when the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other in an arcuate locus so that the contact surfaces come into contact with each other, one of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 precedes the other, Even in the case where there is a positional shift between them, the positioning convex portion 491 can be easily received by the positioning concave portion 492 in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other.

  The engagement concave portion 491a and the engagement convex portion 492a are engaged with each other (concave engagement) at the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are brought into contact with each other, thereby achieving final positioning. The projecting height of the engaging convex portion 492a is set to a size smaller than the concave depth of the positioning concave portion 492, and the concave depth of the engaging concave portion 491a is set to the position of the positioning convex portion 491. The dimension is set smaller than the protruding height.

  Thereby, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning is performed with a relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relative displacement tolerance is relatively wide) by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, when the projecting tip of the positioning convex portion 491 is reliably received in the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be performed smoothly, the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage, the engagement concave portions 491a and the engagement convex portions 492a are engaged with each other, so that positioning accuracy is improved, the ring shape is properly formed and the rattling after the ring shape is formed Two-stage positioning is possible in which wobble can be reliably suppressed.

  The operation of the ring forming unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

  43 (a) and 43 (b) are a front view and a rear view of the annular forming unit 400 in a state where the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions. 44 (b) is a front view and a rear view of the annular forming unit 400 in a state where the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are disposed between the retracted position and the annular forming position, and FIG. 45 (a) and FIG. 45 (b) is a front view and a rear view of the annular formation unit 400 in a state where the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are in the most separated state at the retracted position. That is, when the facing interval between the posture defining members 450 of the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R is maximized (that is, each posture-defining member 450 is disposed at the most retracted position in the left-right direction). Thus, the interval between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 in the left-right direction is maximized. In addition, the annular division bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the upper end or the lower end of each posture defining member 450, so that the vertical spacing between the annular division bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the annular division bodies 440L2 and 440R2 Is the maximum.

  When the drive mechanism 430 is operated from this state and the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are respectively rotated (see FIG. 40), each posture defining member 450 is moved in the left-right direction as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotated. By moving forward, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the annular divided bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the direction of narrowing the facing distance in the left-right direction and the annular divided parts with respect to the posture defining members 450 The bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are respectively lowered or raised, and the facing distance in the vertical direction between the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the annular divided bodies 440L2 and 440R2 is reduced, and the state shown in FIG. 44 is formed.

  When the operation of the drive mechanism 430 further proceeds from the state shown in FIG. 44, each posture defining member 450 is arranged at the most advanced position in the left-right direction as the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 rotate. The ring segments 440L1 and 440L2 and the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the left-right direction to a position where the contact surfaces abut each other, and the ring segments 440L1 and 440R1 and the ring segment 440L2 440R2 is displaced (raised or lowered) in the vertical direction to a position where the abutting surfaces come into contact with each other. As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation position, and an annular shape is formed.

  Thus, according to the ring forming unit 400, the horizontal displacement of the posture defining member 450 by the suspension mechanism 460, and the annular divided bodies 440L1 along the grooves 451 and 452 of the posture defining member 450 are provided. Due to the vertical displacement of 440R2, the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 can be displaced along an arcuate locus while maintaining their postures (parallel), and an annular shape can be formed at the annular formation position.

  Here, as a mechanism for displacing each of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, an annular ring can also be obtained by using a parallel link mechanism (a mechanism including a first arm and a second arm that are parallel to each other and have the same length). It is possible to form an annular shape at the formation position. For example, paying attention to the annular divided body R1, the proximal ends of the first arm and the second arm are rotatably connected to the back surface base 420, and the distal ends of the first arm and the second arm are connected to the annular divided body 440R1. By connecting in a rotatable manner and rotating the first arm and the second arm, the annular divided body 440R1 can be displaced while maintaining a constant posture. Therefore, by providing such a mechanism for each of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, an annular ring can be formed at the annular forming position.

  However, in the structure using the parallel link mechanism in this way, interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs, so that the operation range of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 cannot be sufficiently ensured. For example, when focusing on the annular divided body 440R1, in this embodiment, the upper arm 435 is tilted in the horizontal direction at the annular formation position (see FIGS. 40B and 45), and the upper arm body at the retracted position. Similarly, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring forming position and the first arm and the second arm in the retracted position. Will stand in the vertical direction. In this case, in the parallel link mechanism, when the first arm and the second arm are raised and lowered in the retracted position, one arm interferes with the proximal end side of the other arm, and thus cannot be raised in a vertical posture. . For this reason, the ring segment 440R1 cannot be sufficiently retracted backward.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the posture defining member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the back surface base 420, and the rotation of the annular divided body 440R1 with respect to the posture defining member 450 is restricted. However, by arranging the upper arm body 435 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction and connecting the proximal end side of the upper arm body 435 to the back surface base 420 and the distal end side of the upper arm body 435 so as to be rotatable to the annular divided body 440R1, The ring segment 440R1 is displaced while maintaining a constant posture. That is, as in the case of the parallel link mechanism, two arms are not required, and only one arm (upper arm body 435) can be configured. As a result, the arms do not interfere with each other, so that the upper arm body 435 can be erected until it becomes a vertical posture (see FIG. 40A), and the ring segment 440R1 is sufficiently retracted backward. Can do.

  Further, for example, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are inclined at the retracted position. Therefore, the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 causes the first arm and the second arm to be inclined (that is, Acts as a force that causes the ring to fall (in the direction of forming the ring formation position). Therefore, it is necessary to support the weight of the annular divided body R1 by the driving force of the drive motor 431, and energy consumption increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the upper arm body 435 can be vertically raised at the retracted position, the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 can be supported by the upper arm body 435. Accordingly, the driving force of the driving motor 431 required to support the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 (hold it in the retracted position) can be suppressed or unnecessary, and energy consumption can be suppressed.

  When the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the annular formation positions shown in FIG. 45, the positioning by the positioning mechanism is performed as described above (see FIG. 42).

  Specifically, a positioning projection 491 protrudes from the contact surface of the annular segment 440R1, and a positioning recess 492 is recessed from the contact surface of the annular segment 440L1. Since the extended length of 492 (FIG. 42 (a) vertical dimension) is set to be larger than the extended length of the positioning convex portion 491 (FIG. 42 (b) vertical dimension), the annular divided body When the 440L1 and 440R1 are displaced toward the ring forming position and the contact surfaces of the 440L1 and 440R1 come close to each other, the positioning convex portion 491 is received (engaged) into the positioning concave portion 492 to perform positioning. it can.

  In other words, the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are close to each other along a circular arc (circular motion) locus. Therefore, in the concave shape and the convex shape having the same dimensions, the concave shape is related to the convex shape. It cannot be combined. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the positioning concave portion 492 is extended as a long hole along the locus of the positioning convex portion 491. Therefore, the positioning convex portion 492 has a positioning convex portion. 491 can be received (engaged).

  On the other hand, only the positioning by the engagement of the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492 is the direction in which the positioning is orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492 (FIG. 42 (a) left-right direction, FIG. 45 (a)). (Vertical direction on the paper). That is, even when the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are close to each other due to the arc-shaped restriction, the positioning concave portion 492 can receive the positioning convex portion 491, so that the positioning concave portion is longer than the extended length of the positioning convex portion 491. Since the extending length of 492 is increased, the positioning convex portion 491 cannot be engaged with the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492. Therefore, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492, and rattling or wobble occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the engaging concave portion 491a is formed in the positioning convex portion 491 and the engaging convex portion 492a is formed in the positioning concave portion 492, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 produce effects. When arranged at the position, the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a can be engaged with each other, and as a result, the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are positioned in the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling and wobbling.

  A structure in which the positioning convex portions 491 and the positioning concave portions 492 are omitted, and the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 are positioned by only the engaging concave portions 491a and the engaging convex portions 492a is also conceivable. However, in this case, it is difficult to receive (engage) the engaging convex portion 492a in the engaging concave portion 491a due to the elastic deformation of the upper arm body 435 and the dimensional tolerance of the sliding portion and the rotating portion. It becomes. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is first engaged with the positioning concave portion 492 to perform the first stage positioning, and then the engagement concave portion 491a is covered as the second stage positioning. Since the engaging projections 492a are engaged, the second stage positioning (engagement of the engaging projections 492a with the engaging recesses 491a) can be performed reliably, and the above-described annular divided bodies 440L1, 440R1 Generation of rattling and wobble can be suppressed.

  In other words, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, the positioning accuracy is relatively rough (relative displacement tolerance is relatively wide) by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Positioning), the projected tip of the positioning convex portion 491 can be reliably received in the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be performed smoothly. In the final stage when abuts, the engagement recess 491a and the engagement protrusion 492a are engaged with each other (positioning in the second stage), so that the positioning accuracy is improved and the annular shape is properly formed. Shaking and wobbling after forming the ring shape can be reliably suppressed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in the second embodiment. 46 (c) and 46 (d) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state in which relative displacement by the ball joint mechanism is formed.

  46A corresponds to the cross section taken along line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 46B corresponds to the cross section taken along line XVIb-XVIb in FIG. 46C and 46D correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 46A and 46B, respectively.

  In 1st Embodiment, although the projecting pin 311a of the main-body part 311 was penetrated to the long hole 314a of the end side part 314, the case where the main-body part 311 and the end side part 314 were connected so that relative displacement was possible was demonstrated. The main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the second embodiment are connected to each other by a ball joint 2610 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 46A to FIG. 46D, in the displacement member 2310 in the second embodiment, between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower ball joints 2610. The ball joint 2610 is formed by connecting spheres (ball portions) at both ends with rod-like bodies, and spherical bodies at both ends are brought into spherical contact with socket portions formed on the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314, respectively. The part 2311 and the end side part 2314 are connected in a state in which relative rotation is possible in an arbitrary direction.

  In addition, the socket part of the main body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 is a cover in which a hemispherical spherical surface is recessed in a part where a hemispherical spherical surface is recessed on the back surface of the main body part 2311 and the front surface of the end side part 2314. By covering the bodies 2311d and 2314d, they are formed by their spherical surfaces. The cover bodies 2311a and 2314a are formed with tapered surfaces for avoiding interference with the rod-shaped body of the ball joint 2610.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the main-body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 are connected via a ball joint mechanism, they can be smoothly displaced relatively in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 2310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on one side and the other side). In the case where there is a difference in sliding resistance in this case, or when there is a variation in driving force between the driving motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if a deviation occurs between them, the deviation is caused by the ball joint mechanism. It can be absorbed by the relative displacement of the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 (see FIG. 31). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 2310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 2310.

  Further, in the displacement member 2310 in the present embodiment, a biasing spring 2620 is interposed between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portion 2314. The biasing spring 2620 is formed as a coil spring, and is interposed between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 2620 acts as a force that keeps the facing distance between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 constant.

  As described above, when the biasing spring 2620 is interposed, when the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are relatively displaced via the ball joint mechanism in order to absorb the above-described deviation, the main body portions are arranged. 2311 and the end side portion 2314 can be returned to the initial positions by the urging force (elastic recovery force) of the urging spring 2620.

  The urging spring 2620 is disposed in a state where a ball joint 2620 (rod-like body) is inserted through the inner periphery thereof. As a result, a mechanism for holding the biasing spring 2620 so as not to drop off can also be used as the ball joint 2610, and it is not necessary to provide a separate holding mechanism, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing component costs. Can be planned.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a) and 47 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 3310 in the third embodiment. 47C and 47D are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is elastically deformed.

  47A corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15B, and FIG. 47B corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XVIb-XVIb in FIG. 47 (c) and 47 (d) correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), respectively.

  In 1st Embodiment, although the projecting pin 311a of the main-body part 311 was penetrated to the long hole 314a of the end side part 314, the case where the main-body part 311 and the end side part 314 were connected so that relative displacement was possible was demonstrated. The main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the third embodiment are connected by a rubber-like elastic body 3630 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  47 (a) and 47 (b), in the displacement member 3310 in the third embodiment, between the back surface on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314. Are connected by a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630. The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is formed from an elastomer in a columnar shape, and elastically deforms itself to connect the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in a state where relative rotation is possible in an arbitrary direction. The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction is perpendicular to the back surface of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the main-body part 3311 and the end side part 3314 are connected via the rubber-like elastic body 3630, it can be smoothly displaced relatively in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 3310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on one side and the other side). In the case where there is a difference in sliding resistance in this case, or when there is a variation in driving force between the driving motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if a deviation occurs between the two, The main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced by the elastic deformation of the 3630 itself (see FIG. 31). As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 3310, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stop of the displacement member 3310.

  Further, in the case where the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are relatively displaced due to elastic deformation of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 in order to absorb the above-described deviation, the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are made to be rubber-like elastic. It can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the body 3630.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is made of an elastomer, the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 can be converged at an early stage by using the viscosity characteristic (damping effect) of the elastomer. Can do. As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 from causing a difference between the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L and the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R. The occurrence of deviation can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a rear view of the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 48B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 4310 taken along the line XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, a description will be given of a case where drive motors 341 are disposed on each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 are driven (both sides drive). However, in the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 is disposed only on the one side member 320L (that is, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted), and only one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 4310 is driven. (Single side drive). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, the displacement member 4310 in 4th Embodiment is a movable mechanism (end side part 314 with respect to the main-body part 4311) in a longitudinal direction other side (FIG. 48 (a) left side) with respect to the displacement member 310 in 1st Embodiment. 4314) and the configuration of the first rack 4315 are different, and the other configurations are the same. Only different configurations will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment protrudes from the back surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 4311 (left side in FIG. 48 (a)). The number of protrusions of the installation pin 311a is 1. In addition, the arrangement position of the protruding pin 311a on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the vertical direction (FIG. 48 (a) vertical direction) is a pair of upper and lower disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 48 (a)). The intermediate position of the protruding pin 311a is set.

  On the other hand, the end side portion 4314 connected to the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 4311 (left side in FIG. 48 (a)) is provided with a shaft support hole 4314a at only one location. The shaft support hole 4314a is a circular hole with a circular shape in front view for receiving the protruding pin 311a on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 4311, and the inner diameter thereof is the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylinder portion of the collar C. Is set. Therefore, the projecting pin 311a is inserted into the shaft support hole 4314a through the collar C in a rotatable state.

  That is, on the one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 48A), as described above, the main body 311 is relatively displaced (sliding) along the left-right direction (the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a) with respect to the end side 314. On the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 48 (a)), only rotation around the protruding pin 311a is allowed as relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311. The

  In the fourth embodiment, the first rack 4315 disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 48A) is provided with the slider holding portion 315 as the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted. (Ie, the rack portion 315a is omitted). Thereby, the displacement member 4310 is guided along the guide rod P on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 48 (a)) and driven by the one side member 320L (drive motor 431). The other side (left side in FIG. 48 (a)) is only guided along the guide rod P, and is not driven by the other side member 320R (drive motor 431).

  In this way, in the fourth embodiment, since it is formed as a one-side drive that drives only one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 4310, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and its driving force are transmitted to the first rack 4315. Therefore, the transmission mechanism can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down, since it is a one-side drive, the guide by the one side member 320L and the guide by the other side member 320R are the guide on the drive side and the guide on the driven side. These states are different from each other. For this reason, when the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portions 314 and 4314 to be relatively displaceable with respect to the main body portion 4311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the above-described operation when the displacement member 4310 is lifted and lowered The shift cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form relative displacements in different forms (allowing different forms of relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

  Specifically, the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction serving as the driven side (the left side in FIG. 48A) allows only relative rotation with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311, while the longitudinal direction serving as the driving side. The movable mechanism on one side (right side in FIG. 48 (a)) allows relative rotation and relative displacement (slide displacement) of the main body portion 4311 with respect to the end side portion 4314.

  As a result, both movable mechanisms can be provided with a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively, and a deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member 320L and the guidance by the other side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed by the entire displacement member 4310. As a result, even with single-sided driving, the displacement member 4310 can be stably displaced, and an excessive load on the drive motor 341 and a stop of the displacement member 4310 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49A is a rear view of the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 49B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 taken along the line XLIXb-XLIXb in FIG. FIG. 49C is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 taken along the line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG.

  In the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, one-side drive is adopted, and a movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311). Different structures). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, the displacement member 5310 in 5th Embodiment enables the relative displacement of the end side part 3314 with respect to the displacement member 310 in 1st Embodiment in the longitudinal direction one side and other side (the main-body part 5311). Structure) and only the configuration of the first rack 3315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 49 (a)), and the other configurations are the same. Only different configurations will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 49A to FIG. 49B, in the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, the back surface and the end side portion 3314 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 5311 (right side in FIG. 49A). A pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 between the front faces and a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies between the back face on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body 5311 (left side in FIG. 49 (a)) and the front face of the end side portion 3314. The bodies 5630 are connected to each other. That is, it is the same as in the case of the third embodiment. However, the rubber-like elastic body 5630 is formed in the same shape as the rubber-like elastic body 3630, but the rubber hardness is set higher (hard) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630, and the spring constant is high. (It is difficult to deform).

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, so that it is disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 49 (a)). The first rack 4315 is formed to have only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

  Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the first rack 4315 can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portion 3314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311) is the same on the one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction because of the one-side drive, the displacement member 5310 The above-described shift when the slid is raised or lowered cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form relative displacements in different forms (allowing different forms of relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

  Specifically, the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 5630 constituting the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 49A) serving as the driven side is the other side in the longitudinal direction serving as the driving side (see FIG. ) The right side) is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 constituting the movable mechanism, so that the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction) is less likely to be deformed than the driving side (constant The amount of deformation allowed when an external force is applied can be reduced).

  As a result, both movable mechanisms can be provided with a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively, and a deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member 320L and the guidance by the other side member 320R. Can be effectively absorbed by the entire displacement member 5310. As a result, even in the case of one-side drive, the displacement member 5310 can be stably displaced, and an excessive load on the drive motor 341 and a stop of the displacement member 5310 can be suppressed.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 50A and 50B are front views of the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment. 50A shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven upward, and FIG. 50B shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven downward. 50A and 50B, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 in the front view (hereinafter referred to as “center of gravity position G”) is schematically illustrated using black circles.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 has the center of gravity position as the center of rotation has been described. However, in the rotating body 6313 of the sixth embodiment, the center of gravity position G is eccentric from the center of rotation. The center of gravity is formed to be changeable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Note that the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment has a rack portion 315a from the first rack on the other side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIGS. 50A and 50B) relative to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment. Only the points that are omitted and the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 are decentered are different, and the other configurations are the same. Only different configurations will be described below.

  As shown in FIGS. 50A to 50B, the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment is set such that the gravity center position G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered from the rotation center of the rotating body 6313. . Therefore, the rotator 6313 changes the rotational position (phase) so that the gravity center position G is decentered to the left as viewed from the front as shown in FIG. 50A, for example, or FIG. Can be decentered to the right as viewed from the front. Thereby, in the displacement member 6310, the gravity center position as the whole main-body part 311 can be adjusted (shifted) to the one side or the other side of a longitudinal direction.

  The rotating body 6313 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a rotationally symmetric shape with the rotational center as a symmetric point, and the metal weight is disposed in an eccentric position so that the center of gravity is obtained. The position G is formed so as to be eccentric from the center of rotation. Therefore, in the appearance of the rotator 6313, the player can visually recognize the center of gravity G of the rotator 6313 so that it is located at the center of rotation of the rotator 6313.

  Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, and accordingly, disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (right side in FIG. 50 (a)). The first rack (not shown) is formed to have only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

  Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the first rack can be omitted, and the cost of parts can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, if the movable mechanism (a structure capable of relatively displacing the end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 6311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction because of the one-side drive, the displacement member 6310 is The above-described shift when moving up and down cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the rotating body 6313 and adjusting the center of gravity position G in the left-right direction, the center of gravity position of the displacement member 311 as a whole is more than the center in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 311. It can be biased (moved) to one side or the other side (ie drive side or driven side).

  Therefore, when the displacement member 6310 is stopped, the rotating body 6313 is rotated to produce an effect, while when the displacement member 6310 is displaced (raised or lowered), the rotating body 6313 is brought to a predetermined rotational position (phase). By arranging and decentering the center of gravity of the displacement member 311 as a whole, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction is adjusted, and the above-described deviation is absorbed. An easy state can be formed.

  Here, when the displacement direction (up or down) of the displacement member 6310 is different, the influence of gravity is changed, so that the state required for each movable mechanism is changed. That is, for example, when attention is paid to the driven side, the state of being guided along the guide rod P is changed between an ascending position displaced against gravity and a descending position where the displacement is assisted by gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, for example, when the displacement member 6310 is lifted, the drive side (one side in the longitudinal direction, the left side in FIG. 50A). The center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism on the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 50B) when the displacement member 6310 is lowered. Accordingly, the weight acting on the drive-side movable mechanism and the driven-side movable mechanism can be adjusted according to the displacement direction (up or down) of the displacement member 6310, and the above-described deviation can be more easily absorbed. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 6310 even when the one-side drive is performed and the movable mechanism has the same shape on one side and the other side, and the drive motor It can suppress that the load of 341 becomes excessive and that the displacement member 6310 stops.

  The center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 does not need to be maintained at a fixed position while the displacement member 6310 is displaced (ascended or lowered), and the center of gravity position G may be adjusted during the displacement. For example, when the driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431 is started and during the period from the start to the predetermined period, the center of gravity position G approaches (or is separated from) the drive side (one longitudinal side, left side in FIG. 50 (a)). On the other hand, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431, the gravity center position G is brought close to (or separated from) the driven side (the other end in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 50A). ) The form is exemplified.

  Further, the center-of-gravity position G adjusted by the rotation of the rotating body 6313 is not limited to the position shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b) (left or right as viewed from the front), but any position (phase) ) Can be set.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51 and 52 are front views of the vertical slide unit 7300 in the seventh embodiment. 51 shows a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 52 shows a state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the movable mechanism (the structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) is always effective has been described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the movable mechanism can be fixed. (The relative displacement of the end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 311 can be regulated). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the vertical slide unit 7300 in the seventh embodiment is provided with restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD on the front surface of the front base 333 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fix the movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position. This is a structure for restricting the relative displacement between the part 311 and the end side part 329, and restriction mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are disposed on one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, and Restricting mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD are disposed on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 disposed at the lowered position.

  The restricting mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD arranged at these four locations have substantially the same configuration except that they are arranged in a bilaterally symmetric or vertical symmetric posture, and thus the one side member 320L. The restricting mechanism 7640LU disposed above is described as a representative example, and the description of the other restricting mechanisms 7640LD, 7640RU, and 7640RD is omitted.

  The restricting mechanism 7640LU includes an arm body 7641 rotatably disposed on the front base 333, a torsion spring 7642 for applying an urging force for rotating the arm body 7641, and an urging force applied from the torsion spring 7642. And a holding body (not shown) for restricting the rotation of the arm body 7641 and holding it at the initial position.

  A roller 7641 a is rotatably supported at the tip of the arm body 7641. The torsion spring 7642 biases the arm body 7641 in the rotational direction in which the tip (roller 7641a) is separated from the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 (clockwise (clockwise) in the regulation mechanism 7640LU in FIGS. 51 and 52). . The holding body restricts the rotation of the arm body 7641 by the urging force of the torsion spring 7542, and moves the arm body 7641 to the initial position (the direction connecting the rotation center of the arm body 7641 and the rotation center of the roller 7641 a is the front base 333. (The posture shown in FIG. 52 in the regulation mechanism 7640LU).

  The main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is formed with a decorative portion along the upper and lower side edges thereof, and a roller receiving portion 7311e is provided at the longitudinal end portion of the decorative portion with the one side member 320L. And projecting to the front side of the front base 311.

  The roller receiving portion 7311e extends to a position where it overlaps the roller 7641a of the arm body 7641 in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 51 and 52), and the side surface on the side facing the arm body 7641 approaches the regulation mechanism 7640. 51 (in the regulation mechanism 7640LU in FIG. 51, it is formed to be inclined upward from its proximal end to its distal end). In addition, a curved surface that is curved so as to come into contact with the outer periphery of the roller 7641a is formed at the base end of the side surface facing the arm body 7641. The roller 7641a is held by the curved surface.

  When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 51 and approaches the lowered position, the side surface (lower side surface in FIG. 51) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 is the roller 7641a of the arm body 7661 in the restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD. When the displacement member 310 is further lowered, the roller 7641a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311. As a result, the arm body 7641 gradually tilts from the initial position and is displaced. When the member 310 is disposed at the lowered position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (base curved surface) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 as shown in FIG.

  As a result, the movable body is fixed by the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 being sandwiched from both the left and right arms 7641 by the right and left restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD, and the left and right directions with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body 311 are fixed. Relative displacement (that is, sliding displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. 52 and approaches the lifted position, the side surface (upper side surface in FIG. 52) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 is the arm of the restriction body 7640LU, 7640RU. When the displacement member 310 is further lifted by being brought into contact with the roller 7641a, the roller 7461a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body 311 so that the arm body 7641 is gradually tilted from the initial position. When the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (curved surface of the base end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 as shown in FIG.

  As a result, as in the case described above, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched from the left and right by both arm bodies 7641 of the left and right regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU, so that the movable mechanism is fixed and the end of the main body 311 is fixed. Relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the side portion 314 (that is, sliding displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side part 314 can be regulated, so that rattling and wobble are suppressed. Thus, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

  That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body portion 311, while the main body portion 311 is connected to the end side portion 314 by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 rotates. As a result, rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs and rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, and the movable part may be worn or damaged due to rattling or wobbling.

  On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 is displaced in a stable state while suppressing the rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered with respect to the rotation center as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 50), the configuration of this embodiment is effective.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD are in a state where the movable member is fixed by acting on the arm body 4671 by the displacement member 310 being displaced to its displacement end (upward position or downward position). Form. That is, since the movable mechanism is fixed by using the displacement (up and down) of the displacement member 310 (the arm body 7641 is tilted), it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for fixing the movable mechanism, and the displacement member The drive motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) 310 can also be used as driving means for causing the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  51, when the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 51, the upper restriction mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU have their arm bodies 7641 automatically returned to the initial positions by the biasing force of the torsion spring 7642 ( Similarly, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the lowered position shown in FIG. 52, the lower regulation mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD have their arm bodies 7641 in the initial position due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 7642. Is automatically restored (see FIG. 51). That is, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD can be automatically returned to the position (initial position) shielded by the front base 333 so that the player cannot see them.

  In addition, the roller receiving portion 7311e is formed as a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 (that is, a part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 is formed by the roller portion 7311e), so that the arm body 7641 is tilted. Therefore, it is possible to make the mechanism portion for the player inconspicuous.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are front views of the vertical slide unit 8300 in the eighth embodiment. 53 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 54 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position. 53 and 54 show a state where the front base 333 is removed from the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

  In the seventh embodiment, a case is described in which the arm body 7641 of the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fixes the movable mechanism by sandwiching the main body portion 311 from the left and right (regulating relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314). However, in the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD of the eighth embodiment, the insertion mechanism 8642 is inserted between the main body portion 311 and the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the end side portion 314, thereby fixing the movable mechanism ( The relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 is restricted). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the vertical slide unit 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD are disposed in front of the intermediate base 332 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD fix the movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is disposed at the raised position or the lowered position. This is a structure for restricting relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and restriction mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU are disposed on one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, and Restricting mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD are disposed on one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 disposed at the lowered position.

  Although the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD arranged at these four places have different shapes, the configuration and the operation for inserting the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD between the opposing faces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are substantially the same. Therefore, the restriction mechanism 8640LU disposed above the one side member 320L will be described as a representative example, and description of the other restriction mechanisms 8640LD, 8640RU, and 8640RD will be omitted.

  The restriction mechanism 8640LU projects from the front surface of the intermediate base 332 toward the displacement member 310 from the projecting tip of the base part 8641 (in the restriction mechanism 8640LU, downward in FIG. 53). And an insertion portion 8642. In other words, the insertion portion 8642 is raised by the base portion 8641 to a height position facing between the opposing surfaces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b, and between the opposing surfaces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 53 and 54). It is arranged at the position that overlaps. In addition, the plate | board thickness of the insertion part 8642 is set to the dimension equivalent to or slightly smaller than the opposing space | interval of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b.

  53. When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 53 and then approaches the lowered position, the insertion in the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD is performed below the opposing portions of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314. When the portion 8642 faces and the displacement member 310 is further lowered and disposed at the lowered position, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

  As a result, in the displacement member 310, the gap between the stopper surface 311b of the main body 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (gap for relative displacement) is filled with the insertion portion 8642 of the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD. Thus, the movable mechanism is fixed, and relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 (that is, sliding displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the major axis direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted. The

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. 54 and approaches the lifted position, the insertion in the restriction mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU is performed between the main body portion 311 and the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the end side portion 314. When the portion 8642 faces and the displacement member 310 is further raised and disposed at the raised position, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

  As a result, as in the case described above, the displacement member 310 is configured such that the distance between the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (gap for relative displacement) is the restriction mechanism 8640LU, 8640RU. By being filled with the insertion portion 8642, the movable mechanism is fixed, and relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 (that is, the protruding pin 311a along the major axis direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314). Slide displacement).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted, so that rattling and wobble are suppressed. Thus, the rotating body 313 can be rotated.

  That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body portion 311, while the main body portion 311 is connected to the end side portion 314 by a movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 rotates. As a result, rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 occurs and rotation of the rotating body 313 is hindered, and the movable part may be worn or damaged due to rattling or wobbling.

  On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 is stably displaced in a state in which rattling or wobbling of the main body 311 is suppressed. be able to. As a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed. In particular, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered with respect to the rotation center as in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 50), the configuration of this embodiment is effective.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD cause the insertion member 8642 to be inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b by displacing the displacement member 310 to the displacement end (upward position or downward position). Thus, the movable mechanism is fixed. In other words, the movable mechanism is fixed using the displacement (up and down) of the displacement member 310 (the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposing surfaces of the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b), so that the driving means for fixing the movable mechanism The drive motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) the displacement member 310 can also be used as drive means for causing the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. 55 and 56 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 9331 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 55 corresponds to the state of FIG. 26 and FIG. 56 corresponds to the state of FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined) to the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, so that the second rack Although the movement of the posture of 364 is suppressed, the magnetic force of the magnets 9652a to 9652e is applied to the second rack 364 of the ninth embodiment in a direction that is not parallel to (inclined to) the direction of the linear motion. Thus, the violence of the posture is suppressed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the back base 9331 has a main body portion formed in a vertically long shape and an overhang projecting laterally from the lower end of the main body portion, as in the first embodiment. A metal rod 9651 is disposed on the side of the main body portion (on the protruding direction side of the protruding portion). The metal rod 9651 is a metal rod-like body, and is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction thereof is along the linear motion direction of the second rack 364.

  The second rack 364 is provided with a plurality of magnets 9651a to 9562e on the side facing the metal bar 9651 provided on the back surface base 9331, and the metal bar 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e are provided. It is formed to attract by magnetic force. That is, the second rack 364 is given (acted) with a magnetic force in a direction in which the lower end side is biased toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (the left side in FIG. 55).

  Therefore, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the tooth surface of the second rack 364 can be brought close to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a, so that the gap between these tooth surfaces can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag when the driving force is transmitted from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth surfaces, and the responsiveness can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the tooth surface from being accelerated or damaged by the collision between the tooth surfaces immediately after transmitting the driving force from the stopped state (initial stage of meshing). Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing (meshing) state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained.

  In the first embodiment in which the urging spring 366 is formed as a coil spring, deterioration (sagging) occurs due to the repeated operation of the second rack 364, and the urging force is changed. For example, since the urging force applied to the second rack 364 uses the magnetic force of the magnet, a stable urging force can be applied to the second rack 364 over a long period of time.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the magnets 9652a to 9652e are all opposed to the metal rod 9651 in a state where the second rack 364 is positioned at the lowermost part of the movable range as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the state where the second rack 364 is positioned at the uppermost position of the movable range as shown in FIG. 56, all the magnets 9652a to 9651e are retracted to positions where they do not face the metal rod 9651.

  For this reason, the second rack 364 rises from the position located at the lowest position of the movable range shown in FIG. 55 to the first position (position where the head magnet 9562a and the metal rod 9651 are kept facing each other) (hereinafter referred to as “first”). In one period, since all the magnets 9652a to 9562e face the metal rod 9651, a constant magnetic force can be applied to the second rack 364.

  A period (hereinafter referred to as “second period”) in which the second rack 364 rises from the first position to the second position (a position where the facing magnet 9562e and the metal rod 9651 face each other) breaks down. With the displacement (rise), the number (area) of the magnets 9652a to 9651e facing the metal rod 9651 is gradually reduced, so that the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be gradually reduced.

  During the period in which the second rack 364 rises from the second position to the position at the top of the movable range shown in FIG. 56 (hereinafter referred to as “third period”), all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651. Therefore, a state in which almost no magnetic force is applied to the second rack 364 can be formed.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be applied while adjusting the magnitude to be suitable for the state of the second rack 364. Specifically, in the first period when the driving of the second pinion 365a by the second rack 364 is started, a larger magnetic force (a magnetic force exceeding a reference value) is applied to the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is It is difficult to rattle and suppresses the occurrence of the posture fluctuation (stabilizes the transmission of the driving force to the second pinion 365a), while the second rack 364 starts to drive the second pinion 365a. In the third period after entering the stable state, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 is reduced (below the reference value) or not applied, so that the magnetic force is driven by the second rack 364. Thus, the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the second period is provided between the first period and the third period, it is possible to avoid a sudden change (decrease) in the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364, and gradually Since it can be decreased, the transition from the first period to the third period can be performed smoothly, and the posture of the second rack 364 can be stabilized.

  In addition, the arrangement object (the back base 331, the second rack 364) of the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e may be reversed. Further, instead of the metal rod 9651, a magnet may be provided. When a magnet is provided, the magnetic force in the attracting direction may be used, or the magnetic force in the repulsive direction may be used. Also by these, the same effect as the case of this embodiment is acquired.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L in the tenth embodiment, and shows an exploded state. FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b) are rear perspective views of the other side member 320L, showing the assembled state. 57 and 58, the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 are not shown. FIG. 58A shows a state before the roller 10367 is mounted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the one end of the urging spring 366 and the locking portion of the second rack 364 are locked after the rear base 331 is covered with the intermediate base 332 has been described. One end of the biasing spring 366 in the form is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 before the rear base 331 is covered with the intermediate base 332. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, in the tenth embodiment, a slit portion 10331e having a substantially J-shape in front view extends on the back base 10331 at a portion where the extension lines of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d intersect each other. Established. The slit portion 10331e starts from a portion opened at the side edge of the back surface base 10331, and is folded back into a U shape at the end of a portion (first guide portion) extending linearly as a groove having a constant width. It is formed as a slit in which the end of the portion (second guide portion) extending in a straight line is terminated.

  The intermediate base 10332 has a lower side wall on the inner side of the bent portion (the portion where the main body portion and the overhanging portion intersect) than in the first embodiment, and is attached in the assembly process. Interference with the spring 366 is suppressed.

  The roller 10367 is formed in a disc shape and is arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, and the first flange portion 10367a, the second flange portion 10367b, and the third flange portion 10367c, and the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange. A cylindrical shaft portion 10367d that connects between the portions 10367b, and a cylindrical contact portion 10367e that connects between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c, and these portions 10367a to 10367e are concentric. It is integrally formed with the posture.

  The shaft portion 10367d is a portion that is inserted into the slit portion 10331e of the back surface base 10331 and is rotatably held (axially supported) at the end of the slit portion 10331e, and has an outer diameter equal to the groove width of the slit portion 10331e. Or a slightly smaller dimension is set. The abutting portion 10367e is a portion that forms a bent posture of the urging spring 366 by abutting the outer peripheral surface between one end and the other end of the urging spring 366.

  The facing interval between the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the plate thickness of the back base 10331, and the facing interval between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c is energized. The size is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the spring 366. Therefore, as will be described later, when the shaft portion 10367 is inserted into the slit portion 10331e, the back base 10331 is sandwiched between the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b and the roller 10367 in the axial direction. Movement is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 in the tenth embodiment is performed by mounting a drive motor 341 on the front surface of the intermediate base 10332 as in the case of the first embodiment. On the back surface of the intermediate base 332, gears 362a to 362e are mounted on the gear shafts 332c to 332g, a crank gear 363 is mounted on the gear shaft 332h, and a transmission gear 365 is mounted on the gear shaft 332i (for the gear shafts 332c to 332i). 22), the second rack 364 is disposed in a state where the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted into the rack groove 364b and the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365 is engaged.

  Next, in the tenth embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 and the other end is locked to the locking portion formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion of the intermediate base 332. Lock. In this case, in this embodiment, since the biasing spring 366 is set to be in a no-load state (a state in which the free length is maintained), both ends of the biasing spring 366 are locked. However, this state can be stably maintained.

  In this way, after the state in which the transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 10332 (the state shown in FIG. 57) is formed, the front surface of the rear base 10331 faces the back surface of the intermediate base 10332, and both are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 58 (a)), and finally, by attaching the roller 10367 to the slit portion 10331e of the back surface base 10331 (see FIG. 58 (b)), the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back surface base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 is completed. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the rear base 10331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 10332, it is constructed so as to be bridged between both bent portions (between the main body portion and the overhanging portion). Since the biasing spring 366 is projected, the biasing spring 366 is sandwiched between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c of the roller 10367, and the shaft portion 10367d of the roller 10367 is inserted into the slit portion 10331 of the rear base 10331. The roller 10367 is pushed into the folded portion of the slit portion 10331. As a result, the biasing spring 366 is extended and bent, so that the roller 10367 is pressed against the end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 366 as shown in FIG. can do.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the biasing spring 366 is disposed in a bent posture by displacing the roller 10367 while abutting between the one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366. As a result, the assembly work of the biasing spring 366 can be facilitated. That is, the biasing spring 366 is bent while the back surface base 10331 is covered with the intermediate base 10332 (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the back surface base 10331). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the urging spring 366 from being flipped and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, it is possible to easily perform the work of assembling the biasing spring 366 in the bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 can be used not only as the urging force of the second rack 364 but also as the holding force for holding the roller 10367, so that the roller 10367 is held. There is no need to separately prepare a member (for example, a fastening screw), and it is not necessary to perform a fastening operation. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, the roller 10367 is rotatably held by the shaft portion 10367d being pressed against the end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 366. Therefore, it is not necessary to project a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the roller 10367 from the back surface base 10331 or the intermediate base 10332. Therefore, since it is not necessary to cover the back base 10331 on the intermediate base 10332 while inserting the shaft-like body through the roller 10367 (see FIG. 32), it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly work. .

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are urged by separate urging springs 366 has been described. The second rack 364 of the side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R are biased by one biasing spring 11366. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has one end locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. The biasing spring 11366 is provided. The biasing spring 11366 is disposed in a symmetrical manner by the roller 11661 being brought into contact with the center position between one end and the other end thereof.

  In addition, the projecting tip of the projecting portion of the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R is notched, and the biasing spring 11366 is installed on the interposed member 11370 through the notched portion. . In addition, the roller 1161 is rotatably disposed on the interposed member 11370, and the interposed member 11370 is positioned such that the lower portion where the urging spring 11366 is installed is recessed in the front side (the back side in FIG. 59). The urging spring 11366 can be disposed in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface of FIG. 59) from one end to the other end.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the second rack 364 of the one-side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other-side member 320R are urged by separate urging springs 366 (see FIG. 19). Due to individual differences of the biasing springs 366 (variations in characteristics due to dimensions, materials, etc.), the magnitude of the biasing force applied to each second rack 364 varies. This causes variations in the posture of each second rack 364 and affects the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism, so that the displacement member 310 is guided and driven by the one side member 320L. This causes a difference (displacement) between the guidance and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 320R. As described above, such a shift makes it difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310, and increases the load of each drive motor 341, and also causes the displacement member 310 to stop.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 11366 is locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end is locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. That is, since it is urged by one urging spring 11366, the urging force applied to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R can be made uniform. . Thus, variation in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed and transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform, so that the displacement member 310 can be guided and driven by the one side member 11320L. Further, the guiding and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

  In addition, the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332 in the eleventh embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 are connected to the locking portion of the second rack 364. The transmission mechanism is mounted on the intermediate base 332 (see FIG. 32), and the rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332, and between the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. By interposing the interposing member 11370, and then locking one end and the other end of the urging spring 11366 to the engaging portion of each second rack 364 via the first opening 331 c of each back surface base 331. Can be implemented. That is, also in this embodiment, the biasing spring 11366 can be easily disposed in a bent posture while suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being flipped and the second rack 364 from falling off. Work efficiency can be improved.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. 60 and 61 are rear views of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment. 60, the state before the interposed member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R is the same as that in FIG. 61, and the interposed member 12370 is between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. The state after the interposition is illustrated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the interposed member 370 is fastened and fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R by a screw via the connecting plate 371 is described. However, the interposed member 370 of the twelfth embodiment is The urging force of the urging spring 12366 is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment, the engaged portions 12331f are respectively provided in the opposing surface sides of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and the respective engaged portions. Engaging portions 12372 that can engage with the portion 12331f protrude from both ends of the interposed member 12370. The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed by bending in a substantially L shape when viewed from the back.

  Further, a locking portion 12373 for locking the other end of the biasing spring 366 is formed on the back surface of the interposed member 12370, and the protruding tip at the protruding portion of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R is The other end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposed member 12370 through the notched portion.

  In addition, the interposed member 12370 is formed as a flat surface in which the region from the locking portion 12373 to the side edge is recessed in the front side (the back side in FIG. 60), and thereby the biasing spring 366 is moved from one end thereof. The entire arrangement up to the other end can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface of FIG. 60).

  The assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment is performed as follows. First, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the back surface base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are assembled. In this case, contrary to the case of the first embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, while the other end is unlocked, and the transmission mechanism is mounted. The back base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332 in the state (see FIG. 32).

  Thereby, the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are formed in the state shown in FIG. 60. Next, the engaging portion 12372 of the interposed member 12370 is engaged with the engaged side of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. The interposing member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R while being engaged with the portion 12331f, and finally, each biasing spring 366 is interposed via the first opening 331c of each back surface base 331. The other end is respectively engaged with the engaging portion 12373 of the interposed member 12370. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61, the assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 is completed.

  According to the present embodiment, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are disposed between the intermediate base 332 and the rear base 331 facing each other (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 331. ), The other end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposed member 12370, so that the urging spring 366 is prevented from being repelled and the second rack 364 is prevented from falling off. However, the biasing spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, each biasing spring 366 is arranged in a posture in which it is inclined downward from the roller 367 (see FIG. 23) toward the locked portion 12373 of the interposed member 2370. Therefore, the force component in the direction to draw the interposed member 12370 toward the left and right (the one side member 320L side and the other side member 320R side) and the direction in which the interposed member 12370 is pushed upward (to the displacement member 310 side) The force component can be applied to the interposed member 12370.

  Accordingly, the urging force of the urging spring 366 presses the engaging portion 12372 of the interposed member 12370 against the engaged portion 12331f of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and thus the one side member 320L and the other side member. The state where the interposed member 12370 is interposed between 320R can be maintained. As a result, the interposition member 12370 is held by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (that is, at least until the interposition member 12370 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 10) of the rear case 210). Fixed). Therefore, handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the back case 210 can be facilitated, and workability in the transport process and the attachment process can be improved.

  Furthermore, the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed in a substantially L shape in the back view, and the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R, and the interposition member 12370 include the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion. Since they are coupled by the engagement of 12331f, it is possible to prevent the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R from being deformed into a “C” shape when viewed from the front with respect to the displacement member 310. Therefore, also in this point, handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the back case 210 can be facilitated, and workability in the transport process and the attachment process can be improved.

  In addition, the biasing force of the biasing spring 363 is not only applied to the second rack 364 but also serves as a fixing force for fixing to the interposed member 12370 between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. In addition, members (for example, the connecting shaft 332m, the connecting plate 371, and screws for fastening them) for fixing to the interposed member 12370 on the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R can be eliminated, and the number of parts and assembly accordingly. Man-hours can be reduced.

  The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are engaged in a state having a predetermined shakiness due to the dimensional tolerance. That is, since the relative displacement of the interposed member 12370 with respect to the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R can be allowed by the amount of rattling, when attaching the vertical slide unit 12300 to the bottom plate portion 211 of the rear case 210, The attachment positions of the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R, and the interposed member 12370 can be individually adjusted, and the workability during the attachment can be improved.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (a) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c) schematically show how the biasing spring 366 changes its posture. It is a back surface schematic diagram of other side member 13320R to show in figure.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disposition position of the roller 367 for setting the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture is fixed at a predetermined position, but the roller 10367 in the thirteenth embodiment is disposed at the disposition position. Is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the other side member 10320R in the tenth embodiment except that a telescopic actuator 13671 is added. Therefore, the description about the same structure is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), a telescopic actuator 13671 is disposed on the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment. The telescopic actuator 13671 includes a main body portion 13671a, a rod portion 13671b held by the main body portion 13671a, and a drive mechanism (not shown) for moving the rod portion 13671b forward or backward (extends or shortens) with respect to the main body portion 13671a. The main body portion 13671a is fixed to the back surface of the back surface base 331, and the roller 10367 is rotatably connected to the tip of the rod portion 13671b.

  In this case, the expansion / contraction actuator 13671 is disposed in a posture in which the expansion / contraction direction (the axial direction of the rod portion 13671b) is along the straight line portion from the folded portion to the end of the slit portion 10331e. Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671, the rod portion 13671b is expanded and contracted, so that the roller 10367 has a terminal end of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. 62B and a folded portion of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. Can be displaced between.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 10367 for contacting the urging spring 366 and forming the bent posture of the urging spring 366 is determined by the expansion / contraction of the rod portion 13671b by the expansion / contraction actuator 13671. It can be changed by operation. Thereby, since the bending state of the biasing spring 366 can be adjusted, the state of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 (for example, the magnitude of the biasing or the biasing direction) is, for example, The second rack 364 can be adjusted according to the state (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position).

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened to preload the urging spring 366 (in the assembled state, it is applied to the urging spring 366). The apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be increased by increasing the load), while the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended as shown in FIG. 62 (b) to preload the biasing spring 366. Thus, the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be reduced.

  Thus, for example, when the displacement member 310 is stopped at the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased, and the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 at the raised position is increased by the biasing spring 366. While assisting by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (raised or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is decreased to reduce the biasing spring 366. It can suppress that urging | biasing force becomes resistance at the time of displacing the displacement member 310 (2nd rack 364).

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 and the second rack 364 are reduced. While the angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the linear motion can be reduced (becomes parallel), the biasing spring 366 is extended by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 as shown in FIG. 62 (b). The angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the urging force applied to the second rack and the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, in the initial stage in the transitional state in which the displacement of the second rack 364 is started, the behavior of the second rack 364 becomes unstable, so that the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced. A steady state in which the inclination angle is increased (ie, brought closer to the state shown in FIG. 62B) to suppress the occurrence of the posture of the second rack 364 and the displacement speed of the second rack 364 reaches a constant level. At this stage, since the behavior of the second rack 364 is stabilized, the inclination angle of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced (closer to parallel) to reduce the resistance. Thus, the energy required for driving the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63A is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300. 63A shows a state where the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, and FIG. 63B shows a state where the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the posture of the biasing spring 11366 is maintained constant has been described. However, the posture of the biasing spring 11366 in the thirteenth embodiment is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment is different from the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment in that a telescopic actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14661 are added, and a roller 11661 is a rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671. The other configuration is the same except that it is disposed at the tip of the. Therefore, the description about the same structure is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the vertical slide unit 14300 according to the fourteenth embodiment is provided with an extendable actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14662.

  The telescopic actuator 13671 is disposed in the center of the biasing spring 11366 in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 63 (a)) in the rear view shown in FIG. 63 (a), and its expansion / contraction direction (axial direction of the rod portion 13671b). ) In the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 63A) (that is, the posture along the symmetry line of the biasing spring 11366).

  In the present embodiment, the roller 11661 is rotatably disposed at the tip of the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671, while the left and right rollers 14662 are rotatably disposed on the back surface of the interposed member 11370.

  Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671, the rod portion 13671b is expanded and contracted, so that the roller 11661 is aligned with the left and right rollers 14662 in the left and right direction (FIG. 63 (a) left and right direction) as shown in FIG. 63 (a). As shown in FIG. 63 (c), it can be displaced between a position below the left and right rollers 14662 (lower side in FIG. 63 (a)).

  In the state shown in FIG. 63A in which the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, the urging spring 11366 extends from the left and right bent portions (see the roller 367, FIG. 23) to the contact portion with the roller 11661. A space is formed in a straight line.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 11661 in contact with the biasing spring 11366 can be changed by the expansion / contraction operation of the rod portion 13671b by the expansion / contraction actuator 13671. From the state of the urging force applied to the second rack 364 (for example, the magnitude of the urging force) according to, for example, the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position), Can be adjusted.

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to preload the urging spring 11366 (the load applied to the urging spring 11366 in the assembled state). The apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366 can be increased by reducing the preload of the biasing spring 11366 by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 as shown in FIG. Thus, the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366 can be reduced.

  Thus, for example, when the displacement member 310 is stopped at the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased, and the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 at the raised position is increased by the biasing spring 366. While assisting by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (raised or lowered) (that is, when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is decreased to reduce the biasing spring 366. It can suppress that urging | biasing force becomes resistance at the time of displacing the displacement member 310 (2nd rack 364).

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the preload can be adjusted with respect to one urging spring 11366, and therefore, the change in the urging force due to such adjustment is caused by the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. The second rack 364 can be made uniform. Thus, variation in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed and transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform, so that the displacement member 310 can be guided and driven by the one side member 11320L. Further, the guiding and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 11320R can be made uniform, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the angle (inclination angle) formed by the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 11366 to each second rack 364 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 is not changed. Only the preload of the biasing spring 11366 can be adjusted (while maintaining a constant tilt angle). Thus, when adjusting the preload of the biasing spring 11366, the tilt angle (the direction in which the biasing force is applied) is changed in accordance with the adjustment, and the posture of the second rack 364 is caused by the change in the tilt angle. Can be avoided.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the back base 15331 in the fifteenth embodiment and corresponds to FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the gear shaft 331b arranged to face the second pinion 365a is inserted into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is attached to the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In the fifteenth embodiment, the first restricting portion 15331g arranged to face the second pinion 365a is brought into contact with the side surface of the second rack 15364. The second rack 15364 can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the second rack 15364 of the transmission mechanism in the fifteenth embodiment includes the side surface on the side where the rack is formed (the side surface on the second pinion 365a side) and the side opposite to the side surface (the left side in FIG. 64). ) Are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the tooth surfaces of the rack. Specifically, the side surfaces on both sides of the second rack 15364 are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other at least in a range where a first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of second restricting portions 15331h, which will be described later, come into contact with each other.

  A first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of left and right second restricting portions 15331h are projected from the front surface of the back base 15331. The first restricting portion 15331g is a part that abuts on the side surface (the left side surface in FIG. 64) of the second rack 15364 to define its posture, and faces the axis of the second pinion 365a with the second rack 15364 interposed therebetween. It is disposed at a position (a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the back base 15331 and the intermediate base 332) and is formed as a cylindrical body having a circular cross section. Specifically, the arrangement position of the first restricting portion 15331g is a position where the direction connecting the axis of the first restricting portion 15331g and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is orthogonal to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 15364. Set to

  The second restricting portion 15331h is a portion for restricting displacement of the second rack 15364 in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 64), and a pair is formed at a predetermined interval, and each has a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. Formed as a body. The interval between the pair of second restricting portions 15331h (the interval in the left-right direction in FIG. 64) is larger than the width of the second rack 15364, and is formed to have a gap between the side surfaces of the second rack 15364.

  In this case, the amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 64) allowed by the second restricting portion 15331h is allowed between the first restricting portion 15331g and the second pinion 365a. The amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction) is larger. In addition, it is preferable that the difference of the allowable displacement amount is set to 1.5 times or more. This is because the displacement (rotation) of the second rack 15364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a can be reliably formed.

  With the above configuration, according to the present embodiment, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the second rack 15364 is displaced (rotated) along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a and moved in the direction of linear motion. It can be displaced (see FIG. 30). As a result, even when the posture of the second rack 15364 is unclear, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to open the rack groove 364b (see FIG. 26) in the second rack 15364 as in the case of the first embodiment. It is possible to secure rigidity and improve the durability. In addition, since the rack groove 364b can be omitted and the rigidity of the second rack 15364 is ensured in this way, deformation of the second rack 15364 when driven by the rotation of the second pinion 365a can be suppressed. From the point of view, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 and 66 are front views of the transmission mechanism and the back base 15331 in the sixteenth embodiment, and correspond to FIGS. 26 and 28, respectively.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed with a constant groove width along the longitudinal direction has been described, but the guide groove 634a of the second rack 16364 in the sixteenth embodiment is By forming the recess 16681, the groove width is enlarged in a part of the longitudinal direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the second rack 16364 of the transmission mechanism in the sixteenth embodiment has a recess 16681 on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (right side of FIGS. 65 and 66). It is recessed. The concave portion 16881 is a portion for restricting the linear movement of the second rack 16364, and can be formed as a concave portion that is curved in an arc shape that can be engaged with the rack shaft 331b at the upper end and the lower end of the guide groove 364a. . The inner diameter of the recess 16681 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rack shaft 331b.

  Note that the central angle of the arc of the recess 16681 is preferably set within a range of 30 ° to 120 °, and more preferably set within a range of 45 ° to 90 °. This is to achieve the contradictory functions of maintaining the engagement state between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and the ease of releasing the engagement.

  For example, in order to stop and hold the displacement member 310 at the raised position (see FIG. 25A), it is necessary to resist the gravity acting on the displacement member 310, and thus the drive required for the drive motor 341 is required. Power increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, as shown in FIG. 65, the second rack 16364 is arranged at the lowermost part of the movable range. The linear movement of the second rack 16364 can be restricted by engaging the rack shaft 331b with the recess 16681 at the lower end of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364. Thereby, the driving force required for the drive motor 341 can be reduced (or the drive thereof is stopped). As a result, energy consumption of the drive motor 341 when holding the displacement member 310 in the raised position can be suppressed.

  In the state where the displacement member 310 is disposed at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 66, the second rack 16364 is disposed at the top of the movable range, so that the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 is disposed. The rack shaft 331b can be engaged with the recess 16681 at the upper end of the second rack 16364 to restrict the linear motion of the second rack 16364. Thereby, it can suppress that the displacement member 310 arrange | positioned in the descending position shakes by the influence of a disturbance.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the recess 16681 is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (the right side in FIGS. 65 and 66) and is provided from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 16364. The direction of the urging force to be tilted (non-parallel) with respect to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 16364 is such that the direction of the tilt causes the second rack 16364 to rotate around the rack shaft 331b as shown in FIG. 66, the rack shaft 331b is engaged with the recess 16681 by rotating clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 66, so that the engagement of the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and the release thereof are performed by the second rack 16364. This can be done with linear motion.

  That is, when the second rack 16364 is displaced to the uppermost or lowermost part of the movable range, the concave portion 16681 faces the rack shaft 331b, and the second rack 16364 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. The rack shaft 331 b can be engaged (inserted) in the recess 16681, and the engagement between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331 b can be maintained by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. On the other hand, when the second pinion 365a is rotationally driven from this state, the second rack 16364 is rotated in the direction in which the rack shaft 331b is pulled out from the recess 16681 while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 366, and the recess 16681 The engagement with the rack shaft 331b is released. Thereby, the second rack 16364 can be linearly moved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a mechanism (linear motion regulating means) for regulating the straight movement of the second rack 16364 includes a guide groove 364a formed in the second rack 16364 and a rack inserted through the guide groove 364a. Since it is configured using the shaft 331b, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the second rack 16364, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the portion for guiding the second pinion 365a to be rotatable, the rack shaft 331b also serves as a portion constituting the linear motion restricting means (a portion that engages with the concave portion 16881). The number of points can be reduced to reduce the size and product cost.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 17440L1 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 67 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the annular divided body 17440R1 in the seventh embodiment. 67 (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the annular divided body 17440L1 along the line LXVIIc-LXVIIc in FIG. 67 (a), and FIG. 67 (d) is a circle along the line LXVIId-LXVIId in FIG. 67 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of ring division body 17440R1. 67 (a) and 67 (b) correspond to FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the two-stage positioning mechanism is configured by providing the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a on the tip of the positioning convex portion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning concave portion 492 has been described. In the seventeenth embodiment, a ball plunger mechanism 17495 is disposed on the tip of the positioning convex portion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning concave portion 492. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (d), the positioning mechanism in the seventeenth embodiment protrudes from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440R1 as in the first embodiment. The positioning convex portion 491 and a positioning concave portion 492 that is recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440L1 as a concave portion that can receive the positioning convex portion 491 are provided. A recessed portion 17493a is recessed in the installation bottom surface 17493, and a ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 protrudes from the protruding front end surface of the positioning projection 491.

  The recess 17493a is formed as a spherical recess, and is formed so that the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be engaged therewith. In other words, the diameter of the spherical surface of the recess 17493a is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495. The recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recess 17493a.

  The recess 17493a and the ball 17495a are engaged with each other in the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are brought into contact with each other (concave fitting), thereby performing final positioning. It is a part. The dimension in which the ball 17495a projects from the projecting tip surface of the positioning convex part 491 is set to be smaller than the concave depth of the positioning concave part 492.

  Thereby, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning is performed with a relatively coarse positioning accuracy (relative displacement tolerance is relatively wide) by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, when the projecting tip of the positioning convex portion 491 is reliably received in the positioning concave portion 492 and the subsequent guidance to the proper positioning position can be performed smoothly, the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. In the final stage, the ball 17495a is engaged with the recess 17493a to improve positioning accuracy, to properly form the annular shape, and to reliably prevent rattling and wobbling after the annular shape is formed. Two-stage positioning is possible.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the second stage of the positioning mechanism is a structure in which the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is engaged with the recess 17493a provided in the recessed bottom surface 17493. In the second stage of positioning when the bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the ring formation position, the ball 17495a can be rolled on the concave bottom surface 17493. As a result, the positioning convex portion 491 is formed in the positioning concave portion 492. The operation until the ball 17495a is engaged with the recess 17493 can be smoothly performed after being received, and the engagement between the ball 17495a and the recess 17493 is released. Performed smoothly with the movement of 17440R1 to the retracted position Rukoto can.

  In this case, since the recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recessed portion 17493a, the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be guided to the recessed portion 1793a along the recessed bottom surface 17493. These balls 17495a can be reliably engaged with the depressions 17493a.

  Further, even when the annular divided bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the annular formation position, even if the protruding tip of the positioning convex portion 491 collides with the concave bottom surface 17493 of the positioning concave portion 492, the ball plunger mechanism 17495 The ball 17495a can be brought into contact with the concave bottom surface 17493, and the spring can be elastically deformed to absorb the impact in accordance with the retracting operation of the ball 17495a.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 69 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400.

  68 and 69 correspond to a front view and a rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in a state where they are attached to the back case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operation unit 200). In FIG. 68, the vertical slide unit 18300 and the annular forming unit 18400 are partially cut by virtual planes passing through the center of the plate thickness direction (perpendicular to FIG. 69) of the posture defining member 18450 in the annular forming unit 18400. Corresponds to a sectional view.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 300 and the annular ring forming unit 400 are not in contact with each other except for the portion attached to the back case 210 has been described. In the eighteenth embodiment, the vertical slide unit 18300 The annular forming unit 18400 can be partially contacted. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the vertical slide unit 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment, except that the diameter dimension of the rotation base 18312 is increased. On the other hand, the ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment is different from the ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in the shape of the side edge of the posture defining member 18450 facing the rotation base 18312 (the rotation base). The other configuration is the same except that the holding portion 18453 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the outer periphery of the 18312. In the following, description of these same configurations is omitted. Note that the holding portion 18453 is curved in an arc shape concentric with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 in the rear view.

  As shown in FIGS. 68A and 68B, after the vertical slide unit 18300 arranges the displacement member 310 in the middle between the raised position and the lowered position, the annular forming unit 18400 is changed to the annular divided body 440L1. When ˜440R2 is arranged at the annular formation position, an annular shape is formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2, and a rotary body 313 having a circular shape in front view is formed at a predetermined interval on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape. It is arranged concentrically. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the annular shape.

  In this case, since a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) is interposed in the displacement member 310, both ends of the main body portion 311 are connected to the end side portion 314. It is supported in a state where it can move freely. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side part 314 of the main body 311 occurs with the rotation, so that the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (annular divided body). 440L1 to 440R2) collide with the inner peripheral surface and cause damage. In addition, when the gravity center position G of the rotating body 6313 is decentered from the rotation center as in the case of the sixth embodiment described above, the problem of damage due to collision becomes particularly significant.

  On the other hand, if a gap is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape and the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 313 so as not to collide, the effect of the effect of rotating the rotator 313 surrounded by the annular shape is achieved. Cannot fully demonstrate. Further, even when the rotating body 313 does not collide with the annular shape (annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2), the rotation of the rotating body 313 causes rattling and wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body 311. If it continues, wear of a movable part (for example, protruding pin 311a or long hole 314a) will be caused.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 of the vertical slide unit 18300 is disposed between the raised position and the lowered position, and the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 of the annular formation unit 18400 are arranged at the annular formation position. When the rotating body 313 is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape, a pair of annular forming units 18400 that are slid and displaced in the left-right direction (directions close to each other) by the suspension mechanism 450 are formed. The posture defining member 18450 brings the holding portion 18453 into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 of the vertical slide unit 18300, and sandwiches the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions as shown in FIG.

  Accordingly, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 can be held by the ring forming unit 18400, so that the relative displacement between the main body 311 and the end side 314 can be restricted (movable mechanism is fixed). . As a result, even if the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 311 from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, whereby the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 has an annular shape (circular shape). Collision with the inner peripheral surface of the ring divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2) and the wear and damage of the movable part (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) can be suppressed.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 in the displacement member 310 is projected along the major axis direction (left and right direction in FIG. 69) of the elongated hole 314a in the end side portion 314. When the installation pin 311a is slid, as described above, the pair of posture defining members 18450 are slid in the left-right direction, and the holding portion 18453 of the pair of posture defining members 18450 is moved to the vertical slide unit 18300. 69, the main body 311 of the displacement member 310 is held (relative displacement with the end side portion 314 is restricted) by sandwiching the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions as shown in FIG.

  Therefore, the projecting pin 311a can be displaced along the elongated hole 314a, that is, the rattling or wobbling factor with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 can be efficiently regulated. As a result, the force required for holding the main body 311 (restriction of relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 314) can be further reduced, and rattling and wobble can be reliably suppressed.

  Further, in this case, the posture defining member 18450 that sandwiches the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left and right directions is supported by the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 extending in the left and right directions, as shown in FIG. The holding force in the direction (left-right direction) in which 311 is relatively displaced with respect to the end side portion 314 can be increased. Also from this point, rattling and wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311 can be reliably suppressed. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an annular formation unit 18400 is provided that performs an effect by forming an annular shape by arranging the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position to the annular formation position, and the annular formation unit. The relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is regulated (the movable mechanism is fixed) by using an operation performed for the effect that the 18400 forms an annular shape. That is, the relative displacement can be restricted in association with the operation for the effect, and there is no need to separately provide a mechanism and a driving means for restricting the relative displacement. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment.

  70 corresponds to a front view and a rear view of the up / down slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in a state of being attached to the back case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operation unit 200). FIG. 70 is a partial view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the annular forming unit 19400 by a virtual plane passing through the center in the plate thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 70) of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 in the annular forming unit 19400. This corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the vertical displacement unit 18300 and the annular ring forming unit 18400 are directly brought into contact with each other to restrict the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 324 has been described. The nineteenth embodiment Then, the relative displacement with respect to the end side part 324 of the main-body part 311 is controlled, making the up-and-down slide unit 19300 and the ring formation unit 19400 non-contact. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Here, the vertical slide unit 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment is different from the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment except that a plurality of magnets 1991 are disposed (added) on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313. Other configurations are the same. On the other hand, the annular forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment is the inner peripheral side of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313) with respect to the annular forming unit 400 in the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same except that a plurality of metal plates 1992 are provided (added). In the following, description of these same configurations is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in the nineteenth embodiment, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) magnets 1991 disposed on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313 are positioned at an equal distance from the rotation center of the rotating body 313. Are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  On the other hand, a plurality (four in this embodiment) of metal plates 1992 disposed on the inner peripheral side (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313) of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are made of a metal material, It is formed as a flat plate-like body that is curved in an arc shape along an annular inner peripheral surface formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. That is, each metal plate 1992 forms an annular shape in front view that is concentric with the rotating body 313.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 313 is generated by the magnetic force that acts between the magnet 1991 disposed on the rotating body 313 and the metal plate 1992 disposed on the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. It is possible to regulate the displacement in the radial direction in any direction. That is, the rotating body 313 can be held at a position (center on the inner peripheral side) that is concentric with the annular shape formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the outer peripheral surface of the rotator 313 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape (the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2). Moreover, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, it can suppress that the main-body part 311 shakes or wobbles with respect to the end side part 314, Thereby, a movable part (for example, the projecting pin 311a and the elongate hole 314a) is suppressed. Wear and damage can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the metal plate 1992 is continuous over substantially the entire circumference, and the magnets 1991 are arranged at intervals of 90 ° in the circumferential direction, so that the positions where the magnetic force acts are arranged opposite to each other (the phases are different by 180 °). The rotating body 313 can be restrained from four directions. Therefore, not only the displacement (rattle or wobble) can be suppressed in any direction, but also the rotating body 313 with respect to the annular shape (inner peripheral surface) formed by the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2. When the relative positions of are not aligned, it is possible to perform centering to position the rotating body 313 concentrically with respect to the annular shape.

  Further, as in the case of the eighteenth embodiment, the rotating body 313 is held on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape by using an operation performed for the effect that the annular shape forming unit 19400 forms an annular shape. (The relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted), and it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism or driving means for holding the rotating body 313 (relative displacement restriction). Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  For example, when the configuration is one engagement member 12331R of the one side member 12320R, 12320L in the twelfth embodiment and the engagement structure 12372 of the interposition member 12370 and the urging spring 11366 in the eleventh embodiment. You may comprise a gaming machine combining with the structure to perform.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the biasing spring 366 has a substantially “<” shape when viewed from the front has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The posture may be an approximately “S” shape or a substantially “J” shape when viewed from the front, or may be a combination of these. That is, the bent posture of the urging spring 366 may be any shape as long as it is formed by bending or bending the coil spring at one or a plurality of locations.

  In each of the above embodiments, the oblong hole 314a formed in the end side portion 314 is formed in an oblong shape in front view in which the semicircles on both sides are connected by a straight line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The shape may also be That is, as long as the projecting pin 311a is formed to be displaceable, for example, the projecting pin 311a may be formed to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front, or may be bent into a "<" shape when viewed from the front, These may be formed in combination.

  In each of the above embodiments, the upper and lower slide units 300 are arranged in such a posture that the displacement member 310 is displaced along the direction of gravity (vertical direction). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member 310 is horizontal. The displacement member 310 may be disposed in a posture that is displaced along a direction (orthogonal to the gravitational direction). The displacement member 310 is disposed in a posture that is displaced along a direction inclined with respect to the gravity direction (vertical direction). May be. Even if it is these attitude | positions, the effect similar to the above can be acquired.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the contact surfaces of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 and 17440L1 to 17440R2 are contacted with a locus of circular motion while maintaining a posture parallel to the other contact surface. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, for example, it may be close to each other while changing the parallelism with respect to the contact surface of the opponent, and finally contact in a parallel posture, or Maintaining a posture parallel to the contact surface of the other party, approaching each other by a linear motion in a non-perpendicular direction with respect to the contact surface, and finally contacting in a parallel posture Also good.

  In the first embodiment, the relative displacement amount between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted to a predetermined range by the contact of the stopper surfaces 311a and 314a. Alternatively, in addition to this, the projecting pin 311a may be in contact with the end of the elongated hole 314a, so that the relative displacement amount between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 may be regulated within a predetermined range. .

  In the first embodiment, in assembling the transmission mechanism to the back base 331 and the intermediate base 332, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c. The other end of the biasing spring 366 may be locked to the intermediate base 332 via the second opening 331d.

  In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the displacement members 4310 and 5310 are driven by the drive motor 341 of the one side member 320L. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member 4310 is driven by the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R. , 5310 may be driven. That is, although the movable mechanism side where the slide displacement is allowed or the rubber hardness is low (soft) is set as the drive side, the movable mechanism side where only the rotation is allowed or the rubber hardness is high (hard) is set as the drive side. It is also good.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack and the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364 by the expansion / contraction operation of the expansion / contraction actuator 13671 are the same. While the angle (inclination angle) formed by these two directions is increased or decreased, the inclination direction may be reversed. For example, when the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to a predetermined position, the direction of the inclination is rightward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 62B), and when the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened from this state, A state in which there is no inclination (that is, a state in which the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack coincides with the direction of the linear movement of the second rack 364, for example, as shown in FIG. A state in which the direction of the inclination is leftward through the state) is illustrated. Accordingly, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging spring 366 to the second rack 364 is changed (reversed) according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). Adjustments can be made.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the side surface of the second rack 15364 (the surface on the left side in FIG. 64) is formed as a flat surface, and the engagement between the side surface of the second rack 15364 and the first restricting portion 15331g is not formed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and a recess (for example, corresponding to the recess 16681 in the sixteenth embodiment) that can be engaged with the first restricting portion 15331g is formed on the side surface of the second rack 15364. good. Accordingly, as in the case of the sixteenth embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 15364 can be restricted, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a as an example>
One side member and other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member are respectively guided between the one side member and the other side member and are guided between the one side member and the other side member. A gaming machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, comprising a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable, the movable mechanism being connected to one end side of the displacement member and the other A gaming machine A1 that is provided at least at one point between the end side.

  Here, the one side member and the other side member that are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval, a long displacement member that is installed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force applied to the displacement member. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine provided with a driving means for giving is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, one side member is formed to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Thus, the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

  However, as in the above-described gaming machine, in the structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member is guided separately to the one side member and the other side in the longitudinal direction to the other side member, respectively, the guidance by the one side member and the other side member There is a problem that a deviation easily occurs between the guide and the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guide by the one-side member and the guide by the other-side member, not only will the load of the driving means be excessive, but the displacement member may be stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a movable mechanism that can be deformed is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Even when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving unit and stop of the displacement member.

  The direction of displacement of the displacement member is not limited, and the displacement member may be displaced along the vertical direction (direction in which gravity acts), or may be displaced along a horizontal direction orthogonal to the vertical direction. Alternatively, it may be displaced along an inclination direction between the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Further, as the deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, for example, when a difference occurs in the guide speed of the displacement member between the one side member side and the other side member side or the displacement member Examples include a case where a difference occurs in the guide direction (phase), or a case where a difference occurs between the two. Since the same applies to the following, the description thereof is omitted.

  In the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed to include a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including the guide groove and the guided portion guided along the guide groove. Therefore, the structure of the movable mechanism is simplified. Can be Further, since the movable amount and the movable direction of the movable mechanism can be arbitrarily set according to the shape (contour) of the guide groove, it is suitable for the mode of deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. Easy to configure a movable mechanism.

  The guide groove may be a through hole or a concave groove as long as the guided portion can be guided by its inner wall surface. Moreover, the guided part should just be the shape which can be displaced in a guide groove, or can rotate (for example), for example, the cross-sectional circle, the cross-sectional polygon, or the rod-shaped body of a cross-section ellipse is illustrated. The guide groove may allow only the guided portion to rotate. That is, the guide groove is not limited to a linear shape, a curved shape, or a shape that is a combination thereof, and may be formed in a circular shape or a polygon shape that allows only the guided portion to rotate. good.

  In the gaming machine A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the guide groove of the movable mechanism is formed in an elongated hole shape in a direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the guide groove of the movable mechanism is a long slot that is long in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member (that is, the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member). Since it is formed in a shape, it is easy to displace the guided part along the guide groove (it is easy to be guided), and the displacement generated between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member is effective by the movable mechanism. Can be absorbed into.

  The groove width of the guide groove (the width in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole shape) is preferably approximately equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guided portion. The direction in which the guided portion is displaced (guided) along the guide groove can be restricted to the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, and the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be controlled. This is because absorption by the movable mechanism can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine A3, the movable mechanism is formed with a plurality of the guide grooves.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the movable mechanism is formed with a plurality of long slot-shaped guide grooves in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. Can be secured, and rattling and wobbling when the displacement member is displaced can be suppressed.

  If the plurality of guide grooves are elongated holes in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, the start and end positions of each guide groove are along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. Each may be different. That is, as long as each guide groove is formed in parallel to each other, the arrangement position may be different along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including a ball joint including a spherical ball portion and a socket portion in spherical contact with the ball portion.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including a ball joint including a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that comes into spherical contact with the ball portion. It can be deformed, and the deviation generated between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be stably absorbed. In addition, since the movable mechanism can be deformed in all directions, the absorption can be performed regardless of the direction of the deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body. The movable mechanism can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the elastic body. Further, when the elastic body is made of an elastomer, the vibration of the movable mechanism (displacement member) can be converged at an early stage by utilizing the viscosity characteristic (attenuation effect), so that the above-described deviation can be suppressed. .

  Examples of the elastic body include elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethane, etc.) and elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.). In addition, a movable mechanism including a guide groove and a guided portion or a movable mechanism including a ball joint may be further provided with an elastic body. As a result, a function for returning to the initial position and a function for easily converging the vibration can be further added to the movable mechanism.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the movable mechanism includes a regulation unit that regulates deformation exceeding a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 is provided with regulating means for regulating deformation exceeding a predetermined amount, so between the guidance by one side member and the guidance by the other side member It is possible to prevent the movable mechanism from being excessively deformed when absorbing the generated deviation and being damaged.

  As the restricting means, when the movable mechanism includes a guide groove and a guided portion, the guided portion is restrained by the inner wall surface (for example, the end) of the guide groove, thereby restricting deformation of the movable mechanism beyond a predetermined amount. For example, a member that restricts deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more by contacting one and the other of the deformable members separated by the movable mechanism is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is provided at two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is interposed at two positions between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. When there is a deviation between the guidance by the other side member and the guidance by the other side member, one of the movable mechanisms interposed in two places is deformed according to the guidance state by the one side member and the other is the other side member Can be deformed in accordance with the guiding state by means of, and the absorption of the deviation can be reliably performed by the interlocking of both movable mechanisms. Therefore, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member, and as a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the driving means and stop of the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member has a deformation mode in which the one end side is driven by the driving means and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanisms interposed in the two places are different from each other. A gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive (the one side drive), so the drive Compared with a structure (two-sided drive) in which the number of means can be set to 1, and the number of drive means is set to 2 in order to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member, respectively. Can be reduced.

  In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the one end side (drive side) which is the driven side and the other end side (driven side) which is the driven side are different from each other. Where there is a tendency for deviation between the guide by the member and the guide by the other side member, according to the gaming machine A8, in each of the two movable mechanisms, the deformation mode suitable for the driving side and the deformation suitable for the driven side A mode can be carried. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference which arises between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  In the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanism interposed between the two locations is different in at least one of an allowable deformation amount or a deformation direction from each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations differ from each other in at least one of the allowable deformation amount or the deformation direction. Each can be provided with a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the deformation amount allowed by the movable mechanism on the driving side is made larger (or smaller) than the deformation amount allowed by the movable mechanism on the driven side, or the deformation direction allowed by the movable function on the driving side is set on the driven side. The direction can be different from the deformation direction allowed by the movable mechanism. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference which arises between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  As an aspect of the gaming machine A10, for example, in one movable mechanism, a shaft-shaped guided portion is pivotally supported in a circular guide groove and only rotation is allowed, and in the other movable mechanism, an elongated hole shape is formed. A configuration in which a shaft-shaped guided portion is slidably inserted in the guide groove and allowed to be displaced along the extending direction of the guide groove, or the guide grooves of both movable mechanisms are formed in an elongated hole shape. However, since the extending directions are different from each other, a configuration in which the sliding direction of the guided portion is different from each other between one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A9, a gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the movable mechanisms interposed in the two places have different forces required for deformation by a unit amount.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms provided at the two locations differ in force required for deformation by a unit amount, so that the two movable locations are movable. Each mechanism can have a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the movable mechanism on the driving side can be more easily deformed (or hardly deformed) than the movable mechanism on the driven side. Thereby, the shift | offset | difference which arises between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member can be effectively absorbed as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  As an aspect of the gaming machine A11, for example, when both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type or different types of elastic bodies, the elastic body is deformed by one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism. Easiness (hardness when the elastic body is an elastomer, and spring constant when the elastic body is an elastic spring) is different from each other, and both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type of elastic body. For example, the body size (dimensions such as a cross-sectional area) is different between one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is driven by different driving means on the one end side and the other end side, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, one end side and the other end side are driven by different driving means (both sides driving), so the structure driven by one driving means (one side driving) Compared with the above, the load shared by the driving means can be reduced, and accordingly, the displacement member can be increased in size or the displacement member can be displaced at a higher speed.

  In such a double-sided drive structure, it is difficult to completely synchronize the drive on the one end side and the drive on the other end side of the displacement member, and there is a shift between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member. Since the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable, it has been impossible to employ the conventional method. On the other hand, as in the present invention, by interposing the movable mechanism at two locations between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, a double-sided drive structure can be employed for the first time. While securing the displacement of the member, it is possible to increase the size of the displacement member or increase the displacement speed of the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine A12, “different driving means” is the same as “two driving means”. Therefore, the configuration of the drive means itself (type (for example, brush motor, brushless motor, stepping motor, etc.), characteristics (for example, torque-current characteristics, torque-speed characteristics, etc.), capacity (for example, rated output), etc. ) May have the same configuration or different configurations. The same applies to the following.

  The one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means and the other end side is driven, and the movable mechanism is one place between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, A gaming machine A13, characterized in that the game machine A13 is provided so as to be biased to either the one end side or the other end side with respect to the longitudinal center of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive (one side) Drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure in which the number of drive means is set to 2 to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member (both sides drive). Thus, the product cost can be reduced. Similarly, since the movable mechanism is provided only at one place, the product cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the movable mechanism is provided at two places.

  In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the one end side (drive side) which is the driven side and the other end side (driven side) which is the driven side are different from each other. In the gaming machine A13, the movable mechanism is biased to one of the one end side and the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side), where deviation between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to effectively absorb the shift generated between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member as a whole. Therefore, even if it is a one side drive and 1 movable mechanism, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7 includes a second displacement member that is disposed on the displacement member and is formed so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, the displacement member having the one end side on the driving means And the other end side is driven to displace the second displacement member, so that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is biased to one end side or the other end side from the longitudinal center of the displacement member. Characteristic gaming machine A14.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive (one side) Drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure in which the number of drive means is set to 2 to drive one end and the other end of the displacement member (both sides drive). Thus, the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the one end side (drive side) which is the driven side and the other end side (driven side) which is the driven side are different from each other. Where the deviation between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member is likely to occur, according to the gaming machine A14, by displacing the second displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is more than the longitudinal center of the displacement member. Since it can be biased to one end side or the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side), the displacement caused between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member due to the movement of the center of gravity is caused by the movable mechanism. A state of being easily absorbed can be formed. Thereby, even if it is a one-side drive, a displacement member can be displaced stably, As a result, it can suppress that the load of a drive means becomes excessive and a displacement member stops.

  In addition, as an aspect of changing the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member by the displacement of the second displacement member, for example, when the drive of the displacement member by the driving unit is started and during the predetermined period, the center of gravity of the displacement member is changed. While the position is brought closer to (or away from) the driving side (one end side), the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to the driven side (the other end side) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of driving the displacement member by the driving means. While the displacement member is displaced in the forward path (or away), the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to (or away from) the drive side (one end side), while the displacement member is displaced in the return path Examples include a form in which the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to (or away from) the driven side (the other end side). The latter form is particularly effective when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced (raised and lowered) along the vertical direction (the direction of gravity). That is, for example, when focusing on one end side, the state in which the one end side is guided to the one side member is changed between the rise when displaced against gravity and the fall when displacement is assisted by gravity. The ability to change the position of the center of gravity according to the state is effective in properly functioning the movable mechanism. The same applies to the other end side.

  In addition, as a form of the second displacement member, for example, as a form that is slid along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, or a rotating body that is formed to be rotatable and has a center of gravity eccentric from the center of rotation. The form etc. are illustrated. Examples of the slide displacement trajectory include straight lines, curved lines, and combinations thereof.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, a second displacement member that is disposed on the displacement member and is formed so as to be capable of relative displacement with respect to the displacement member, and a restriction unit that restricts deformation of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine A15, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, the gaming machine A15 includes the second displacement member that is disposed on the displacement member and that can be relatively displaced with respect to the displacement member. An effect can be performed by displacing the second displacement member. In this case, since the movable member is interposed in the displacement member, when the second displacement member is displaced, the movable member is deformed and the displacement member rattles, and the displacement of the second displacement member is reduced. There is a risk of being disturbed. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A15, since the regulation means for regulating the deformation of the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement of the movable mechanism is regulated and the second displacement member is controlled in a state where the rattling of the displacement member is suppressed. It can be displaced in a stable state.

  As the second displacement member, for example, a rotating body that is rotatably arranged on the displacement member, a slide body that is slidably displaced with respect to the displacement member, or a shaft that is rotatably supported by the displacement member. An oscillating body that oscillates and displaces the other end with the one end as a center is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A15, the restricting means acts on at least one of the displacement member or the movable mechanism when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, so that the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. A gaming machine A16 characterized by forming.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A15, the restricting means acts on at least one of the displacement member or the movable mechanism when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement. Since the deformation is regulated, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be regulated using the displacement of the displacement member. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide driving means for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As a form of the restricting means that acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, one side member, the other side member, or one of them A first engagement member is formed on the base member to which the side member and the other side member are attached, and a second engagement member that can be engaged with the first engagement portion is formed on the displacement member. When the displacement end is displaced, the first engagement member and the second engagement member are engaged, and the displacement of the displacement member is regulated, so that the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated. Second, the insertion member is formed on the one side member, the other side member, or the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, Insertion member in the gap between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the intervention Third, the configuration in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated by inserting the first magnet is applied to the one side member, the other side member, or the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached. The second magnet is disposed on the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, thereby Fourth, when the movable mechanism is formed of a guide groove and a guided portion, a concave portion is provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove, and the displacement of the member is restricted and the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. When the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, the forms in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated by fitting the guided portion into the recessed portion of the guide groove are exemplified. In the third embodiment, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member.

  The gaming machine A15 includes a third displacement member formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, and the restricting means is configured such that the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. Thus, the gaming machine A17 is characterized by forming a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A15, the third displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the predetermined position is provided, so that an effect can be achieved by displacing the third displacement member. It can be carried out. In this case, the restricting means forms a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted when the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. Therefore, the displacement of the third displacement member is utilized. The deformation of the movable mechanism can be restricted. That is, it is not necessary to separately provide driving means for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the third displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Accordingly, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  As a form of the restricting means that acts on the displacement member to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, firstly, the third displacement member displaced to a predetermined position contacts the displacement member. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member is restricted and the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. Second, a part of the third displacement member displaced to a predetermined position is divided by the intervention of the movable mechanism. The form in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated by being inserted into the gap between one of the deformed members and the other is thirdly arranged with the first magnet on the third displacement member, When the second magnet is disposed on the displacement member and the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the displacement of the displacement member is caused by the first magnet and the second magnet attracting or repelling each other. Each of the forms is restricted and the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted. In the third embodiment, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member.

  In particular, in the first and second embodiments, the third displacement member includes a plurality of annular forming members, and when the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the plurality of annular forming members combine to form an annular body. Preferably, the annular body is formed so as to surround the second displacement member (that is, the annular body is disposed around the second displacement member). Thereby, if it is a 1st form, the deformation | transformation of a movable mechanism is controlled by abutting the outer peripheral side of a 2nd displacement member from four directions in the inner peripheral side of the annular body formed of an annular formation member, The positioning (centering) of the two displacement members can also be performed. The same applies to the third embodiment.

<Concept of Invention with Biasing Spring 366 Energizing Second Rack 364 Non-Parallel>
A gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force of the driving unit. A rack and a pinion that transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the rack An urging means for applying an urging force to the rack, and the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. B1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting a driving force of a driving means by a rack and a pinion (see, for example, JP-A-2014-28226). In this case, for example, in a structure in which the displacement member is raised and lowered, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering the displacement member. Therefore, an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear movement direction of the rack is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is assisted by the urging force of the urging means.

  However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to become unstable. That is, the rack is guided along the guide mechanism when linearly moving (linearly moving), and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. Since the posture of the rack is violated (that is, the rack rattles in the direction of approaching and separating from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied along the linear movement direction of the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force that promotes the unraveling of the attitude of the rack.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine B1 includes a rack and a pinion that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and an urging means that applies an urging force to the rack, and is applied from the urging means to the rack. Since the direction of the urging force is not parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, the urging force of the urging means can be applied as a force in a direction in which the rack is pressed against the guide mechanism that guides the rack. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack from rattling and to prevent the posture from being violated. Furthermore, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is made non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that even if the erratic posture of the rack once occurs, the erratic posture of the rack is prevented. As the force in the direction of convergence, the urging force of the urging means can be applied. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

  In the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of an elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, since the biasing means is formed of an elastic body, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is changed with respect to the linear movement direction of the rack. Therefore, the structure for making it non-parallel can be simplified. Moreover, if it is an elastic body, since the urging | biasing force according to the displacement of a rack can be provided continuously, it becomes possible to urge | bias a rack stably.

  Examples of the elastic body include an elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) and an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.). For example, an elastic body is formed from a band-like or string-like rubber-like elastic body (rubber band) or a metal coil spring, and its longitudinal direction (stretching direction) is set to be non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. On the other hand, by connecting one end to the rack and the other end to the base member, the structure can be simplified and stable urging (giving continuous urging force) can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer, and is arranged in a bent posture.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and is arranged in a bent posture, so that it is necessary for the arrangement of the elastic body. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a sufficient space, and accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design and secure the urging force. That is, in order to secure the urging force of the elastic body, it is necessary to increase the length of the elastic body. However, if the length of the elastic body increases, the elastic body is arranged due to interference with other members. It is difficult to secure the installation space. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, since the elastic body is arranged in a bent posture, the length of the elastic body is lengthened to ensure its urging force and avoid interference with other members. Thus, the space for arranging the elastic body can be secured.

  The bent posture of the elastic body is intended to include a part or all of the curvature. Therefore, as the shape of the elastic body arranged in the bent posture, for example, a linear portion and a linear shape are used. Examples include a shape that is connected with a curved portion (ie, a “C” shape with a rounded bent portion), a shape that is curved as a whole (ie, a “C” shape), and the like. Is done.

  In the gaming machine B1, the urging means is formed of a magnet, the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the biasing means is formed of a magnet, so that a stable biasing force can be applied to the rack over a long period of time. That is, in the elastic body, deterioration (sagging) occurs with the repeated operation of the rack, and the urging force is changed. By using a magnet like the gaming machine B4, the urging force can be maintained over a long period of time. Can be constant. As a result, the effect of making the direction of the urging force non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack can be stably exhibited over a long period of time.

  In addition, as a structure in the case where the urging means is formed from magnets, the first magnet is disposed in the rack, and the second magnet is disposed on the movement trajectory of the rack. A configuration in which an urging force is applied to the rack by pulling or repelling the two magnets is exemplified. In this case, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member. Further, the number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including the iron member) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

  In the gaming machine B4, the biasing means includes a range in which the biasing force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack and a range in which the biasing force applied to the rack is equal to or less than the reference value in a range in which the rack moves linearly. A gaming machine B5 characterized by forming.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B4, the biasing means includes a range in which a biasing force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack and a load applied to the rack in a range in which the rack linearly moves. Since the range in which the force is equal to or less than the reference value is formed, the biasing force applied to the rack can be a biasing force suitable for the state of the rack.

  For example, in the first range, by applying an urging force exceeding the reference value to the rack, it is difficult for the rack to rattle, and the occurrence of the posture fluctuation is suppressed, while in the second range, By setting the urging force applied to the rack to a reference value or less, it is possible to reduce the urging force (magnetic force) from becoming resistance to driving of the rack, and to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means.

  In addition, as a structure in this case, while arrange | positioning a 1st magnet in a rack, on the movement locus | trajectory of a rack, the range (1st range) which arrange | positions a 2nd magnet, and a 2nd magnet When the rack (first magnet) passes through the first range, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other. By matching, an urging force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack, while when the rack (first magnet) passes through the second range, a magnet acting with the first magnet is A configuration in which the urging force is not applied to the rack (or the applied urging force is set to be equal to or less than the reference value) due to the absence (or a small effect) is exemplified. As described above, also in this case, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be an iron (ferromagnetic) member. Further, as in the case described above, the number of first magnets and second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary and may be one or more.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is a direction that generates a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack close to the tooth surface of the pinion Therefore, the gap between the rack tooth surface and the pinion tooth surface can be suppressed. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surfaces suppresses the generation of a time lag when driving force is transmitted from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa), thereby improving the response and collision between the tooth surfaces at the initial stage of meshing. Thus, it is possible to suppress the tooth surface from being accelerated and the tooth surface from being damaged. Further, even when the tooth surface is worn, the gap between the tooth surfaces can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is a direction that generates a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, the gap between the tooth surface of the rack and the tooth surface of the pinion is excessively clogged, and it is possible to suppress the pressure from being excessively engaged. As a result, from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa) Resistance at the time of transmitting the driving force to can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the range in which the rack moves linearly includes a force component that causes the tooth surface of the rack to approach the tooth surface of the pinion in the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack. A first range that is a direction to be generated, and a second range that is a direction in which a force component that causes the tooth surface of the rack to be separated from the tooth surface of the pinion is the direction of the urging force applied to the rack from the urging means. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack can be changed within the range in which the rack moves linearly. The meshing state of the rack and the pinion can be changed to an optimum state according to the state of the displacement member, the rack or the driving means.

  For example, by applying the first range to the initial stage in a transient state when starting transmission of driving force (that is, the stage of starting displacement of the displacement member), the tooth surfaces are brought close to each other, and the driving force The second range is applied to the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stabilized and is in a steady state (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed). Thus, the tooth surfaces can be separated and the resistance can be suppressed.

  Or it is good also as the contrary. That is, in the initial stage in the transient state when starting transmission of the driving force (that is, the stage of starting the displacement of the displacement member), the inertia force is large to start the displacement of the displacement member in the stopped state, and the drive When the load of the means increases, the second range is applied to the initial stage, whereby the tooth surfaces can be separated from each other and the resistance can be suppressed, so that the load of the driving means can be suppressed. On the other hand, at the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stable and steady (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed), the displacement speed of the displacement member becomes high. When the influence of the rattling is transmitted to the displacement member and the stable displacement of the displacement member is hindered, applying the first range to such a stage makes it possible to bring the tooth surfaces close together and make the rack difficult to rattle. Even when the displacement speed of the displacement member is high, the displacement can be stabilized. In particular, the latter configuration has a structure in which a long displacement member installed between the one side member and the other side member is displaced by being guided by the one side member and the other side member on one end side and the other end side, respectively. It becomes effective in.

  One of the gaming machines B1 to B8 includes a one-side member and another side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and the displacement member is installed between the one-side member and the other-side member, and the one side A gaming machine B9, wherein one end and the other end are guided and displaced by the member and the other member, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the gaming machine B9 includes the one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and between the one side member and the other side member. The urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is determined by the direction of the linear movement of the rack. The effect of being non-parallel to can be effectively exhibited.

  Here, in such a structure, if a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable and the load of the driving means becomes excessive, and the displacement member There is also a risk of stopping. That is, in the conventional product in which the posture of the rack is likely to be violated, due to the erraticness of the rack, a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the posture rage. In addition, even if the rack posture is violated, the urging force of the urging means can be applied as a force in a direction to converge the posture violence. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing the occurrence of a deviation between the guide by the one side member and the other side member due to the rampage of the rack.

  The gaming machine B9 includes a movable mechanism formed to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. B10.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the gaming machine B10 includes a movable mechanism that is deformably formed, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, if the movable mechanism functions when the displacement member is displaced, the deformation of the movable mechanism acts as an external force on the rack, causing the rack to rattle. . As a result, the rack posture becomes unsteady, leading to destabilization of the engagement between the rack and the pinion and a decrease in durability. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that the external force acting with the deformation of the movable mechanism On the other hand, the rack can be opposed by the biasing force applied from the biasing means, and the rack can be hardly rattled. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rack posture from being violated, stabilize the meshing of the rack and the pinion, and improve the durability.

<Concept of Invention with Biasing Spring 366 Arranged in Bent Position>
A base member, a target member disposed displaceably on the base member, and one end connected directly or indirectly to the target member and the other end connected directly or indirectly to the base member. A gaming machine C1, wherein the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture.

  Here, a base member, a target member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, a biasing unit having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member, and a biasing unit 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a facing member that is disposed so as to face a base member is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-28226). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing unit.

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to secure the urging force because the space where the urging means can be disposed is limited. That is, in order to ensure the urging force of the urging means, it is necessary to ensure a sufficient length dimension, but it is necessary to dispose the urging means while avoiding interference with other members. It was difficult to make the length dimension sufficiently long.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture, it can be easily disposed while avoiding interference of other members, so that a sufficient length dimension can be ensured. It is possible to easily secure the urging force.

  The bent posture of the elastic body is intended to include a part or all of the curvature. Therefore, as the shape of the elastic body arranged in the bent posture, for example, a linear portion and a linear shape are used. Examples include a shape that is connected with a curved portion (ie, a “C” shape with a rounded bent portion), a shape that is curved as a whole (ie, a “C” shape), and the like. Is done.

  The gaming machine C1 includes a facing member disposed to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, and the facing member is formed in an area including at least one of one end or the other end of the biasing member. A gaming machine C2 including an opening.

  Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is easy to secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture, and the urging means is not elastic in the assembly process. There was a problem of being struck (hopping with its own elastic recovery force). Therefore, in the assembly process, the work of connecting the biasing means to the target member or the base member with the other hand while pressing the biasing means with one hand so as to maintain the bent posture of the biasing means. It was necessary and complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 includes a facing member that is disposed to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, and the facing member includes one end of the biasing member or Since the opening is formed in a region including at least one of the other ends, the opening of the facing member can be opened even after one end or the other end of the biasing means is connected and the facing member is disposed. The other one of the one end or the other end of the urging means can be connected to each other. That is, it is possible to suppress the biasing means from being flipped by disposing the facing member so as to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween. As a result, it is possible to easily perform the operation of connecting one of the urging means and the other of the other ends, and it is possible to simplify the assembling operation.

  Further, even when the opposing member is disposed opposite to the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, the opening is formed in the opposing member, so that the portion between the opposing member and the biasing means is correspondingly formed. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of resistance by suppressing the sliding. Therefore, since it can suppress that the elastic deformation of an urging | biasing means is inhibited, the urging | biasing force can be made to act on an object member stably. In addition, for example, when the biasing means is formed of a metal coil spring and the opposing member is formed of a resin material, even if one material is lower in strength than the other, those members It is possible to suppress wear of one member accompanying sliding, and dust generated by the wear entering an electronic device such as a mechanical movable part or a sensor to have an adverse effect.

  In the gaming machine C2, the opposing member includes the opening in a region including one end and the other end of the biasing member, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the opposing member is formed with an opening in each of the region including one end of the biasing member and the other region including the other end. An opposing member can be left in the bent portion. Therefore, it is possible to press the portion necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the biasing means with the opposing member while ensuring the maximum formation area of the opening. As a result, simplification of assembly work and suppression of sliding resistance and generation of dust can be effectively achieved.

  In the gaming machine C3, the opposing member communicates with an opening formed in an area including one end of the urging means and an opening formed in an area including the other end of the urging means. And the communication passage is formed as an opening having a size through which the biasing means can pass, and is further outwardly bent than the bent portion of the biasing means disposed in the bent posture. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being located.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, an opening formed in an area including one end of the urging means and an opening formed in an area including the other end of the urging means are provided. A communication passage is provided to be communicated, and the communication passage is formed as an opening having a size through which the urging means can pass, and is bent outward from the bent portion of the urging means disposed in a bent posture. First, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to each of the target member or the base member through each opening of the opposing member, and then through each opening and communication path of the opposing member. The urging means can be arranged between the base member and the opposing member (that is, a bent posture can be formed after fixing both ends of the urging means), whereby the urging means is repelled. Figure that bent such urging means while suppressing Easily disposed.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C5 is provided with a stop plate member arranged to face the base member with a bent portion of the biasing means arranged in the bent posture.

  Here, when the urging means is arranged in a bent posture, it is easy to secure the arrangement space, but it is difficult to maintain the bent posture, and the urging means is not elastic in the assembly process. There was a problem of being struck (hopping with its own elastic recovery force). Therefore, in the assembly process, the work of connecting the biasing means to the target member or the base member with the other hand while pressing the biasing means with one hand so as to maintain the bent posture of the biasing means. It was necessary and complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, a stop plate member disposed opposite to the base member with the bent portion of the biasing means disposed in the bent posture is provided. Therefore, first, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to each of the target member or the base member, and then the intermediate portion of the urging means is locked to the stop plate member (the opposite of the base member and the stop plate member). (That is, a bent posture can be formed after fixing both ends of the urging means), and the urging means is bent while suppressing the urging means from being repelled. It can be easily arranged in the posture. Therefore, the assembling work can be simplified.

  Furthermore, the region where the stop plate member faces is only the bent portion of the urging means, and the region excluding the bent portion of the urging device is open, so that sliding when the urging device is elastically deformed is suppressed. Thus, the occurrence of resistance can be reduced. Therefore, since it can suppress that the elastic deformation of an urging | biasing means is inhibited, the urging | biasing force can be made to act on an object member stably. In addition, since the area excluding the bent portion of the biasing means is open, the mating member wears due to sliding, and the dust generated by the wear is mechanically movable parts, electronic devices such as sensors, etc. It is possible to suppress the penetration and adverse effects.

  The gaming machine C5 includes a rotating contact member that is formed to be rotatable and has an outer peripheral surface formed to be able to contact the urging means, and the urging means is provided between the one end and the other end. A part of the rotating contact member is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating contact member, and is arranged in a bent posture. The stop plate member is formed in a flange shape radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating contact member. A gaming machine C6, wherein the gaming machine C6 is formed integrally with the rotary contact member as a protruding flange portion.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the rotating contact member that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the biasing means is formed to be rotatable in order to make the biasing means a bent posture. When the urging means is elastically deformed (for example, expanded or contracted), the rotation contact member and the stop plate member (flange) can be rotated along with the elastic deformation, and the elastic deformation of the urging means can be smoothly performed. Can be done. In other words, in order to make the urging means a bent posture, the member abutting on the urging means (corresponding to a rotating abutting member) or the urging member is prevented from being repelled (does not jump by its own elastic recovery force). Compared with a case where a member to be kept (corresponding to a stop plate member) is fixed, it is possible to suppress the sliding resistance generated between the biasing means. Further, since the sliding can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the adverse effects of the wear caused by the sliding and the dust generated by the wear.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a displacement abutting member is provided that is displaceably disposed on the base member and that can be abutted against the biasing means, and the displacement abutting member is the biasing force. A gaming machine C7, wherein the biasing means is arranged in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a part between the one end and the other end of the means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 includes a displacement abutting member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable. Since the urging means is arranged in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a part between the other end, the assembling work of the urging means can be facilitated. That is, by first connecting one end and the other end of the urging means to each of the target member or the base member, and then displacing the displacement contact member, the urging means can be bent. Therefore, since the posture bent after fixing both ends of the urging means can be formed, the arrangement of the urging means in the bent posture can be facilitated while suppressing the urging means from being flipped. .

  In the gaming machine C7, the base member includes guide means for guiding the displacement contact member, the guide means extending in a direction in which the biasing means is bent, and the first guide portion. A gaming machine C8, comprising: a second guide portion that is folded back from the terminal end side of the guide portion and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the guide means for guiding the displacement member includes a first guide portion extending in a direction in which the biasing means is bent, and a terminal end of the first guide portion. And a second guide portion that is folded back from the side and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means. Therefore, by displacing the displacement abutting member along the first guide portion of the guide means, A bent posture can be formed, and the displacement abutting member is arranged on the second guide portion of the guide means, so that the displacement abutting member is pressed against the terminal end of the second guide portion and held by the elastic recovery force of the urging means. be able to. That is, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only for urging the target member but also for holding (fixing) the displacement contact member, a member for fixing the displacement contact member (for example, There is no need to prepare a fastening screw), and there is no need to perform fastening work. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, a pair of the target members are disposed so as to be displaceable on the base member, and the biasing means has one end directly on one target member of the pair of target members. Connected to the other target member of the pair of target members, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member.

  Here, the base member, a target member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and one end thereof is directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. It is known that a pair of target members are disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the pair of target members are biased by separate biasing means. According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing unit.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, each target member is urged by a separate urging means, so that the urging force applied to each target member is large due to individual differences of these separate urging means. There was a problem that variation occurred in the thickness.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, when a pair of target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are disposed on one and the other of the pair of target members. Since each is connected, the urging | biasing force provided to a pair of object member can be equalize | homogenized. That is, when two urging means are provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in characteristics (such as dimensional tolerance) of the respective urging means. By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, variation in the urging force applied to each target member can be suppressed. As a result, variation in the displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

  In this case, a pair of target members may be disposed on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be disposed on different base members. It may be a form.

  In addition, the gaming machine C9 has one side member and another side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and is constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and is connected to the one side member and the other side member at one end side. It is particularly effective to apply to a gaming machine that includes a displacement member that is guided and displaced on the other end side, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to the configuration for guiding one end side of the displacement member and the configuration for guiding the other end side. In such a gaming machine, a shift is likely to occur between the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side of the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. By applying, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and variations in their displacement can be suppressed, so that the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement can be suppressed and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  The gaming machine C9 includes a connecting member connected to the base member, and one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means is The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained by contacting the connection member. A gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the intermediate portion of the biasing means whose one end and the other end are connected to the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so that the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained by pressing the member, the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, the work efficiency at the time of attaching these base members and connecting members to an attachment object can be improved by such temporary fixing. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example, ), And it is not necessary to prepare a fastening screw), and it is not necessary to perform fastening work. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, a displacement abutting member that is displaceably disposed on the base member and abuts against the urging means to form a bent posture of the urging means, Contact member drive means for applying a drive force to the contact member, and the bending state of the biasing means can be changed by the displacement contact member being displaced by the drive force of the contact member drive means A gaming machine C11, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the base member is displaceably disposed and abuts against the biasing means to form a bent posture of the biasing means. A displacement abutting member; and a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement abutting member. The displacement abutting member is displaced by the driving force of the abutting member driving means. Since the bent state can be changed, the urging state by the urging means can be adjusted to a more appropriate one according to the state of the target member to which the urging force is applied.

  As the displacement direction of the displacement abutting member, first, the direction connecting the one end of the urging means (the position connected to the target member) and the displacement abutting member is not changed, and one end of the urging means is Second, the direction in which the distance between the displacement abutting member is changed does not change the distance between one end of the urging means and the displacement abutting member, and the one end of the urging means and the displacement abutting member Examples of the direction in which the direction connecting the third and third directions is changed, and the direction in which the first and second directions are combined are exemplified.

  In the case of the first direction, the preload of the urging means (the load applied to the urging means in the assembled state) is changed without changing the direction of the urging force applied to the target member from the urging means. The size can be adjusted. That is, the apparent spring constant of the biasing means can be adjusted (increased or decreased). Therefore, the magnitude of the urging force applied from the urging means in accordance with the amount of displacement from the reference position of the target member is controlled according to the state of the target member (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). be able to. For example, when the target member is at the upper end position, the preload of the biasing means is increased, and the force required to maintain the target member at the upper end position is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means, while the target member is When displacing, it is possible to reduce the preload of the urging means and prevent the urging force of the urging means from becoming a resistance when displacing the target member.

  In the case of the second direction, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member can be changed without changing the magnitude of the preload of the urging means. Therefore, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member is switched between the direction coinciding with the direction of displacement of the target member and the non-parallel direction, or the increase / decrease of the degree of non-parallelity is changed. Control can be performed according to the state (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). For example, in the initial stage in the transitional state where the displacement of the target member starts, the behavior of the target member becomes unstable, increasing the degree of non-parallel biasing force direction, On the other hand, at the stage where the displacement speed of the target member reaches a constant state, the behavior of the target member is stabilized, but the degree of making the direction of the urging force non-parallel is decreased to reduce the resistance. Thus, energy required for driving the target member can be suppressed.

  The configuration of the gaming machine C11 is particularly effective when the target member is formed as a rack that meshes with the pinion. This is because the meshing state (meshing state) between the pinion and the rack can be controlled by changing the direction of the biasing force applied to the target member from the biasing means.

  In the gaming machine C11, the case where the displacement abutting member is driven by the driving force of the abutting member driving means has been described. However, the abutting member driving means is omitted, and the displacement abutting member is elastically supported so as to be displaceable. May be. In this case, the displacement abutting member is displaced according to the state of the target member, and the direction of the preload or (and) the urging force of the urging means can be adjusted, while the displacement abutting by the elastic recovery force in the elastic support. The member can be returned to the initial position. As an elastic support structure, for example, an elastic body is connected to a displacement abutting member that is displaceable along a guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement of the displacement abutting member is initially determined by elastic deformation of the elastic body. A structure that enables return to the position, and an outer cylinder of a bush in which the inner cylinder and the outer cylinder are connected by a rubber-like elastic body are disposed on the base member, and a displacement abutting member is disposed on the inner cylinder, Examples include a structure that enables displacement of the displacement contact member and return to the initial position by elastic deformation of the bush. According to the latter structure, since the displaceable direction of the displacement contact member is not limited to one direction, the displacement direction of the displacement contact member can be the above-described third direction.

  Further, the contact member driving means may be omitted, and the disposition position of the displacement contact member may be manually adjustable. In this case, depending on the secular change of each member (for example, decrease in spring constant due to sag (deterioration) of the biasing means, wear of the tooth surfaces of the rack and pinion, etc.) ) The direction of the urging force can be adjusted. As a structure that allows manual adjustment of the disposition position of the displacement contact member, for example, the displacement contact member can be displaced along a guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement contact member is fixed to the guide groove. A structure for adjusting the preload or the like according to the position to be moved, or a plurality of support holes to which the displacement contact member can be attached or detached is provided in the base member, and the preload or the like is adjusted according to the position of the support hole in which the displacement contact member is disposed. Examples include structures.

<Concept of Invention Taking Second Rack 364 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, a rack and a pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the rack And a guide means for guiding the rack, wherein the guide means guides the rack in a displaceable manner along the tooth surface of the pinion.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting a driving force of a driving means by a rack and a pinion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-75550). Since the rack and pinion can convert rotational motion into linear motion, they are often used as a mechanism for linearly displacing the displacement member by the driving force (rotational motion) of the motor.

  However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to become unstable. That is, the rack is guided along the guide mechanism when linearly moving (linearly moving), and a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. Since the posture of the rack is violated (that is, the rack rattles in the direction of approaching and separating from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member and the guide means for guiding the rack are provided, and the guide means can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since the rack is guided in a stable state, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the meshing between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Note that the rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion when the linear tooth surface of the rack is in contact with the arcuate tooth surface of the pinion in the axial direction of the pinion (the straight line of the rack tooth surface). Is a state where the rack is tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface, and the rack is rotated around the pinion axis.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are disposed, and the guide means rotates along a toothed surface of the rack and a guided portion that rotates to the guided portion. A gaming machine D2 comprising: a projecting portion that is slidably inserted and projects from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the guiding means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the guided portion extending along the tooth surface of the rack and the pinion shaft. And a projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion of the rack.When the projecting portion is slid along the guided portion, the projecting portion protrudes within the guided portion. By rotating the installation part relatively, the rack can be displaced along the guided part while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  In this case, since the guided portion is formed in the rack, and the protruding portion is formed in the region of the base member facing the rack, the guided portion and the protruding portion are placed on the movement trajectory of the rack. Can be arranged. In other words, it is not necessary to form a portion for allowing the rack to be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion outside the outer shape of the rack, and it is a dead space where other members cannot be disposed in order to avoid interference with the rack. Since it can be disposed, the space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

  The guided portion may be a concave groove formed in a surface facing the base member of the rack, or may be a long hole opening formed in the rack. In this case, it is preferable that the width of the guided portion is constant along the longitudinal direction, and the cross-sectional shape of the protruding portion is a cross-sectional circle having a diameter substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the width of the guided portion. preferable. This is because the meshing when the rack is linearly moved while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion can be made more constant. However, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be a cross-sectional ellipse, a cross-sectional polygon, or the like. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the protruding portion may be any shape as long as it can slide along the guided portion and can rotate within the guided portion.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack and is provided on a side surface of the rack. A first restricting portion capable of contacting, and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction, and allowed by the second restricting portion. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack, and the second restricting the displacement in the width direction of the rack. When the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion, the displacement in the width direction of the rack is restricted by the first restriction portion and the second restriction portion, and the rack is displaced in the linear motion direction. be able to.

  In this case, since the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the amount of displacement permitted between the first restricting portion and the pinion, the amount of displacement permitted by the second restricting portion is larger. In addition to the effect produced by the machine D1, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a guided groove as a concave groove or an opening in the rack, it is possible to ensure the rigidity of the rack and improve the durability. Further, by ensuring the rigidity of the rack, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the rack when driven by the rotation of the pinion, and from this point, the meshing between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained.

  In addition, it is preferable that a 1st control part protrudes from a base member as a rod-shaped body. This is because the rack can be easily displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion when the first contact portion comes into contact with the side surface of the rack to restrict the displacement of the rack. Here, examples of the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion (rod-like body) include a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a shape obtained by partially combining these. In this case, it is preferable that the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion is a shape in which a side surface facing (abutting) the rack is curved in a cross-sectional arc shape. This is because the resistance can be reduced and the displacement of the rack can be prevented from being hindered when the displacement is regulated by contacting the side surface of the rack.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with a biasing means for imparting a biasing force to the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the gaming machine D4 is provided with a biasing means for imparting a biasing force to the rack, so that the driving force of the driving means is assisted using the biasing force. can do. For example, in a structure in which the displacement member is raised and lowered, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, when the displacement member is raised, a larger driving force is required than when the displacement member is lowered. Then, by applying an urging force to the rack, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted accordingly.

  On the other hand, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion, the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack is guided by the guide means, a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide means and the rack, and the posture of the rack is exposed by the gap. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied to the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force that promotes the unraveling of the rack posture. On the other hand, in the present invention, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, in the structure in which the urging force by the urging means is applied to the rack, even if the posture of the rack is violated, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be easily maintained, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized. it can.

  As the biasing means, for example, elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.) and elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethanes, etc.) are used as biasing forces, or the magnetic force of the magnet is used. What is used as an urging force is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D4, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect exerted by the gaming machine D4, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is made non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. The urging force of the urging means can be applied as the force in the direction of pressing against the guiding means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rack from rattling and to prevent the posture from being violated.

  Furthermore, the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is made non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that even if the erratic posture of the rack once occurs, the erratic posture of the rack is prevented. As the force in the direction of convergence, the urging force of the urging means can be applied. Therefore, the meshing of the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

  The linear movement direction of the rack means a direction in which the rack driven by the rotation of the pinion is displaced, and is a direction along the tooth surface of the rack. In this case, in the gaming machine D5, the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion (the rack can be rotated about the axis of the pinion), so the linear movement direction of the rack changes according to the rotational position of the rack. Is done.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, a gaming machine D6 comprising linear motion regulating means for regulating displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 includes linear motion regulating means for regulating the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction. The driving force required for the driving means can be reduced. For example, in the structure in which the displacement member is moved up and down, in order to stop and hold the displacement member in the raised position, it is necessary to resist the gravity acting on the displacement member, so that the driving force required for the driving means increases. Since the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction can be regulated by the linear motion regulating means, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced correspondingly (or the driving is stopped). As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means when holding the displacement member at a predetermined position (for example, the raised position).

  The gaming machine D6 includes an urging unit that applies an urging force to the rack, and the linear motion regulating unit is engageable with a first engagement portion formed on the rack and the first engagement portion. A second engaging portion formed on the guide means, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, and The gaming machine D7 is a direction in which the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the linear motion restricting means is formed into a first engaging portion formed on the rack, and engageable with the first engaging portion. A biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, and the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion are formed. Since the engaging portion is in the direction in which the engaging portion is engaged, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be engaged and released in accordance with the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction.

  That is, the rack is displaceable along the tooth surface of the pinion (can be rotated about the pinion axis), and the urging force of the urging means urges the rack in a direction to displace the rack along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, for example, when the engagement of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is formed as a concavo-convex engagement, when the rack is displaced to a predetermined position in the linear motion direction, the concave and convex portions are formed. , The rack is rotated by the urging force of the urging means, and the engagement of the concavo-convex shape (the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion) can be formed (the protrusion is inserted into the recess). The engagement can be maintained by the urging force of the urging means. On the other hand, when the pinion is driven from this state, the rack is rotated in a direction to release the engagement of the concavo-convex shape against the urging force of the urging means, thereby releasing the engagement of the concavo-convex shape (from the recess) The projection can be extracted), and the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction.

  The gaming machine D7 includes a base member on which the rack and pinion are disposed, and the guide means rotates along the tooth surface of the rack and a guided portion that rotates to the guided portion. A projecting portion that is slidably inserted and projects from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft, and the linear motion restricting means includes the first engaging portion A gaming machine D8, wherein the gaming machine D8 is formed by a recessed portion recessed in an inner wall surface of the guided portion of the guiding means, and the second engaging portion is formed by a protruding portion of the guiding means.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the guide means is guided to be extended to the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided part and faces the pinion shaft. Since it is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the base member at the position to be played, the same effect as the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, since the first engagement portion of the linear motion restricting means is formed in the guided portion of the guide means, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved, and linear motion restriction is also possible. Since the second engaging portion of the means is formed by the protruding portion of the guiding means, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly by using the parts as well. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  The gaming machine D7 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack and is provided on a side surface of the rack. A first restricting portion capable of contacting, and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction, and allowed by the second restricting portion. The amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is larger than the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion, and the linear motion restricting means is the first engagement member. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the joint portion is formed by a recess provided in a side surface of the rack, and the second engagement portion is formed by a second restricting portion of the guide means.

  According to the gaming machine D9, the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack, and can be brought into contact with the side surface of the rack, and in the width direction of the rack. A second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting the displacement of the rack, and a displacement amount in the width direction of the rack allowed by the second restricting portion is between the first restricting portion and the pinion. Since it is larger than the allowable displacement in the width direction of the rack, the same effect as the gaming machine D3 is obtained. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the linear motion restricting means is formed on the side surface of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, the space efficiency can be improved, and Since the two engaging portions are formed by the second restricting portion of the guide means, the number of components can be reduced correspondingly by using the components as well. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  The gaming machine D6 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed, and the guide means includes a guided portion as a recessed groove extending along the tooth surface of the rack and a guided portion thereof. A projecting portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide portion and that projects from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion. A first engaging portion is formed with a part of the guided portion having a deep recess, and the leading end side of the protruding portion of the guide means is formed to be engageable with the first engaging portion. A gaming machine D10 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6, the guiding means is rotatable as a recessed groove extending in the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and to the guided part. Since it includes a projecting portion that is slidably inserted and projects from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft, the same effect as the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, the linear motion restricting means includes a first engaging portion formed by deepening a part of the recessed portion in the guided portion of the guiding means, and the guiding means protrudes from the first engaging portion. Since the front end side of the portion is formed to be engageable, the engagement of the first engagement portion and the protruding member and the release thereof can be performed in accordance with the displacement in the linear movement direction of the rack.

  In addition, since the first engagement portion of the linear motion regulating means is formed by partially deepening the rack groove (guided portion), it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and the space efficiency is improved. In addition to being able to achieve this, the portion for engaging with the first engaging portion is formed by the protruding portion of the guiding means, so that it is possible to reduce the number of components by using the components. Thereby, size reduction and reduction of product cost can be aimed at.

  In the gaming machine D11, a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a protruding direction by a spring is provided on the tip side of the projecting portion, and the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is engaged with the first engagement portion. It is preferable. This is because the engagement between the first engagement portion and the distal end side of the projecting portion and the release of the engagement can be smoothly performed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, comprising: a base member on which the rack and the pinion are disposed; and a cover member disposed to face the base member with the rack and the pinion interposed therebetween, the base member and the cover member The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that a displacement of the rack is restricted by the opposing surfaces of the rack, and a connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is disposed in the vicinity of the rack.

  Here, the rack and the pinion are disposed on the base member, the cover member is covered on the base member, and the thickness direction of the rack (that is, the base member and the cover member) is covered by the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member. A gaming machine having a structure that regulates displacement in the opposite direction) is known. In this case, if the distance between the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member is unstable, the displacement restriction in the rack thickness direction becomes insufficient, which adversely affects the meshing state with the pinion. However, if the number of connecting portions that connect the base member and the cover member is increased in order to stabilize the distance between the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member, the product cost increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the connecting portion that connects the base member and the cover member is disposed in the vicinity of the rack. The distance between the opposing surfaces of the members that contribute to the regulation of the rack displacement can be steadily stabilized. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the meshing state with the pinion by suppressing the number of connecting portions and reducing the product cost and making it possible to sufficiently restrict the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction.

  In the gaming machine D11, the rack includes an opening formed as an elongated hole-shaped opening, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack.

  According to the gaming machine D12, the rack has an opening formed in the shape of a long hole, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack, so that the base member and the cover member are connected at a position closest to the rack. It can connect with a part. Therefore, the space | interval can be stabilized in the area | region most suitable in order to regulate the displacement of the rack among the opposing surfaces of a base member and a cover member. As a result, the number of connecting parts is minimized, the product cost is reduced, and even when the number of connecting parts is minimized, the displacement restriction in the rack thickness direction is maximized to ensure engagement with the pinion. Can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine D12, the guide means is inserted into the rack as an elongated hole-shaped opening along the tooth surface of the rack, and is rotatably inserted into the guided part. And a projecting portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion, the opening is formed by the guided portion, and the connecting portion is formed by the projecting portion. A gaming machine D13 that is formed.

  According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D12, the guiding means is guided along the rack tooth surface and is guided to be rotatable and slidable on the guided part. Since it is provided with a projecting portion that is inserted and projecting from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft, the same effect as the gaming machine D2 is achieved. In this case, since the opening is formed by the guided portion and the connecting portion is formed by the projecting portion, it is possible to improve the space efficiency and reduce the product cost. That is, since the connecting portion is provided by using the guided portion (opening portion) formed in the rack, it is not necessary to arrange the connecting portion outside the outer shape of the rack. This member can be disposed outside the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition, the guided portion and the projecting portion constituting the guiding means for guiding the displacement of the rack are connected to each other so as to connect and fix the base member and the cover member, and an opening through which the connecting portion is inserted. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D12 or D13, the gaming machine D14 is characterized in that the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is restricted by the contact of the connecting portion with the end of the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D12 or D13, the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by the contact of the connecting portion at the end of the opening, thereby improving the space efficiency. Product costs can be reduced. For example, a structure is conceivable in which a stopper wall that abuts against the side surface of the rack is erected from the base member and the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by abutting the side surface of the rack against the stopper wall. In the structure, since the stopper wall is formed, the space where other members can be disposed is reduced outside the outer shape of the rack. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D14, it is not necessary to dispose the connecting portion corresponding to the stopper wall outside the outer shape of the rack, and accordingly, other members can be disposed outside the outer shape of the rack. , Space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the function of connecting and fixing the base member and the cover member to the connecting portion, it can also be used as a stopper function for restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction. The number of points can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D14, the base member and the cover member are formed of a resin material, and the connecting portion is erected from one of the base member or the cover member, and the erected tip side of the base member or the cover member The game is characterized in that the metal screw is embedded in the inside of the connecting portion along the standing direction of the connecting portion when fastened to the other by a metal screw and fastened by the screw. Machine D15.

  According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D14, the standing tip side of the connecting portion that is erected from one of the base member or the cover member is fastened to the other of the base member or the cover member by a metal screw. That is, when the base member and the cover member are connected and fixed by the connecting member, the metal screw is embedded in the connecting portion, so that the rigidity of the connecting portion can be increased. Thereby, when the displacement of the rack is restricted by bringing the connecting portion into contact with the end of the opening, the connecting portion can be prevented from being damaged, and the durability can be improved.

<About the concept of the invention using the interposed member 370 as an example>
One side member and other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member are respectively guided between the one side member and the other side member and are guided between the one side member and the other side member. A gaming machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, comprising an interposed member interposed between the one side member and the other side member. A gaming machine E1.

  Here, the one-side member and the other-side member that are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, the displacement member that is laid between the one-side member and the other-side member, and the driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). According to this gaming machine, one side member is formed to be able to guide one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the other side member is formed to be able to guide the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. Thus, the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the rigidity of the entire unit (the structure in which the displacement member is installed between the one side member and the other side member) is lowered and easily damaged, so that it is difficult to handle in the unit state. There was a problem that. Therefore, for example, in the transporting process for transporting the unit and the mounting process for attaching the unit to the counterpart member, it is necessary to handle the unit so that a large load is not applied to the unit, resulting in deterioration in workability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the interposition member interposed between the one side member and the other side member is provided, the entire unit can be formed into a frame shape, and the rigidity can be improved. Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated. Therefore, for example, the allowable value of the load applied to the unit is relaxed in the transporting process and the mounting process, so that workability can be improved accordingly.

  In the gaming machine E1, a pair of racks that are respectively connected to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member and that can be directly moved to the one side member and the other side member, and a tooth on each of the pair of racks And a pair of pinions rotatably arranged on the one side member and the other side member and applied with the driving force of the driving means, and in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the linear movement direction of the rack A pair of rod-like bodies fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively, and the rack is connected to the rod-like body and the connecting portion is slid along the rod-like body. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the rod-like body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, and the rack is connected to the rod-like body. It is possible to connect to the one side member and the other side member via the, thereby forming a closed connection loop of the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member and the interposed member. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinion disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member are not connected. In connection with the gaming machine E2, the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member can be connected via the rack and the rod-shaped body (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire unit can be increased. Moreover, the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member is improved by fixing the rod-like body to the one side member and the other side member. This also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the entire unit.

  Note that the rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member means that the rod-shaped body formed separately from the one-side member and the other-side member is attached and fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member ( For example, this is not limited to the case of fastening and fixing), and includes the case where a rod-shaped body is formed integrally with one side member and the other side member (for example, integrally formed by resin molding with a molding die). Moreover, it is preferable that a rod-shaped body is formed from a metal material. This is because when the one-side member and the other-side member are formed of a resin material, it is possible to efficiently improve the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member and the stabilization of the rack posture. Further, the driving force of the driving means may be applied to only one of the pair of racks, or may be applied to both of the pair of racks.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a ball screw mechanism having a nut, a screw shaft, and a plurality of balls interposed between the nut and the spiral groove of the screw shaft, the nut being at one end side and the other end side of the displacement member And the screw shaft is disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the screw shaft of the ball screw mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the displacement member is a ball. A gaming machine E3 that is displaced along the screw axis of the screw mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is connected to the one side member and the other side member via the ball screw mechanism, so that the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member are interposed. A closed connection loop with the installation member can be formed. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinion disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member are not connected. In the gaming machine E3, the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member can be connected via the ball screw mechanism (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire unit can be increased. Further, since the screw shaft is fixed to the one side member and the other side member, the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member is improved accordingly. This also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the entire unit.

  Further, in the rack and pinion, since the change in the meshing state is large, the state of the displacement member tends to become unstable. On the other hand, in the ball screw structure, due to the structure in which a plurality of balls are interposed between the nut and the spiral groove of the screw shaft, there is very little change in the meshing state. Therefore, for example, it is not necessary to separately provide a rod-like body as in the case of the gaming machine E2. That is, for example, in the gaming machine E2, the first configuration (rack and pinion) for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member, and the stability of the rack posture are improved. The two configurations (the rod-shaped body) for achieving the above are formed by separate members, but according to the gaming machine E3, these two configurations are formed by one member (ball screw mechanism). it can.

  In the structure in which one end side of the displacement member is separately guided to the one side member and the other end side is separately guided to the other side member, a shift is easily caused between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, It is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guide by the one-side member and the guide by the other-side member, not only will the load of the driving means be excessive, but the displacement member may be stopped. In this case, the structure of the gaming machine E3 that guides the displacement member by the ball screw mechanism is particularly effective for suppressing the deviation between the guide by the one-side safety and the guide by the other-side member.

  The gaming machine E2 or E3 includes a movable mechanism formed to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Game machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the gaming machine E4 includes a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is at least one between the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, the gap between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member (that is, the deviation between the rack on the one side member side and the rack on the other side member side, or the one side member) Even if a shift between the nut on the side and the nut on the other member side occurs, the shift can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine E4, a rod-like body or a screw shaft is disposed on one side member and the other side member, the rack is connected to the rod-like body, and the nut is connected to the screw shaft via a ball. Or the posture of the nut can be stabilized. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member of the displacement member and the guide by the other side member, the movable mechanism itself can be easily deformed, and the function of absorbing the deviation by the movable mechanism is surely exhibited. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming machine E5 is connected to at least one of the one side member or the other side member in a displaceable state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one side member and the other side member in a displaceable state. The relative positions of the side member, the other side member, and the interposed member can be adjusted. Therefore, when attaching the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member for guiding the displacement member and the other side member) to the attachment target, for example, the one side member and the other side member or the intermediate member. Even when one of the installation members is attached and the other is displaced with respect to the attachment position, the other position can be adjusted and attached to the attachment position. As a result, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  In particular, when a movable mechanism is interposed in at least one position of the displacement member as in the gaming machine E4, deformation of the movable mechanism can be used, so that the workability of the mounting work for mounting the unit to the mounting target is improved. Can be achieved.

  In addition, as an aspect of the displacement of the interposed member with respect to the one side member and the other side member, for example, rotation by a shaft support, linear or curved slide displacement by a guide groove, displacement in an arbitrary direction by loose fitting, or Examples include displacement in a direction in which elastic deformation of the elastic body by elastic support is allowed.

  In the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposition member are connected at one place, and the connection place is connected in a displaceable state by fastening with a screw. A gaming machine E6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the interposition member are connected at one place, and the connecting place is fastened by screws. Since they are connected in a displaceable state, relative rotation of the interposed member with respect to the one side member or the other side member can be allowed with the screw as the rotation axis. Therefore, when attaching the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member that guides the displacement member and the other side member) to the attachment target, the attachment position with respect to the attachment target can be adjusted. The workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  Furthermore, after the unit is mounted on the mounting target, the unit can be fixed to the mounting target so as not to be displaced by a fastening force by a screw. That is, in the state before the unit is attached, the fastening of the screw is temporarily fixed, and the attachment position can be adjusted by the above-described relative displacement, and the fastening of the screw is permanently fixed (tightening) in the attaching operation. The unit can be firmly fixed to the mounting target.

  In addition, as a structure for fixing the unit to the mounting target so as not to be displaced, for example, a screw is formed as a tapping screw, and is fastened to a connecting portion between one side member or the other side member and the interposed member, And a unit that is relatively rotatable, and the tip of the tapping screw is fastened to an attachment target, whereby the whole is fixed so as not to be displaced by the axial force of the tapping screw.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposed member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, at least one of the one side member or the other side member and the interposed member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement. Alternatively, the relative displacement of the interposed member with respect to the other side member is allowed, and the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member that guides the displacement member) is attached to the attachment target. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate part such as a screw for connecting the two while improving workability at the time, so that the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The engaging displaceable engagement includes a form in which the other shaft is rotatably inserted in one hole, a form in which the other shaft is slidably inserted in one groove, and the other convex portion in one recess. The form etc. which slidably fit are illustrated.

  Any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, comprising: a target member disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member; and biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member. The urging force of the means is applied to the interposed member so that the state where the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member is maintained. .

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E5 to E7, the biasing means disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member in order to apply a biasing force to the target member. And the biasing force of the biasing means acts on the interposed member so that the state in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member is maintained. At least the interposition member can be temporarily fixed to the other side member. Therefore, even when the interposition member is interposed in a displaceable state with respect to the one side member and the other side member, the unit (guides the displacement member) by temporary fixing using the urging force of the urging means. It is possible to improve the working efficiency when attaching the structure body in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member to be attached to the attachment target.

  Further, the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the interposed member to the one side member and the other side member, and accordingly, the number of parts and assembly Man-hours can be reduced.

  As a form in which the biasing force of the biasing means is applied to the interposed member, one end of the biasing means is connected to the target member and the other end is connected to the interposed member to apply the biasing force to the interposed member. When the target member is disposed in each of the first form and the one side member and the other side member, one end of the urging means is connected to one target member of the both target members and the other target member is connected Examples include a second form in which the other end of the biasing means is connected, and an intermediate portion between the one end and the other end of the biasing means is brought into contact with the interposed member to apply a biasing force to the interposed member. The

  In the first embodiment, the target member and the urging means may be disposed only in one of the one side member and the other side member. The urging means may be provided, and the other ends of the urging means may be connected to the interposed member. In the former case, for example, in the structure in which the target member and the urging means are disposed only on one side member of the one side member and the other side member, the one end side of the interposed member is recessed on the one side member and The urging force of the urging means is coupled in such a way that it can be displaced by the engagement of the convex portion, and the other end side of the interposed member is rotatably coupled to the other side member by a shaft support, and the convex portion is inserted into the concave portion. The form which gives urging | biasing force to an interposed member so that is acted is illustrated. According to this embodiment, the interposing member is rotated by the applied urging force around the shaft support on the other end side, and the concave / convex engagement can be formed by this rotation. Even in the case where only the urging force is used, it is possible to reliably maintain the engagement (the state where the interposition member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member) only by the urging force.

  Further, as the target member, a rack and a pinion are disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is linearly moved. Thus, a rack in a structure for displacing the displacement member is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E8, when the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one side member or the other side member, it is connected in a state in which displacement in a three-dimensional direction is allowed. A gaming machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E5 to E8, three-dimensional when the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one side member and the other side member in a displaceable state. Since the coupling is performed in a state where displacement in the direction is allowed, the adjustment range of the relative positions of the one side member, the other side member, and the interposed member can be expanded. Therefore, when attaching the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member for guiding the displacement member and the other side member) to the attachment target, for example, the one side member, the other side member, and the intermediate member. Even when the mounting surfaces of the installation members are non-parallel, the posture of each member can be adjusted with respect to the mounting surface. As a result, the workability of the mounting work can be improved.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E9 includes a base member to which the one side member, the other side member, and the interposed member are attached, and at least the one side member and the other side member are displaceable with respect to the base member. A gaming machine E10 that is attached in a state.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, since at least one side member and the other side member are attached to the base member in a displaceable state, the displacement of the displacement member Can be stabilized. That is, the one side member and the other side member are not rigidly connected to the base member, but are attached in a displaceable state, and the displacement (that is, rattling or wobbling) is utilized to obtain the displacement member. The deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member can be absorbed, and as a result, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized.

  In addition, the object attached in a displaceable state with respect to the base member is a case where the interposed member is displaceably connected to the one side member and the other side member as in gaming machines E5 to E9. In addition, only the one side member and the other side member may be provided, and in addition to this, the interposed member may be attached in a displaceable state. On the other hand, when the interposed member is connected to the one-side member and the other-side member in an undisplaceable state (that is, rigidly connected), the one-side member, the other-side member, and the interposed member Both are attached in a state displaceable with respect to the base member.

  In the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the target member, and an intermediate portion of the biasing member. A gaming machine E11, wherein the abutting member is disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, a biasing unit that applies a biasing force to the target member, Since the contact member is disposed on the base member, one of the one side member and the other side member (that is, the target member is disposed). When the object is displaced with respect to the base member (that is, rattling or wobbling occurs), the relative position between one of the one side member and the other side member and the contact member can be changed. . Therefore, by changing the relative position, the contact position of the contact member with respect to the urging means can be changed, and the urging means can be bent or the degree of bending of the urging means can be changed. The direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the target member can be changed. That is, according to one state of the one side member and the other side member (change in posture with respect to the base member), the biasing direction to the target member can be actively controlled only by the mechanical structure.

  In addition, as a target member, a rack and a pinion are disposed on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is directly moved. Thus, a rack in a structure for displacing the displacement member is exemplified. Here, when one of the one side member and the other side member (the one on which the rack is disposed) is displaced (rattles or wobbles) with respect to the base member, the posture of the displacement member changes due to the rattling. As a result, the posture of the rack is changed, and the meshing state with the pinion becomes unstable. In this case, according to the gaming machine E11, as described above, the biasing direction to the target member (rack) is actively controlled according to one state (change in posture) of the one side member and the other side member. Therefore, the urging direction of the urging means applied to the rack can be changed in a direction in which the meshing state with the pinion is stabilized.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a second pinion that is directly or indirectly connected to the pinion, and a second rack that is meshed with the second pinion, and the second rack is driven by the driving means. Thus, the second pinion is rotated, the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion accompanying the rotation of the second pinion, and the displacement member is displaced, and the second rack is a crank mechanism. The game machine E12 is driven by the driving means via

  Here, in the gaming machine E12, the linear motion of the second rack is transmitted to the second pinion and the pinion and converted into a rotational motion, and then the rotation is transmitted from the pinion to the rack and converted into a linear motion. By using, the stroke amount of linear motion is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, when a structure in which the second rack is driven by the driving means via the third pinion is adopted, the second rack has a tooth surface for the second pinion and a tooth surface for the third pinion. There is a problem that the longitudinal dimension of the second rack increases accordingly.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the second rack is driven by the driving means via the crank mechanism, so that the tooth surface for the third pinion can be dispensed with. Accordingly, the longitudinal dimension of the second rack can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E12, the crank mechanism has an eccentric pin that protrudes at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and is rotated by a driving force of a driving means, and is extended to the second rack and extended from the second rack. A gaming machine E13 comprising a rack groove through which an eccentric pin is slidably inserted.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E12, the rotating body is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is positioned in the rack groove of the second rack. Can be slid along (sliding displacement), and thereby the second rack can be moved linearly.

  The rack groove may be a concave groove provided in the second rack, or may be an opening (through hole) provided in the second rack. Moreover, it is preferable that the extending direction of the rack groove is set to a direction orthogonal to the linear motion direction of the second rack. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of components other than the linear movement direction of the second rack in the force component applied to the rack groove of the second rack from the eccentric pin of the rotating body, and to minimize the resistance, the second rack This is because it can be moved directly.

  In the gaming machine E12, a protruding pin protruding from a surface of the rack facing the one side member or the other side member, and a protruding pin of the rack extended from the one side member or the other side member are slidably inserted. The crank mechanism has an eccentric pin protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the eccentric pin of the rotating body is rotatable. A shaft hole formed in the second rack, and the guide groove of the one side member or the other side member is displaced as the rotating body of the crank mechanism is rotated, A gaming machine E14, wherein the projecting pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove to displace the second rack along the tooth surface of the second pinion.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E12, the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole of the second rack, so that the driving force of the driving means When the rotating body is rotated by the rotation of the rotating body, the projecting pin of the second rack is slid along the guide groove extending to the one side member or the other side member with the rotation of the rotating body. Can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion. Therefore, even when the attitude of the rack is violated, the engagement between the second rack and the second pinion can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

  Further, the second rack and the crank mechanism (rotating body) are connected by inserting an eccentric pin into the shaft hole in a rotatable manner. That is, if the second rack is formed with a shaft hole having a circular cross section. Since it is not necessary to extend a long hole-like groove for sliding (sliding displacement) the eccentric pin, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rigidity of the second rack.

  Note that the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion when the second tooth of the second pinion is changed to the arcuate tooth surface of the second pinion when viewed in the axial direction of the second pinion. This means an operation in which the second rack is rotated around the axis of the second pinion while maintaining the state of contact with each other (the state where the straight line of the rack tooth surface is the tangent of the arc of the pinion tooth surface).

  Further, the guide groove may be a concave groove formed in the one side member or the other side member, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the one side member or the other side member.

  Any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, further comprising a detecting means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the gaming machine E15 is provided with detection means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism. It is possible to detect reaching the other end side, that is, that the displacement member has reached the start end and the end.

  In this case, in the structure in which the detection means detects that the rack has reached one end and the other end of the linear motion range in order to detect that the displacement member has reached the start end and the terminal end, respectively, in the rack linear motion range. Since it is necessary to dispose the detection units (sensors) at one end and the other end, both of these positions are separated from each other, so that there is a problem that the wiring becomes long. In other words, the longer length not only increases the member cost, but also makes it difficult to route the wiring to avoid interference with other members, which reduces the degree of design freedom and is caught by the movable member. The risk of disconnection at the site increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the rotation position (phase) of the crank mechanism is detected by the detecting means, so that one end of the crank rotation range and the other Even if the detectors (sensors) are arranged at the ends, they can be arranged close to each other. Accordingly, since the wiring can be shortened, not only the member cost can be reduced, but also the degree of freedom in design and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed.

  Note that the crank mechanism includes a rotating body that has a crank pin that protrudes eccentrically from the center of rotation and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a recess through which the crank pin of the rotating body is slidably inserted. A structure having a crank groove recessed in the second rack as the groove is exemplified. In this case, the detection means detects the rotational position (phase) of the rotating body of the crank mechanism by the detection unit (sensor).

<About the concept of the invention taking the upper arm body 435 or the lower arm body 436 as an example>
An effect member, a displacement means for displacing the effect member between the retracted position and the effect position, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, the effect member in a predetermined posture at the effect position In the gaming machine formed to be displaceable, the displacing means includes a base member, and an arm body that is rotatably connected to the base member at one end side and the effect member is displaceably disposed at the other end side. Defining means for defining the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body, and the effect member is moved to the retracted position and the effect by rotating the arm body about the one end side with respect to the base member. A gaming machine F1 that is displaced between positions.

  Here, an effect member, a displacement means for displacing the effect member between the retracted position and the effect position, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, the displacement means comprising a parallel link mechanism. A gaming machine is known in which an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position (see, for example, JP 2012-28226 A).

  That is, the parallel link mechanism includes a first arm and a second arm which are parallel to each other and are equal in length and are interposed between the effect member and the base member, and the first arm and the second arm are parallel to each other. Is rotated with respect to the base member. Therefore, it is possible to displace the effect member while maintaining the posture of the effect member constant, and thus it is possible to arrange the effect member in a predetermined posture at the effect position.

  However, as in the conventional gaming machine described above, in the structure in which the displacement means uses the parallel link mechanism, interference between the first arm and the second arm occurs, so that the operating range of the effect member is narrow. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the displacing means includes a base member, an arm body in which one end side is rotatably connected to the base member, and an effect member is disposed to be displaceable on the other end side, Defining means for defining the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body, so that when the arm body is rotated with respect to the base member around the one end side, the posture of the effect member is defined by the defining means. Therefore, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture. In this case, since the arm body does not interfere, the operating range of the effect member can be ensured.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means includes a pair of the arm bodies, and one end sides of the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect member is the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. Each of the pair of arm bodies has a tooth formed at one end thereof, and the one end side is rotatably connected to the base member in a state where the teeth are engaged with each other. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the effect members respectively disposed on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies, and the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member at one end side and the effect member is disposed at the other end side to be displaceable. Then, when the pair of arm bodies are rotated with respect to the base member around the one end side, the effect members respectively disposed on the other end side of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the pair of arm bodies are formed with teeth on one end side thereof and the base member in a state where the teeth of each other are meshed. Since one end side is rotatably connected to this, rotation of a pair of arm bodies can be synchronized. Thereby, the production members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies can be brought into contact with each other with high precision at the production position. In addition, if one of the pair of arm bodies is rotated, the other is also driven and rotated, so that the pair of arm bodies (effect members) can be operated by one driving means.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is characterized in that at the retracted position, the arm body is in a posture along a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, in the retracted position, the arm body is in a posture along the vertical direction, so that the weight of the effect member can be supported by the arm body, Therefore, the driving force of the driving means required for holding the effect member at the retracted position can be suppressed. In this way, it is impossible for the conventional product using the parallel link mechanism to position the arm body in the vertical direction at the retracted position (since the second arm interferes with the first arm), This was made possible for the first time by the present invention. Thereby, suppression of the energy consumption of a drive means can be aimed at.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means includes a slide body that is slidably disposed on the base member, and the effect member is slidably disposed on the slide body. As the arm body is rotated about its one end, the slide body is slid relative to the base member and the effect member is slid relative to the slide body. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that a posture of the effect member with respect to the body is defined.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means includes the slide body that is slidably disposed on the base member, and the effect member is slidably disposed on the slide body. And the arm body is rotated about its one end side so that the slide body can be slid with respect to the base member and the effect member can be slid with respect to the slide body. Can be defined. Thereby, an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position.

  In the gaming machine F4, the base member includes a guide shaft that extends along the direction of slide displacement of the slide body, and a pair of surfaces that extend in parallel to the guide shaft and face each other at a predetermined interval. The slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member so as to be slidable and the lower end side is loosely fitted between the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member. A gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, the resistance when the slide body is slid and displaced with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the arm body is rotated around its one end side to produce an effect member. The operation of displacing can be performed smoothly.

  For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are arranged on the base member and one end and the other end of the slide body are guided so as to be slidable on each of the pair of guide shafts, there are two sliding portions and friction resistance. Will increase. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since there can be one sliding portion, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance when the slide body is slid. Further, according to the gaming machine F4, since the slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member, even if the slide body vibrates and the lower end side of the slide body abuts against the opposing wall portion of the base member. The slide body can be self-corrected to a posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the slide body can be returned to a state in which the lower end side is loosely fitted between the pair of opposing walls of the base member. Therefore, also from this point, the frictional resistance when the slide body slides can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies whose one ends are rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect members can be displaced to the other ends of the pair of arm bodies, respectively. The defining means connects the effect members disposed on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies, and at least one of the connecting portions with the effect member is slidable. As the arm body is rotated about its one end side, the pair of effect members are displaced while at least one of the connection portions is slid and displaced as the arm body is rotated about its one end side. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that a posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body is defined.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the defining means connects the presentation members respectively disposed on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies and Since at least one of the connecting portions includes a slide connecting member that is slidable, at least one of the connecting portions is slid while the arm body is rotated about its one end side. The pair of effect members can be displaced, and the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body can be defined. Thereby, an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position.

  Further, in the gaming machine F6, two sets (one pair) of an arm body and an effect member arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the effect members of each set are connected to the slide connecting member. Since the posture of the effect member relative to the arm body can be defined by connecting the slide body so as to be slidable by the defining means, for example, it is necessary to provide a suspension structure (slide body) as in the case of the gaming machine F4 or F5. Absent. That is, since the slide body can be omitted, the weight can be reduced. Therefore, even if the hanging structure is omitted, it is possible to suppress the play of the effect member only with the arm body.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, two sets of the arm body and the effect member disposed to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the sets are disposed facing each other. In addition, the effect members are separated from each other at a predetermined interval at the retracted position, and the effect member in which the arm body is rotated around one end side from the retracted position is disposed at the effect position. And the effect members abut each other's abutment surfaces, and a positioning projection protrudes from one of the abutment surfaces, and the other abutment surface Is formed with a positioning recess extending along the locus of the positioning projection when the arm body is rotated and receiving the positioning projection, and an engaging portion is formed on the positioning projection. In addition, in the positioning recess, the engaging portion Gaming machine F7, characterized in that if possible the engaged portion is formed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, each set is disposed facing each other, and in the retracted position, the production members of each set are separated from each other by a predetermined interval. And the arm body is rotated around one end thereof to displace each group of effect members in a direction close to each other, and the effect members abut the mutual contact surfaces of each group of effect members. Can be made.

  In this case, a positioning projection protrudes from one abutment surface among the abutment surfaces of the production members, and a positioning when the arm body is rotated is projected to the other abutment surface. Since the positioning concave portion that extends along the locus of the convex portion and receives the positioning convex portion is provided, the positioning convex portion and the positioning concave portion can be engaged with each other at the production position, and the production members can be positioned. . That is, since the production members of each set are close to each other along the locus of circular motion, in the concave shape and the convex shape having the same dimensions, the concave shape cannot be engaged with the concave shape. Since it extends along the locus of the positioning convex portion when the arm body is rotated, the positioning convex portion can be received (engaged) by the positioning concave portion.

  On the other hand, the positioning of the effect members by the engagement of the positioning recess and the positioning protrusion is limited to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning recess. That is, in order to allow the positioning concave portion to accept the positioning convex portion even in the locus of the circular motion of the effect member, the positioning concave portion is extended along the positioning convex portion trajectory. Thus, the positioning projection cannot be engaged. Therefore, the effect members cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and rattling occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, the engaging portion is formed on the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed on the positioning concave portion. In the position, the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be engaged, and as a result, the effect members can be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and the occurrence of rattling can be suppressed. .

  Here, it is conceivable that the positioning members are positioned by omitting the positioning recesses and the positioning projections and providing only the engaging portion and the engaged portion. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion due to the play or wobbling of the effect member due to the elastic deformation or dimensional tolerance of the arm body. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F7, the positioning recess and the positioning protrusion are engaged first, and the effect members are positioned, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. The effects of the rattling and wobbling of the effect member described above can be suppressed, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be reliably engaged.

  In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a protruding direction by a spring, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion are The other is formed as a spherical recess that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which the ball is urged in the protruding direction by a spring, The other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spherical concave portion that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism, so that the ball can be retracted as the effect members move closer to each other. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform the operation from when the positioning convex portion is received in the positioning concave portion until the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged with each other, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion. The engagement with the joint can be released smoothly along with the operation when the effect member is displaced to the retracted position.

  The engaging portion as the ball plunger mechanism is preferably provided in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion as the concave portion is preferably provided in the positioning concave portion. In this case, the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is pressed along the bottom surface of the positioning recess while the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is pressed against the bottom surface of the positioning recess and the ball is retracted, thereby achieving a smooth movement. This is because the engagement of the balls (engaged portions) and the recesses (engaged portions) can be reliably formed.

  In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is attracted by the magnetic force to the one magnet. A game machine F9, which is formed as a magnet or an iron member disposed in the direction of the magnetic pole.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is one magnet. Since it is formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic pole in the direction attracted by the magnetic force, after the positioning convex portions are received in the positioning concave portions, they can be attracted to each other by the magnetic force. Even when there is a displacement between the engaging portion and the engaged portion, both can be engaged (magnetically attached) with high accuracy. As a result, it is possible to accurately position the effect members at the effect position.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and the one side member and the other side member are installed between the one side member and the other side member. A displacement member that is guided and displaced at one end side and the other end side; and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member, and the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the displacement member. The gaming machine F17 is characterized in that the rotating body is rotated by a driving force transmitted from the effect member when the effect member is disposed at the effect position.

  According to the gaming machine F17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, one end of the displacement member can be guided by one side member, and the other end of the displacement member can be guided by the other side member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced along the one side member and the other side member by the driving force of the driving means. Moreover, the rotary body arrange | positioned at the displacement member can be rotated with the drive force transmitted from the production member arrange | positioned in the production position.

  In this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is separately guided to the one side member and the other end side is separately guided to the other side member, a shift is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. It has been difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If a large deviation occurs between the guide by the one-side member and the guide by the other-side member, not only will the load of the driving means be excessive, but the displacement member may be stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F17, since the rotating body is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the effect member arranged at the effect position, the driving means for rotating the rotating body is arranged on the displacement member. It can be omitted. Therefore, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be reduced, and the weight reduction can suppress a deviation between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, thereby stabilizing the displacement member. And can be displaced. Further, the size of the rotating body can be increased as much as the weight can be reduced.

  In addition, in order to rotate the rotating body arrange | positioned at a displacement member, as a means to transmit a driving force from the effect member arrange | positioned in an effect position to a rotating body, the gear provided in the rotating body, and an effect member, for example The gears provided on the rotor are meshed with each other by arranging the effect member at the effect position, and the driving force is transmitted from the effect member to the rotor via the gears, and the rotor (rotor) ) And a stator (stator) on the effect member, and a driving force is transmitted between the rotor and the stator (so-called DC motor structure), or the direction of the magnetic pole on the rotating body A structure (so-called linear motor) in which magnets (fixed magnets) that are alternately changed are disposed along the circumferential direction, electromagnets are disposed on the production member, and driving force is transmitted between the electromagnets and the fixed magnets. ) Is an example That.

<Concept of Invention with Bias Spring 11366 as an Example>
A base member, a target member disposed displaceably on the base member, and one end connected directly or indirectly to the target member and the other end connected directly or indirectly to the base member. Biasing means, and a pair of the target members are disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the biasing means are disposed in a bent posture and of the pair of target members. A gaming machine G1 having one end connected directly or indirectly to one of the target members and the other end connected directly or indirectly to the other target member of the pair of target members.

  Here, the base member, a target member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and one end thereof is directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the base member. And a biasing means to be connected, and a pair of target members are disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, and the pair of target members are each biased by different biasing means. For example, refer to JP2013-169262A). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving unit, the driving force of the driving unit can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing unit.

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, each target member is urged by a separate urging means, so that the urging force applied to each target member is large due to individual differences of these separate urging means. There was a problem that variation occurred in the thickness.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when a pair of target members are displaceably disposed on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are disposed on one and the other of the pair of target members. Since each is connected, the urging | biasing force provided to a pair of object member can be equalize | homogenized. That is, when two urging means are provided, the urging force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in characteristics (such as dimensional tolerance) of the respective urging means. By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, variation in the urging force applied to each target member can be suppressed. As a result, variation in the displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

  In this case, a pair of target members may be disposed on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be disposed on different base members. It may be a form.

  In addition, the gaming machine G1 has one side member and another side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and is constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and is connected to the one side member and the other side member at one end side. It is particularly effective to apply to a gaming machine that includes a displacement member that is guided and displaced on the other end side, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the gaming machine G1 to the configuration for guiding one end side of the displacement member and the configuration for guiding the other end side. In such a gaming machine, a shift is likely to occur between the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side of the displacement member, and it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. By applying, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and variations in their displacement can be suppressed, so that the guide on one end side of the displacement member and the guide on the other end side can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement can be suppressed and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a connecting member connected to the base member, and one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means is The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained by contacting the connection member. A gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the intermediate portion of the urging means having one end and the other end connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as a base. Since the urging force is applied so that the connection between the base member and the connecting member is maintained by pressing the member, the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, the work efficiency at the time of attaching these base members and connecting members to an attachment object can be improved by such temporary fixing. Further, since the urging force of the urging means can be used not only as the urging force of the target member but also as the fixing force of the connecting member to the base member, a member for fixing the connecting member to the base member (for example, ), And it is not necessary to prepare a fastening screw), and it is not necessary to perform fastening work. Accordingly, the number of parts and the number of assembly steps can be reduced accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention taking the arm body 7641 and the roller receiving portion 7311e as an example>
One side member and other side member disposed at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member are respectively guided between the one side member and the other side member and are guided between the one side member and the other side member. A displacement member that is displaced; and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, the displacement member being rotatably disposed on the displacement member, and a rotational driving force applied to the rotation member. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a rotation driving means for providing a displacement restriction means for restricting a displacement of the displacement member.

  Here, a game that produces an effect of rotating a rotating body is known (see, for example, JP 2012-231926 A). In addition, the one side member and the other side member that are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, a long displacement member that is installed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force is applied to the displacement member. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine including a driving unit that performs such a function is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-14602). For example, in the case where the former rotating body is disposed on the latter displacement member, the position where an effect is produced by the rotation of the rotating body can be changed by the displacement of the displacement member.

  However, in this case, in the structure in which one end side of the displacement member is separately guided to the one side member and the other end side is separately guided to the other side member, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is likely to occur. For this reason, when the rotating body is rotated, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is easily amplified due to the rotation of the rotating body, and there is a problem in that the movable part is worn or damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, since the displacement restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member is provided, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when the rotating body is rotated. . Therefore, even if the rotating body is rotated, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed, and as a result, wear and breakage of the movable part can be suppressed.

  In addition, even when other members are disposed near the rotating body at the production position, the rotating body can collide with other members by suppressing the rattling or wobbling of the displacement member by the displacement regulating means. Can be suppressed. In other words, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the rotating body while positioning the other member close to the rotating body.

  Four sets of arm members and effect members arranged to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm members are arranged, and the effect members of each set come into contact with each other at the effect position. A form in which an annular shape is formed and the annular shape surrounds the rotating body (an annular shape is disposed around the rotating body) may be employed. According to the gaming machine H1, as described above, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed and the rotating body can be prevented from colliding with the effect member. That is, even in the form in which the annular shape (the production member) surrounds the rotating body, these collisions can be prevented, so that a state in which both are brought close together and the gap between the annular shape and the rotating body is smaller can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating only the rotator while allowing the player to recognize the circular shape and the rotator as one circle as a whole, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine H1 includes a movable mechanism formed to be deformable, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, a movable mechanism that is deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed at least at one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even when a deviation occurs between the guide by the one side member and the guide by the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

  On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is likely to occur as the movable mechanism is deformed. For this reason, when the rotating body is rotated, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member is increased as compared with the case where the movable mechanism is not provided, and the movable part is likely to be worn or damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, the displacement of the displacement member can be regulated by the displacement regulating means, so that even when the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement member may be rattled or wobbled. This can suppress the wear and breakage of the movable part and the collision between the rotating body and the production member.

  In addition, it is impossible to perform an effect by bringing the effect member close to the rotating body that rotates as described above because it is necessary to avoid a collision with the rotating body, and in particular, when a movable mechanism is provided, Since the backlash and wobble of the displacement member become excessive, it is impossible to rotate the rotating body itself. On the other hand, by adopting a structure that restricts the displacement of the displacement member by the displacement restricting means as in the present invention, it becomes possible for the first time to rotate the rotating body even when a movable mechanism is provided. It is a thing.

  In the gaming machine H2, the movable mechanism is formed to include a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the displacement restricting means includes the guided portion of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine H3 that restricts at least displacement of the displacement member in a direction guided along the line.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the displacement regulating means at least regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the guided portion of the movable mechanism is guided along the guide groove. It is possible to efficiently regulate the factors that cause the rattling and wobbling of the member. Therefore, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member can be reliably suppressed while reducing the force required for the displacement regulating means.

  In the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformable members separated by the movable mechanism, and the displacement restricting means is formed so as to be insertable into the gap. A gaming machine H4, wherein the insert is inserted into the gap.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformable members separated by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the gap can be inserted into the gap. Since the displacement restricting means includes the insertion member to be inserted and the insert is inserted into the gap, the movable mechanism can be restrained so as not to be deformed (that is, the movable mechanism is fixed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling or wobbling of the displacement member when the rotating body is rotated, and it is possible to suppress the wear or breakage of the movable part and the collision between the rotating body and other members.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the game machine includes at least three sets of the arm body and an effect member disposed displaceably on the other end side of the arm body, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. And a rotation base formed concentrically with the rotating body, and the displacement restricting means is configured such that when the effect member is disposed at the effect position, the effect members or the displacement means of the respective groups are A gaming machine H5, wherein the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by being brought into contact with the outer periphery of the rotation base.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of effects members arranged displaceably on the other end side of the arm body are provided, The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement member by causing each set of the production member or the displacement means to contact the outer periphery of the rotation base when the production member is disposed at the production position. The displacement can be regulated by contacting the outer periphery of the rotating base at a location. That is, since the outer periphery of the rotating base is held at a plurality of locations, displacement of the rotating base (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body, and a plurality of effect members The relative position of the rotating body with respect to can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the game machine includes at least three sets of the arm body and an effect member disposed displaceably on the other end side of the arm body, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. A rotating base formed concentrically with the rotating body, the magnet being disposed on one of the effect member or the displacement means and the rotating base, and the other being made of a magnet or iron. A member is disposed, and the displacement restricting means is configured such that when the effect member is disposed at the effect position, the magnetic force applied between the effect member or the displacement means of each set and the rotation base, A gaming machine H6 characterized by restricting displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the gaming machine H6 includes at least three pairs of effect members disposed so as to be displaceable on the other end side of the arm body, The displacement restricting means restricts the displacement of the displacement member by the magnetic force applied between the effect member or the displacement means of each set and the rotation base when the effect member is disposed at the effect position. The displacement of the rotation base can be regulated by applying a magnetic force at the location. That is, since the magnetic force is applied to the rotating base from a plurality of directions, displacement of the rotating base (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be suppressed in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body. The relative position of the rotator relative to the effect member can be positioned at a predetermined position.

  Note that in the gaming machines H5 and H6, the contact position where each group of presentation members or displacement means is in contact with the outer periphery of the rotating base or the position where the magnetic force is applied is equal in the circumferential direction (for example, in the case of three sets). Is preferably set at an interval of 120 °. In this case, there are four sets of arm members and effect members that are displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm members, and the effect members or the displacement means of each set are in contact with the outer periphery of the rotary base. It is preferable that the contact position or the position where the magnetic force is applied be set at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (that is, 90 ° intervals). The rotation base can be constrained from four sides by placing the contact positions or the positions where the magnetic force acts oppositely (arranged by 180 degrees in phase), so the displacement (rattle or wobble) can be controlled in any direction. If the relative position of the rotating body with respect to each group of production members is displaced, rotation with respect to the production members is caused by contact when the production members of each group are arranged at the production positions. This is because the relative position of the body can be corrected (positioned). When four groups of effect members form an annular shape at the effect position, centering can be performed in which the rotating body is positioned concentrically with respect to the annular shape, which is particularly effective.

  Further, when magnets are disposed on both the effect member or the displacement means and the rotation base, the magnetic poles of these magnets may be in a direction in which a magnetic force acts in a direction in which they are attracted to each other, or The direction in which the magnetic force acts in the direction of repelling each other may be used.

  In the gaming machine H5 or H6, when each group of effect members is disposed at the effect position, each effect member abuts an adjacent effect member with each other's abutment surface, and one abutment surface The magnet is disposed, and the other contact surface is disposed with a magnet or an iron member in the direction of the magnetic pole in the direction attracted by the magnetic force to the one magnet, The gaming machine H7, wherein when the effect member is disposed at the effect position, the contact surfaces of the effect member are magnetized.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5 or H6, when each group of production members is arranged at the production position, each production member touches the adjacent production members with each other. Since the contact surfaces are magnetized by using the magnetic force of the magnet, the effect members can be firmly coupled. As a result, when the displacement defining means (the production member or the displacement means) abuts on the rotation base or the magnetic force is applied to regulate the displacement of the rotation base, the displacement regulation means (the production member) itself may become unstable. It is possible to hold the rotating base firmly by suppressing rattling. As a result, the displacement of the rotating base member (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member) can be reliably suppressed, and the relative position of the rotating body with respect to the plurality of effect members can be reliably positioned at a predetermined position.

<About the concept of the invention taking the second specific winning port 66a and the second variable winning device 66 as an example>
Displaced between a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a winning opening provided in the gaming board, an open position that allows winning to the winning opening, and a closed position that restricts winning to the winning opening A gaming machine comprising an opening / closing member that is provided on the front side of the opening / closing member and that overlaps at least a part of the opening / closing member in a front view.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a winning opening and an opening / closing member that is displaced between an open position that allows winning to the winning opening and a closing position that restricts winning to the winning opening (for example, JP, 2010-131375, A). However, in this gaming machine, it is possible to stop (stop) the ball launch in accordance with the timing at which the opening / closing member is displaced to the closed position. Therefore, there is a problem that the progress of the game is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the front member that is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing member and overlaps with at least a part of the opening / closing member in a front view is provided, It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing operation at the time of switching, and the player can be prevented from stopping. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  In the gaming machine I1, the front member is formed so as to be displaceable, and a displacement position of the front member is different between a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed and a state where the opening / closing operation is not performed. A gaming machine I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, in a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed (for example, a special gaming state), the front and the displacement position is different from the state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is not performed. Since the member is displaced, even if the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is hidden by the front member and cannot be visually recognized, the gaming state (whether the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed or not is based on the displacement position of the front member). ) Can be determined by the player. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member, and it is possible to determine whether the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed (for example, a special gaming state) while suppressing the stoppage. Can be enjoyed.

  In the gaming machine I2, at least in a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed, the front member overlaps the entire displacement locus of the opening / closing member in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2, at least in a state in which the opening / closing member is opened / closed, the front member overlaps the entire displacement locus of the opening / closing member in front view, that is, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member. Is blocked by the front member and cannot be visually recognized by the player, so that the player can be surely restrained from stopping, and as a result, it is easy to restrain the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the game machine includes a flow-down area partition member that partitions a flow-down area where the ball flows down and in which the opening / closing member is disposed in the flow-down area partitioned, the opening / closing member and the flow-down area A gaming machine I4, wherein at least a front side of the partition members is formed of a light transmissive resin material.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, at least the front side of the flow area dividing member is formed of a light transmissive resin material, so that the ball that flows down is given to the player. It can be visually recognized. In this case, since the opening / closing member is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the visibility of the player can be reduced by allowing the player to melt the opening / closing member into the flow area dividing member. Therefore, it is possible to surely suppress the player's stopping, and as a result, it is possible to easily prevent the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  In the gaming machine I4, the opening / closing member is made of a transparent resin material, and at least the front side of the flow area dividing member is made of a translucent resin material.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the opening / closing member is formed from a transparent resin material, and at least the front side of the flow-down region partition member is formed from a semi-transparent resin material. The visibility of the opening / closing member can be reduced while making the ball visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to surely suppress the player's stopping, and as a result, it is possible to easily prevent the game from temporarily stopping and preventing its progress.

  Note that when the opening / closing member is formed of a transparent resin material and at least the front side of the flow area dividing member is formed of a translucent resin material, the latter light transmittance is lower than the former light transmittance. (That is, the relative relationship between the two) and is not intended to be specified by the absolute value of the light transmittance.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a flow-down area partition member is provided that partitions a flow-down area where a ball flows down and in which the opening and closing member is disposed in the partitioned flow-down area, An upper end portion that receives a ball that is located at the upper end and flows down the game area; and a retreat portion that is connected to the downstream side of the upper end portion and that is provided with the opening and closing member and is retracted to the back side from the upper end portion. A gaming machine I6 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I6, the flow area partition member is connected to the upper end portion that receives the ball that is positioned at the upper end and flows down the game area, and downstream from the upper end portion. The retractable part is provided with an opening / closing member, and the retracted part is positioned rearward from the upper end, so that a space can be secured between the retracted part and the glass unit. A front member can be arrange | positioned using space.

  Moreover, a step can be formed between the upper end portion and the retracted portion by retracting the retracted portion with respect to the upper end portion. Therefore, when a sphere is introduced into the flow-down region partition member, displacement can be imparted to the sphere by the step, and the flow-down speed can be reduced. Thereby, for example, in a state where the opening / closing member is disposed at the open position, it is possible to stably enter the winning opening.

  In the gaming machine I6, a gaming machine I7, wherein a plurality of ridges or grooves are arranged in parallel at the upper end.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, since a plurality of ridges or grooves are arranged in parallel at the upper end portion, when a plurality of balls flow into the flow area partition member, Before the sphere passes through the step, the flow direction of each sphere can be rectified in a predetermined direction by contact with the side surface of the ridge or groove. Therefore, even when a plurality of spheres are concentrated, it is possible to smoothly pass the steps and suppress clogging of the spheres.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, H1 to H7, I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine K1 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, H1 to H7, I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine K2 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, H1 to H7, I1 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine K3 that is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
<Means>
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed on the front side, a winning opening provided in the gaming board, an open position that allows winning to the winning opening, and the winning opening. An opening / closing member that is displaced between closed positions that restrict winnings, and includes a front member that is disposed on the front side of the opening / closing member and overlaps at least a part of the opening / closing member in a front view.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the front member is formed to be displaceable, and a displacement position of the front member is in a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed. The displacement position is different depending on the state where it is not performed.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, at least in a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed, the front member overlaps the entire displacement locus of the opening / closing member in a front view.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to ensure the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being hindered.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 66a 2nd specific prize opening (winning prize)
210 Back case (base member)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310 Displacement member 311a Projecting pin (guided part, part of movable mechanism)
311b Stopper surface (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
312 Rotating base 313 Rotating body (second displacement member)
314a oblong hole (guide groove, part of movable mechanism)
314b Stopper surface (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
314c Slider holding part (part of connecting part)
315c Slider holding part (part of connecting part)
315 First rack (rack)
320L One side member 320R, 10320R, 13320R Other side member 331, 10331, 15331, 16331 Back base (opposing member, base member, cover member)
331b Rack shaft (a part of guide means, a part of linear motion restricting means, a protruding portion, a second engaging portion)
331c First opening (opening)
331d Second opening (opening)
332, 10332 Intermediate base (base member, cover member)
341 Drive motor (drive means)
351 1st pinion (pinion)
363 Crank gear (part of the crank mechanism, rotating body)
363a Eccentric pin 364 Second rack (rack, target member)
364a Guide groove (part of guide means, guided portion)
364b Rack shaft (part of crank mechanism, guide groove)
365a Second pinion (pinion)
366, 11366 Energizing spring (urging means)
367 roller (rotating contact member, contact member)
367b Flange part (stop plate member)
370 Interposition member (joint member)
420 Back base (base member, cover member)
422a Upper rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
422b Lower rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
431 Drive motor (drive means)
433 Rack 433c Upper guide groove (opening, guided portion)
433d Lower guide groove (opening, guided portion)
435 Upper arm body (arm body)
436 Lower arm body (arm body)
440R1, 440R2 Ring segment (part of regulating means, third displacement member, effect member)
440L1, 440L2 Ring segment (part of regulating means, third displacement member, effect member)
450 Posture defining member (part of defining means, slide body)
460 Slide mechanism (part of base member)
462 Guide rod (guide shaft)
480 Cover body (cover member, base member)
491 Positioning convex part 491a Engaging concave part (engaging part or engaged part)
492 Positioning concave part 492a Engaging convex part (engaged part or engaging part)
662 Front cover (flow area partition member)
662c Outer edge (upper end)
662d Indentation part (retreat part)
663 Rotating body (opening / closing member)
664 Displacement member (front member)
860 Substrate member (flowing area partition member)
860c Outer edge (upper end)
860c1 Concavity and convexity (ridges, grooves)
860d hollow part (retreat part)
2610 Ball joint (part of movable mechanism)
2620 Biasing spring (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
3630, 5630 Rubber-like elastic body (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
7311e Roller receiving part (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
7641 Arm body (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
8641 Base (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
8642 insertion part (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
9652a-9652e Magnet (a part of biasing means)
9651 Metal rod (part of biasing means)
10331e Slit part (guide means)
10367 roller (rotating contact part, displacement contact member, contact member)
10367b First flange portion (stop plate member)
10367c 2nd flange part (stop plate member)
11661 roller (displacement contact member, contact member)
13671 Telescopic actuator (contact member driving means)
15331g 1st regulation part (a part of guide means)
15331h Second restriction part (part of guide means)
16681 Concave portion (part of linear motion regulating means, first engaging portion)
17493a Indentation part (engagement part or engaged part)
17495 Ball plunger mechanism 17495a Ball part (engaged part or engaged part)
18453 Holding part (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
1991 Magnet (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
1992 Metal plate (part of regulating means, part of displacement regulating means)
P Guide rod (bar-shaped body)
S Slider (part of connecting part)

Claims (3)

Displaced between a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, a winning opening provided in the gaming board, an open position that allows winning to the winning opening, and a closed position that restricts winning to the winning opening In a gaming machine provided with an opening and closing member
A gaming machine comprising a front member disposed on a front side of the opening / closing member and overlapping at least a part of the opening / closing member in a front view.   The front member is formed so as to be displaceable, and a displacement position of the front member is different between a state where the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member is performed and a state where the opening / closing operation is not performed. The gaming machine described.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the front member overlaps the entire displacement locus of the opening / closing member in a front view at least in a state in which the opening / closing member is opened / closed.

Images